GW Hardin - Days of Wonder

The
DAYS OF
WONDER
Dawn of a Great Tomorrow
GW HARDIN
Sequel to
THE MESSENGERS
A New York Times Bestseller
Days.front 2/11/03 10:30 PM Page i
s
The
Days of Wonder
by G.W. Hardin
Days.front 2/11/03 10:30 PM Page iii
The
Days of Wonder
by G.W. Hardin
DreamSpeaker Creations, Inc.

Missoula, Montana 2003
Days.front 2/11/03 10:30 PM Page iv
Copyright 2002 G.W. Hardin
0
No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by any electronic
or mechanical means, including information and retrieval systems, without
prior permission from the publisher in writing.
This is a true story. Some names have been changed at the request of the
individual. Some scenes have been combined into a single scene for the
purpose of bettering the story line.
First printing: February 2003
Publication Data
Hardin, G.W.
The Days of Wonder:
Inspiration, Spirituality, New Age
pp. 240
ISBN 1-893641-01-5
1. Inspiration 2. Spirituality 3. New Age
Cover design: Ken Elliott, G.W. Hardin, and Gary LaCroix

Book design: G.W. Hardin
Set in 11 point Palatino typeface

Printed in the United States of America
Central Plains Book Manufacturing
Arkansas City, KS
Days.front 2/11/03 10:30 PM Page v
Dedication
Dedicated to all the ordinary people

who turn out to be so extraordinary
Acknowledgments
T o those who made this all possible in big and little ways,
especially Nick Bunick, Beth Ayers, Julia Ingram, Brian
Hilliard, Janet Hardin, Ken Elliott, Gary LaCroix, and Martha
Granda Benet.
Days.front 2/11/03 10:30 PM Page vii
Contents
FOREWORD by Mary Ellen Angel Scribe xi
PART I
OPENING THE JOURNAL
CHAPTER 1: The Soft People 17

CHAPTER 2: An Angel in New York 27
CHAPTER 3: Out of Woundedness 45
CHAPTER 4: Sign of the Angels 57
PART II
A TIME FOR HEALING
CHAPTER 5: The Secret 71

CHAPTER 6: A Band of Seekers 91
CHAPTER 7: Shekinah Ministries 111
CHAPTER 8: Dowsing for Angels 127
PART III
CLOSING THE JOURNAL
CHAPTER 9: The Symposium 155

CHAPTER 10: Visitors in Black 177
CHAPTER 11: The Great Return 183
CHAPTER 12: Atira 203
CHAPTER 13: The Angelic Prophecies 217
CHAPTER 14: Interviews in the Angelic Realm 227
RESOURCES LIST 239

Days.front 2/11/03 10:30 PM Page ix
The
Days of Wonder
Days.front 2/11/03 10:30 PM Page xi
Foreword
Hold onto your hats folks. You are about to have a wild
adventure in reading! This book leads where few have traveled
before! You are now entering the magical world that many believe in
as children, but few do as adults. The Days of Wonder is not an
ordinary book. It has the power to change your life!
From the very first chapter, strap on your roller blades as this
riveting story unfolds at a pace almost more rapid than you can
read. The Days of Wonder makes you wish you had taken Evelyn
Woods reading courses so you would possess the skills to read faster
and discover what is unfolding on the next page sooner.
This book is wonder-filled ... most sequels to books are a case of
instant disappointment, but The Days of Wonder, following on the
heals of The Messengers, is powerful; it holds you spellbound!
Reading the story holds you in a dichotomy: At one moment you
want to read it slowly like wrapping your tongue around your
favorite ice cream cone ... to savor every morsel of new knowledge
and have it permeate your memory cells of enjoyment. And in the
next moment you are the greedy sibling trying to bite off the biggest
piece and chomp your way through the book. This sequel has a heart
... that beats with each written word.
When I read something spiritually uplifting, it is my habit to
pencil little hearts in the margins, where the phrases/words of
wisdom touch my heart. Soon after beginning to read the
manuscript for this book, the pages resembled artwork rather than a
piece of literature ... little hearts danced everywhere across the pages.
Do you ever wonder why Disneyland has the power over
millions of people around the world, and why Disneys movies are
viewed over and over by children, then again as adults? What is the
magic of Harry Potter that addicts its readers to the series of books?
It is belief. We all hold an inner belief in the power of good, angels,
God ... and because we cannot see angels, God, magic or mystery as
we age, our dreams of the Land of Oz fades from memory.
xi
Days.front 2/11/03 10:30 PM Page xii
The Days of wonder
The Days of Wonder rekindles the small ember of trust in the

mysteries of the Divine within you. This tiny ember will grow and
flash into a full-blown blaze with each page you read. Maybe one of
the most amazing things about Hardins work is that the people in
the book are real. Their life experiences are real. No one made this
story up. If they had, the narration certainly would be one of the best
fictional stories you have read in a long time. But the events in this
story are not created from the blank slate of the authors mind ...
they are true!
I personally know many of the people, you are about to meet, in
this fascinating book, and watched over the years as their lives
unfolded with the guidance of the Divine. Miracles appear around
every corner to show us how smoothly things flow when we walk
our true lifes journey. The more the participants of this book focused
their attention onto their life missions the clearer their path became
and more miracles amazingly manifested.
What was Gods original intention 2,000 years ago, what was
She/He trying to demonstrate through Jesus and his disciples?
Hopefully this book will rekindle a long hidden reminder in your
heart and soul. It is now time for humanity to receive the full benefit
of that message.
We have entered the days of wonder where the healers of our
world are coming forward to teach various ways to end suffering.
Obviously, this includes the assistance of the angelic realm. The
angels can only help if we ask them, if we fully become ourselves.
The Days of Wonder teaches that the time of modern gurus and
teachers is over. We are our own guru, our own teacher, our own
healer. It offers methods you can employ in your own lives and those
of your loved ones. Thus, this book moves from the leadership of
Nick Bunick into the ways everyday people are coming forward to
show us what it is we can do to bring healing to ourselves and our
planet.
Modern day mystics reveal a new world and a new outlook to
inspire us to embrace the future. Enjoy this amazing reading
adventure into the lives of others and yourself!
On December 4th, 2002, I telephoned psychic Donna Seebos
radio show on KLAY 1480 AM, in Lakewood, Washington, and she
xii
Days.front 2/11/03 10:30 PM Page xiii
Foreword
said I would be receiving a very important phone call on December

15th that would lead to wondrous things. I really like where this will
be going, said Donna as if she was watching a great adventure into
the future.
My first thought was that possibly a TV show would be picking
up some stories from my second book, A Christmas Filled with
Miracles, for the holiday season. A few weeks later, when I was
traveling to Canada to visit my mother, I stopped for several days in
Seattle to stay with Atira. Nothing monumental happened on the
15th. No one phoned me, but Atira had a few phone calls and one
was from G.W. Hardin, co-author of the best-selling book The
Messengers. The three of us have been friends for years and I thought
nothing or extra-special had transpired ... other than to yell across
the room, HELLO.
While Atira was chatting with G.W. she said, Hey, G.W. wants
to know if you will write the foreword to his book The Days of
Wonder. It is an honor to be asked and I quickly responded Yes
and thought nothing more about it until the manuscript arrived
three weeks later, and I started to read it. Only then did the
realization strike, like a hard cold snowball, that the prophesy of
Donna Seebo had come true ... this book is the fabulous news ... for
all of us!
Mary Ellen Angel Scribe

Author, Expect Miracles and A Christmas Filled with Miracles
Editor, Angels and Miracles Good-News-Letter
P.O. Box 1004
Cottage Grove - OR 97424
MaryEllen@AngelScribe.com
www.AngelScribe.com
xiii
Days.front 2/11/03 10:30 PM Page xv
Part I
}
OPENING THE JOURNAL
Days.Ch1 2/12/03 11:49 AM Page 17
1
(
THE SOFT PEOPLE
I t is here. Fanfares of trumpets did not announce its arrival, nor

did marching bands welcome it, but it is here. The earth did not
shake, nor did floodlights of the media brighten its coming. The Age
of Wonders did not fly in on the wings of technological marvel, nor
did it shatter the skies like the first atomic blast. But it is here. Grasp
my hand while I escort you through the gateway to the Age of
Wonders.
Perhaps, this great age floated in on the wing of a butterfly. No,
even that would have been too obvious. The magnificent truth of it
all is that it arrived held in the heart of a single child. That is how all
great ages begin.
Nick leaned forward in his chair rereading a letter which held
him spellbound. An admiring parent had written him. His left hand
seemed to feel the power of its simple words while his other hand
highlighted passages with a colored pencil. Nicks business world
operated by these colored pencils. Important meetings, high-priority
discussions, teleconferences spanning continents and great seas
were color-coded in his executive diary by these pencils. But what
fixed his eyes at this moment was far more important than anything
17
Days.Ch1 2/12/03 11:49 AM Page 18
18 the days of wonder
his colored pencils had ever highlighted before. For at this moment
his pencils highlighted evidence of the Age of Wonders. Yes, it is here,
his red pencil whispered back and forth across the lettering, it is here.
May 4, 1997
Dear Mr. Bunick:
Since the publishing of The Messengers, I imagine that you have

received a lot of letters like mine. Do with it what you will, I just
felt the necessity to make contact with you about a couple of things.
My wife, Carolyn, bought the book, and we read it together over

the period of a couple of weeks. We have personal knowledge of a
story that confirms to us angelic presence. Daniel Meyers is 3 1/2
years old, and was born with a very serious congenital heart
ailment. He has gone thorough several surgeries, and will
experience more before hes through. His mother, Susan, offered
the following testimony in worship at our church on April 6:
This came from a series of quiet discussions with Daniel. It

was one of those things that just flowed from me to the
paper without thought. Later, when I read it, I felt lots of
things, which Im sure you will, too, but mostly I felt it
should be shared.
A child was born who was very ill. The doctors said he had
very little chance of survival. His family felt the child was
special. They prayed, they stayed by his side. The doctor
saw the familys hope and felt the gift of this special child.
Even in the darkest moments, everyone stayed positive.
The family, the friends, doctors and nurses, all worked
together, and the miracle child lived.
This child touched all he met in a special way. People felt

hope because of him. People learned to love, and value
each moment. There were times as he grew when the
parent felt a special presence surrounding him.
As he began to speak, he often spoke to unseen friends he

called the soft people. Often, the soft people seemed to
comfort him in the night or ease a scraped knee before the
parents could get to him.
Days.Ch1 2/12/03 11:49 AM Page 19
the soft people 19
One night, he spoke to his mother of the soft people. He

described them as friends with shiny wings. One soft
person is a little boy who plays with him and spends the
night in his bed. Another is a little girl who tells stories and
likes to play quietly when his heart is tired. There is an old
grandmother who snuggles.
One of the secrets of this special small person that keeps

him going and happy, when most would give up, is, as he
says, he is surrounded by soft people who are his special
friends. His angels.
Carolyn and I find it impossible to imagine how anyone could read

The Messengers and hear about the soft people from the mouth
a three-year-old, and still doubt the existence of angels.
May God pour out his blessings upon you in this outer existence
and those to come, for taking the risk to share your story with all of
us.
Sincerely,
Mark L.
Nick read and reread the letter. The knowledge that the angels
had helped this child, as they had helped Nick, verified what he had
already known within himself: The Age of Wonders had begun.
Throughout the ages, children have served as simple reminders to
us how the Divine intervenes in our lives through these heavenly
messengers. Had not Nicks memories of Jesus, as written in The
Messengers, reminded him and the entire world that God dwells
within each one of us?
Since the release of the book, mail from around the world had
poured into his office. Many of those letters addressed personal
issues, hopes, and aspirations. Many asked for help, others expressed
the desire to volunteer help. All spoke of the inescapable feeling that
hope once again was moving across the face of the Earth. However, it
was one thing to speak of hope, and quite another to live it. Daniel
was living evidence of that hope, living evidence of a new vision
flowing forth, especially from the young, the future hope for our
entire planet. Nick knew that the inevitable was now here: Humanity
Days.Ch1 2/12/03 11:49 AM Page 20
and the realm of angels once again would try to join the worlds of
shepherds and kings to foster the emergence of everlasting peace.
Nick turned the letter over hoping there was more to read.
Leaning back into his executive chair, he thought about what he was
witnessing in his own little son, Nicholas. The tyke could mesmerize
Daddy with unexpected moments of looking up from his toys,
pointing his little hand to the ceiling and grinning with delight.
What do you see, Nicholas? Nick would love to ask.
Angels, would be his sons definitive response. His tiny hands
would reach out as if invisible playmates were reaching for him. His
boyish giggle left little doubt in Dads mind that his child was being
watched over. Yes, the children seem to know. Heaven and Earth are
moving into Oneness.
Nick spoke little of what the angels had conveyed to him about
what was to come to the people of the Earth. The bringing together
of Heaven and Earth would not be like the mixing of eggs and flour
for the baking of a cake. This was not going to be a merging of
ingredients for the festivities of a birthday party. Far from it. No,
Nick knew what he had been told would feed the soul, the heart, and
the spiritual consciousness of all humanity. The angels had
instructed him to be subtle about what he had heard from them. He
was not to reveal the coming events, so people would not be
tempted to focus on physical phenomena and be distracted from
focusing on their own spiritual growth, their own capacity to love,
their own journeys with self-truth.
Since the writing of The Messengers, Nick had started his journal
of messages, which the angels were divulging to him on an ongoing
basis. Significant events, stories, thoughts, and poems were added
with these messages. Staring at the letter, he decided to photocopy it
and add Daniels story of the soft people to his journal. So much
was happening around Nick. Letters such as this filled him with
hope, inspiring him to continue his own remarkable journey.
After inserting Daniels letter, his left hand rested on the journal.
It was all worth it, he said to himself, his fingers rubbing the smooth
cover as if reading angelic braille. His coming forward and revealing
his personal story in The Messengers had prompted an outpouring of
love, hope and inspiration found in the constant flow of mail into his
Days.Ch1 2/12/03 11:49 AM Page 21
the soft people 21
offices. These thousands of letters from all over the world added
further to the words, the dreams, the visions hidden in his journal.
The angels were now saying that it was time to let people know
what was coming, to tell the people of the Earth of the kind of world
they were about to inherit. But when was the right time to speak of
this? That was the question.
Almost unconsciously he opened the journal and began reading:
It is not the end of the world that is coming. It is the beginning of

a new world. A world where people will recognize that happiness
is not found in the accumulation of wealth and the wielding of
power, or created through the motivations of greed and avarice.
The world has created false expectations and false priorities that
cannot be maintained. It is unfortunate, for the greatest reward
one can have is that which comes from sharing love and
compassion with others. If you give love and compassion to
others, so shall you receive the same in return. If you plant an
onion seed in your garden, you do not get a rose in return, but an
onion. So it is with love.
The present offers little difference from the past. Throughout

history, there has existed the need for people to have hope in their
future and belief in their present. Your seniors, those who are your
fathers and mothers, are living on fixed incomes. They have great
fear in becoming a burden to their children and to society. Yet
there is nothing they can do, for they have become spectators to a
changing, confusing, consuming economy. What hope can they
have in the tomorrow?
The young adults of today may not articulate the frustration of

your present-day society, but their actions ring with greater clarity
than any words. Many are choosing to live together in what would
have been considered inappropriate in days past, rather than
entering the convention of matrimony. They do not want to
commit themselves to the standards that have gone before them.
They are suspicious of the future, and many cast aside these old
conventions. And you, who are among them, are not justified in
finding fault with them, for they are in the beginning stages of
their journeys. Can you not sense their frustration in your world?
You all are children of God, for the Lord is your Father and
Mother. And what are the messages God wishes you to hear? Not
Days.Ch1 2/12/03 11:49 AM Page 22
messages where love is turned to fear. Not messages of

compassion changed to messages of guilt. God wishes you to care
for one another as brothers and sisters.
People are searching for a true understanding of their

relationship to God, a relationship of mutual love and respect, not
one based on fear and punishment. Say to one another, Let us join
together as brothers and sisters in every state of our nation, in every
nation of the world, in a spirit of cooperation greater than ever
experienced in the history of humankind. Let us shout with joy our
heartfelt need to be at one with God. Let us help every child of God
in the world learn to enjoy the journey we travel together, in
becoming one with God.
Nick, we have to make a decision about the print run. Gary
had quietly entered his office, interrupting his reading. Nick
looked up at his associate and friend, reflecting on how much the
two of them had gone through together in publishing The
Messengers in the Northwest. It had been a daunting task fraught
with unexpected obstacles, discouragement, and even frustration
at times. It was the price they had paid for bucking the system. But
it also proved to be rewarding beyond anyones expectations
except maybe Nicks.
Gary, are you sure we need to decide now? We are starting to
get inquiries from some of the big publishing houses.
If we dont decide within the week, we wont have enough
books for our national release in March.
Both men had taken different sides of the issue as to whether
they continue in their own efforts as a publisher, or whether they
take advantage of the rising interest being shown by the major
publishers. Gary would remind Nick of the timetable the angels had
presented, and Nick would remind Gary of the monumental tasks
before them, as well as the increasing workload that everyone in the
office was feeling.
Lets not assume that a major house cant bring the book out
quickly, Nick offered. Garys background in the publishing field
told him otherwise, but by this time in their weaving of efforts, Gary
had begun to respect Nicks uncanny instincts in the business world.
Days.Ch1 2/12/03 11:49 AM Page 23
the soft people 23
Gary had worked with Nick and Julia Ingram in writing the
manuscript that would eventually become The Messengers. It had
been a team effort all the way. The angels had given Nick a date
when the book had to come before the public. And the only way to
assure its exposure in a timely fashion was to self-publish which
meant that concentrated human resources and cash would be
needed. It was an easy call for Nick at the time. Since it needed to be
done, it would be done.
All of Nicks colleagues had supported him in his efforts of test
marketing The Messengers in Seattle and Portland. If the angels said to
publish in Seattle, then publish they would. There was a great sense
of trust for what had been communicated from the angelic realm to
those who surrounded Nick. The regional release of the book was a
resounding success in spite of all the problems that had to be faced,
in spite of all the obstacles inherent in a long-established book
industry. An ingenious marketing campaign, meant to go around the
book industrys lethargic system had worked. The book became the
talk of the Pacific Northwest. News crews showed up to find out why
a prominent, respected businessman was daring to tell people that
angels had appeared to him before witnesses encouraging him
to tell his story. Was he was the reincarnation of the spirit and soul of
one of the most influential men in history: Paul the Apostle?
Sure, Nick heard derision and mumbling about having lost his
mind. But he also heard heartfelt praise from people around the
region who had heard his story, believed his sincerity, and trusted in
the messages he had come to deliver even messages that had been
lost over the last 2,000 years. But what was equally captivating was
the information the angels were conveying about the future, telling
of a new kind of world enveloped in peace, compassion, and respect
for all that is inherently good in humanity.
Nicks expected success of The Messengers had forced Gary to
face the possibilities of Nicks vision for a greater world what
Nick liked to call The Great Tomorrow. The time had arrived to
move the book with its messages to a national, if not international
level, and, as publisher, he was responsible for organizing an
advertising campaign with Nick that would be ten times as complex
as the Northwest endeavor. Then there were the matters of print
Days.Ch1 2/12/03 11:49 AM Page 24
runs, national distribution, publicity, and last but not least, the
writing of the sequel. The angels had relayed that events would
unfold around the turn of the millennium. Not only did The
Messengers need to be made available to people but so did the
accumulating information in Nicks journal. The two of them spoke
often about the contents in this journal. Like the national campaign,
both men had different ideas as to when and how this information
should be brought forward.
One fact in particular Gary wanted kept secret. Sara, the angel
seer, spoken of in The Messengers, had been the first to reveal the
secret to Gary over the phone. It had shocked him at the time. Her
telling Nick he had been Paul the Apostle wasnt such a big deal
since Nick had been told several times already by others. But to
compound that with news that Pauls beloved friend, Timothy,
had incarnated at this time as well was just too much. Gary had been
upset for days over this news. The implications disturbed his sense
of responsibility as well as his obsession for the truth. How could
this be true? Him? Saint Timothy? Sara had made a joke out of how
Paul had a nickname for Timothy, Timidus Timothy the Timid
and how that trait still held true in him. To make matters worse,
Nick had entered Garys office afterwards and had stated that Nick
knew what was upsetting him. When Gary asked what, Nick stated,
I know you are the return of Timothy. Ive known for quite a
while.
One thing was obvious about a national campaign, both Nick
and Gary needed help. Nick proposed hiring a man he greatly
respected, Brian Hilliard. Gary had opposed bringing in Brian the
first time Nick had suggested Gary share some of his workload. At
the time, Gary felt too much was happening too fast to spend time
training another person to finish what he had started. Nick had been
patient. Though it was not his usual way, he had learned to let Gary
make his own mistakes. Inevitably, he knew the two would speak
with one voice, as before. Brian was brought on board with Gary
handing over responsibilities to him the way a miser hands out his
own gold, one coin at a time and with reluctance.
Like little Daniel, Gary and Brian would come to know the soft
people as Nick had. The angels were like ushers in the Theatre of
Days.Ch1 2/12/03 11:49 AM Page 25
the soft people 25
Life, helping key figures play their parts in creating a play of epic
proportion. As Scripture so aptly puts it, Who knows the mind of
God? Each of these men would participate in events that few
humans are privileged to witness. Little did Brian and Gary know
what was in store for them. Like other significant moments in his life,
these two men would be added to Nicks angelic journal. And like an
old story told millennia ago, they would help prepare the telling of
another story that the Earth, herself, seemed anxious to hear.
As events would continue to unfold, it would be evident that no
one, not modern-day prophets, not spiritual guides, not even the
angels would know what was stirring within the cosmic soul of God.
Nicks journal contained prophesies and stories, prayers and poems,
thoughts and ideas. Anyone examining any single entry in Nicks
journal would see nothing but a moment in time, a single frame in a
mile of movie film. In Nicks journal, next to Daniels story of the soft
people, was scribbled a passage:
There is a spiritual consciousness spreading throughout the world

like never before in the history of mankind. Our minds are the
gatekeepers of our hearts and souls, and a common voice is
coming forth, threatening to break through those gates, shouting,
Let truth be heard. People from all walks of life are stepping out
of the shadows and into the beauty of Gods sunlight.
We are the children of God, for the Lord is our Father and Mother.
The Spirit of God that resides in each of us is beyond any persons
greatest riches. No amount of money in the world, no amount of
power or control of others can purchase that extraordinary gift, or
take that gift from another. And with this understanding, as we
enter the new millennium, we shall acknowledge all of Gods
children, all of our brothers and sisters. Not through greed, or
envy, or jealousy, but with our hearts full of love and compassion.
We live in a new Age of Wonders which will embrace spiritual

leadership, and we shall learn to enjoy life every moment while
letting others enjoy life through us.
As Nick continued to turn the pages of his Angel Journal, he

thought to himself, Make no conclusions, forecast no future, and expect
no predictable endings, for, truly, who knows the mind of God? It will
Days.Ch1 2/12/03 11:49 AM Page 26
take the combined presence of the God-Within us all, the total

consciousness of humankind, to reach a discernible conclusion as
the last page of this angelic journal is turned. As these pages turn, so
turn the stories of our own lives. What follows are stories which
began as journal entries and evolved into a chorus of voices, a choir
for the Age of Wonders. Neither Nick nor Gary would ever fully
understand the unexpected paths their lives were about to take in
finding these voices.
Listen, as your own soul is tempted to sing a new song with a
million other souls because of what these pages hold. This chorus of
souls is about to reveal what is to befall our world. Trust no single
voice, but hear only the chorus of humanity singing in harmony
with the chorus of angels Peace on Earth, goodwill to all.
(
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 27
2
(
AN ANGEL IN NEW YORK
M ad Dog! Brian yelled across the suite offices. Nick had

branded Gary with the nickname Mad Dog for reasons
known only to Nick. It was tantamount to gracing Ghandi with the
nickname of Crusher. Without waiting for the normal Whats
up? Brian hurtled past Beth and Heathers offices into Garys like a
runner crossing a finish line. You wont believe what just
happened. Gary continued typing away on his laptop. The guy
performed his office duties like a monk in prayer. Brian debated
whether to throw a paper wad to get his attention. Just about the
time Brian was cocking his arm to unleash his makeshift missile,
Gary peered over his computer.
How many guesses do I get? Brians eyes were as bright as
searchlights. The shiny metal frames of his glasses only accented his
excitement.
Forget guesses. Brian would not be thwarted by his cohorts
teasing delay tactics. The two were like confluent rivers, one forever
rushing with rumbling rapids into the the stillness of the other. The
course of their combined efforts could never be predicted. Every
head in the office looked up, including Nicks. Whenever these two
27
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 28
went at it, laughter was inevitable. I just got off the phone with a
New York publisher. They want our book, they want The Messengers,
and theyre ready to deal. Had not Sara, the Angel Lady, told
Nick that the angels predicted a major publisher would come
forward to propel the story into the national limelight? Sara and
Nick stayed in frequent contact. It had been through her that the
original message had come forth about the angels announcing their
presence with the number 444.
So its finally happened, Gary acknowledged, his mechanical
pencil waving back and forth between two fingers. Brian grinned
broadly, knowing the swaying pencil to be the height of emotional
excitement from his colleague.
They want us to come out there and meet with them. Its time
to wheel and deal! Gary sat quietly enthralled, studying Brian as he
bubbled over like campfire coffee on hot coals. If his smile were any
broader, theyd have to widen the door. But Gary remained
uncertain now as he had when he and Nick had debated whether to
finance their own national campaign or try to go with a major
publishing house. It was time to check in with the angels.
}
That night Nick asked for confirmation from his angels as to
whether their strategies were the best way to get the messages in the
book before the world. Little Nicholas woke up fussing, in turn
waking Dad via the intercom between the bedrooms. Nick tiptoed
into his sons bedroom to make sure all was well. After tucking the
infant in, he returned to bed snatching a look at the digital clock. It
was 4:44 a.m. That was the sign he needed. Since the angels had first
started communicating and appearing to Nick, they often used the
number 444 to designate their presence, their love, their approval.
Since the publishing of the book, hundreds of others from all parts
of the country were likewise now seeing this angelic sign. Letters
arrived daily telling funny, touching, and incredible stories, disclosing
the ever-increasing presence of angelic forces upon the Earth. Grown-
ups who werent seeing the soft people were experiencing 444
encounters, realizing that their angels were indeed in their lives.
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 29
an angel in new york 29
Having gotten the sign he had asked for that morning, Nick had
Beth, his executive assistant (the real power behind the throne),
arrange flight reservations to New York for the first week of March.
Gary grumbled that he really wasnt needed in negotiations.
Perhaps money should be saved by having him hold down the fort
here at home.
Mad Dog, youre going to New York with us, Nick insisted.
We need you to be the normal one, so we can wheel and deal. Well
wear our business suits while you wear a turtleneck. And you need
a pipe. You should walk around with a pipe
No way, protested the blushing publisher. The truth of the
matter was that Nick loved to see Gary blush. He went out of his
way to see his friend radiate in crimson. All Nicks years of business
deals had absolved him from the company of such near-innocence.
Men in big business deals simply do not blush. Consequently, Nick
would start chuckling the moment Garys face reddened.
Mad Dog, Brian teased, We cant do this without you, big
fella. It hadnt taken Brian long to appreciate the art of constant
teasing that passed between the suite of offices. Even Beth was a pro.
Poor Mad Dog never had a chance.
Listen, Nick added, Ill call the senior editor in New York and
ask her if its OK if you wear blue jeans and a sport coat with suede
pads on the elbows. Before Garys red could fade to pink, Nicks
fingers had hit the quick-dial button and then the speaker phone
button. Both Nick and Brian had wasted no time in operating on a
first-name basis with the New York editor. Mad Dogs red was now
heating up to vermilion. Even Brian had to turn away his grinned
amazement at how close to purple Gary was flushing. There was
only one ring on the other end.
Hello, this is Lannie.
Lannie, this is Nick Bunick.
Well, hello, Nick. We were just talking about you and your
marvelous book. You packed and ready to come to New York?
Very much looking forward to it, Lannie. Very much. You
remember Gary, our publisher and co-author? Were telling Gary
that its a must that he be at our New York meeting with you good
folks. What do you think?
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 30
Absolutely, she crowed. She knew something was up for Nick

to call her on such a mundane topic. She followed with the Jewish-
mother side of her New York accent, Hes gotta be here.
We think he should dress casually for the meetings, but he
thinks otherwise. Brian silently shook, listening to Nick have his
fun.
Hey, Lannie echoed, now with an Italian accent, he can wear
a dress for all I care. This is New York!
Both Nick and Brian were laughing openly. Beth leaned across
her front desk to peer into Nicks office. What were the boys up to
now? There was entirely too much fun going on. She knew Nick had
to be up to his shenanigans. Garys colorful face betrayed utter
disbelief.
A dress? Really? Nick egged on. Brians chair almost tipped
over with exaggerated delight. Lannie could tell what was going on.
You cant believe what we see here, Lannie continued. We see
all kinds of writers men in dresses, women in see-through, long-
haired male authors, baldheaded female authors ... The bantering
persisted. Even Brian joined in. Gary stared stoically.
The truth of the matter was that Nick had already grown to
respect Lannies people skills. She could carry on a conversation
with seaweed. She was bright, loved to tell jokes, and better yet, she
wanted the book. This kind of informal playfulness only endeared
her more in his eyes. Gary, on the other hand, could not figure out
how he could possibly show his face in New York.
Its settled, Nick concluded as he hung up the phone. We all go.
Mad Dog, dont look so glum. Well have a great time in New York.
}
Nick had come so far since first being told that his soul and spirit
were, indeed, that of Paul the Apostle. Had not the angels urged him
to let the world know? Like Paul on the road to Damascus, Nicks
whole life had been changed by the angelic appearances and
urgings. And now, he was no longer alone in what he saw. How
soul-stirring that the little children also seemed to hold these divine
beings as companions.
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 31
Looking forward, there seemed to be so much at stake. What

could happen in New York might not only change Nicks life forever,
it had implications for changing the lives of millions across the
planet. It had been foretold this day was coming. And here it was at
his doorstep. If he had only known how much detail the angels were
eventually going to provide, he might never have made this trip. If
he had only known how people, themselves, would change over the
course of what was to come, he might have left the letter about the
soft people filed away never to be seen again. And even if he had
known of the upcoming changes, there would have been little he
could have done to anticipate the power of human free will in
altering the course of heavenly intent or human history. He should
have been more attentive with the letter about little Daniel. For this
lovely child was more than a warm story from proud parents; Daniel
loomed as a prophetic metaphor of days to come.
Garys hotel room resembled something out of a Carol Channing
play: over-decorated, almost loud, but restful on the eyes in a
forgotten way. In fact, the same could be said for much of New York.
This was his first trip to the Big Apple, leaving him with a feeling
that he had entered another era. To him, New York was simply an
old and dirty city, but to Nick and Brian New York stood as the
center of the business world, the Mecca of wheeling and dealing.
Between the fortresses of commerce sparkled museums of some of
the worlds finest art, Broadway plays the rest of the country drooled
over, and a fashion industry that instigated more chitchat than did
Neanderthal football. Where else would the front page of the
newspaper discuss the taste of the mayor dressed in drag for a
benefit? Nick and Brian kept trying to enthuse Gary with walks
down streets he had only seen in movies. Their efforts were wasted.
What impressed Gary the most was Nicks sauntering into St.
Patricks Cathedral at the noonday mass. In contrasting fashion, the
dynamic duo of Brian and Nick respectfully tiptoed to one of the
empty pews near the sanctuary while Gary stood silently in the
vestibule absorbing the incredible beauty of the church architecture
embracing human worship. Neither Nick nor Brian were Catholic,
but it had now become part of their respect for all religions to visit a
different church wherever they went. Even though Gary had studied
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 32
for the priesthood at a Benedictine monastery, he viewed everything

before him with arms folded and lips pursed. His were not fond
memories.
Afterwards, the three stood on the cathedral steps staring at the
towering spires. Mad Dog, have you ever been to a real Jewish
deli? Nick asked, as Brian grinned widely at the hint of another
adventure.
Ive been to a deli, and even a kosher deli, but Im not sure
whether I could actually say Id been to a Jewish deli.
Follow me. Youre going to have a new experience. It seemed
as if Nick had to cram as much excitement into the day as was
humanly possible. All three men were slated to have their first
meeting with the publishing house the next morning. The other
interested publishers would be visited the following two days. Why
Nick even tolerated Garys reclusive tendencies was beyond reason,
at least to Gary. If they had left him sitting in the hotel room with
nothing more than a paperback novel and a TV remote, he would
have been satisfied. To him, Brian and Nick were like whirlwinds
kicking up dust in a faded city. But neither was to be denied. If they
show this much energy in the negotiations tomorrow morning, Gary
thought, then pity poor Lannie.
The Jewish deli was a sitcom. The men behind the counter were
yelling instructions like quarterbacks barking out signals all
quarterbacks, no linemen. And Nick joined right in, throwing menu
questions into the huddle of food handlers. What puzzled Gary was
that all the men behind the counter were Latino, probably Puerto
Rican. At least thats what it looked like to him. He had somehow
pictured men in yarmulkes and prayer shawls. Brians eyes widened
brightly with amusement as he tried to toss in an order. In the end,
Gary had to admit that his reuben sandwich was the best he had
ever tasted. If this was typical New York, then he was beginning to
like it.
That evening the three men had scheduled a meeting with a
potential freelance publicist in the hotel cocktail lounge. They wanted
someone who knew the New York crowd, someone who knew the ins
and outs of the local book industry. After Gary made his pitch as
publisher, he sat back and listened to Nick ask strategy questions.
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 33
Brian stole the carafe of goldfish crackers, pouring a handful of the

snack food into his hand. I love this stuff, he commented. It wasnt
until the fifth handful that Gary realized he was in the presence of a
snack-a-holic. The bowl of peanuts disappeared next. The waiter
brought another carafe of goldfish, asking if anyone wanted more
drinks. Gary asked for another round as he witnessed Brian scarf
down more helpless goldfish. The eyes of the publicist began to drift
repeatedly in Brians direction. Her hand dipped into the replenished
peanut bowl, daintily rescuing three peanuts. The conversation about
how to handle publishers over the next three days was going so well
that both Nick and Gary flooded their guest with questions. Brian
was on his third carafe of crackers. Not goldfish this time. They had
run out. It now looked something like Chex Party Mix. The publicist
openly stared as Brian licked his salty fingers.
Gary began to chuckle. Brian? You going to live?
Brians cheerful eyes showed no offense. Im sorry guys, I cant
help it. Its a vice with me. Somebody take this stuff away.
Nick reached over and snatched the carafe to his lap. Even the
publicist began to laugh. The waiter returned, noticing the carafe
was missing. His eyes immediately snapped to Brian, eyebrows
arched questioningly. Gary leaned back with laughter. It was the first
time he had seen Brian blush. As Nick mercifully handed the almost-
empty carafe back to the waiter, Gary teasingly nudged the
remainder of the peanuts Brians way. The evening ended with
everyone reveling in laughter. Poor Lannie, Gary mused once again.
}
Nick had been specific at what time everyone was to meet in the
hotel lobby. Brian had found sleep hard to come by. The excitement
of what was to come pumped him with newfound energy. As he
waited for Nick and Gary to join him, he stared at his reflection in
the large window spanning the facade of the hotel entrance. His salt-
and-pepper hair, perched on his head in Caesar-cut fashion, belied
his true age. His flawless complexion argued silently with the
grayness in trying to divulge Brians years. He had a baby face
dressed in a suit of armor.
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 34
You ready for the big day? Gary asked as he joined in staring
out the window.
I cant wait. Its like today is the reason I was born. Were going
to do just fine, Mad Dog. Youll see.
Outside, the doorman waved wildly trying to hail a cab for two
ladies. Cabs in New York are a story all their own. Where else would
you see a grown doorman in a stovepipe hat standing in the middle
of a busy street blowing a whistle as if trying to referee traffic? It
seemed to Gary that the cabs were in a jousting contest to see how
close they could come to the waving arms of the doorman without
dislodging them.
You guys want to have breakfast before we leave? Nick was on
time to the minute. Strategies were reviewed over bagels and juice
before the street jousting contest once again was engaged. Gary
marveled how the doorman was able to stay alive. A man with such
miraculous abilities surely should be invited to join them in the
negotiations with the publishing house. With arms waving in
sorcerers apprentice fashion, magic was cast as a clean, shiny
yellow cab stopped before the three men.
Oh, gawd, Gary thought as he nearly choked from the cloud of
cigarette smoke. He began rolling the window down as the arms of
the doorman flashed by.
Mad Dog, you OK? Nick asked in his typically teasing fashion.
He even had Brian asking the comical question at the oddest times.
It had become a standing joke between the three men.
You mean other than wanting to breathe? Gary responded.
Nick looked at the cabbys permit to check out his name.
Stefanos, Nick bellowed in his best Greek accent. My friend here
is dying from your smoke. We cant breathe back here. If you dont
put out your cigarette, well have to catch another cab.
Stefanos politely threw the lit cigarette out the window and
waved in acknowledgment. Gary silently wished he had Nicks
capacity for dealing with people. Now that the air was breathable,
Nick began a friendly conversation with the driver as if theyd been
old buddies. Brian delighted at hearing how Stefanos had worked
hard to get his own cab, how hed managed to support the whole
family and bring them to America. Weaving in and out of traffic,
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 35
Stefanos delivered his three newfound friends in the middle of the

giant skyscrapers guarding Americas publishing empire.
Security guards phoned Lannie. Gary made a silent bet with
himself how long it would take the elevators to deliver the senior
editor from forty floors up. Nick? she asked as she walked out of the
elevator. He is even more dynamic in person, she thought to herself.
Lannie! Nick returned, as if he had found a long-lost friend.
She almost disappeared in the crush of his hug. Gary hung in the
background as the two suits began what would be an unforgettable
day.
Gary? Lannie chimed as she spotted the blue jeans. Her smile
was genuine and her handshake warm. On the phone, she had
seemed so stalwart, large in spirit, a woman of powerful persuasion.
But here, she looked more like a petite nun in designer garb, dressed
impeccably. If the truth be known, Lannie loved shopping for clothes
almost as much as she loved books.
Its a pleasure to meet you, Gary managed, without even
blushing. Marian the Librarian meets John Boy Walton in jeans, he
couldnt help thinking.
Lannie herded the gaggle of men into a waiting elevator,
whisking them away to the highest floors of authority. The first
pleasantries were exchanged with executives. Different levels of
editors huddled chairs together as verbal posturing began in the
most sophisticated of ways. What a contrast to the streets below,
where waving arms of doormen played chicken with brigades of
yellow cabs. Up here, on the 40th-something floor, the greatest
weapon was the tongue. And Gary knew enough to leave the talking
to Nick. Absolving himself of responsibility, Garys eyes wandered
to the rooftops across the way. From up here, New York looked even
older and dirtier. Yet, inside the office buildings, the creative forces
of the known world were fostering new revelations of knowledge.
For centuries, the common book awakened humans to new
possibilities, new lives, new loves, and new worlds. Despite all the
wonders that centers of technology displayed in other cities, shiny
and clean with their glassy exteriors, it was here among the dusty
buildings of New York, like so many dusty bookshelves, that real
power reigned the power of the human mind.
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 36
The next round of discussions moved to the conference room.

The three men sat together on one side of an immense table while all
the top managers and executives surrounded them. Brians eyes were
beginning to dance. These were all women. All seven of them. No
men, except the three guys. What a statement. There was obviously
no glass ceiling here. Brian wondered if Nick would be able to handle
this kind of feminine power. After all, Nick was used to the corporate
muscling that typically occurred in most male-dominated industries.
For that matter, what about himself? Should he handle his own
presentation any differently? It was his turn to give the marketing
picture. He decided it should be given no differently.
As negotiating wound down, the executives finally said what
Nick wanted to hear. OK, what would it take to get you to cancel
your other publisher appointments? We want this book.
Up to this point, Gary had been counting coffee mugs and noting
the different sayings on them. These women were not only funny,
their coffee mugs even betrayed a bawdy side. This must be a fun place
to work, Gary thought as he half-heard Nicks response. Up to this
point, Mad Dog had been window dressing in a showcase display.
Gary. What do you think? Nick posited, as he leaned over on
the hardwood table staring down at his publisher. What would it
take for you to give these wonderful people our book?
All eyes turned to Gary with one singular motion. What did
Nick think he was doing? Had he not told Gary to let him do all the
talking? Brian mentally took note that this was the first time he saw
Gary go white instead of red. Stalling for a little time, he swallowed
the remainder of water in his glass, hoping not to choke. Well, I like
everything Ive heard here, he confessed softly. I cant think of
better people to go with than the people Ive seen here. His eyes
rested on Lannie. She smiled back. What he was hoping for was
some kind of hint from Nick or Brian. However, he was on his own.
We need to have this book out fast because of the importance of the
messages within. The only way this industry will take this book
seriously is if we strike a deal for seven figures.
Nicks eyes turned to the person who had the power to say yes
or no. His business mind delighted how Gary had said just the right
thing. Nick loved to trust his instincts.
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 37
I dont know if we can do that, replied one of the executives.

Counteroffers were made, but Nick knew he had the upper hand,
and knew how to use it.
After a span of silence one of the executives turned to the senior
editor, Lannie, why dont you take these gentlemen to lunch. Then
turning to the publishing house president she finished, while I see
if I can get an answer before they leave today.
Everyone stood up, exchanged compliments, and emptied the
room. Lannie hustled the guys into her office, searching for enough
chairs to fit into her nuns cell. The only thing missing was a flat cot
and a crucifix hanging on the wall. It was almost austere. As Lannie
made arrangements on the phone, chatting in between holds, Gary
began to notice a figure appearing behind the editor. A chill of goose
bumps swept him as he began to see what was unmistakably an
angel. This was not the first time one of these beings had appeared
before him. And like before, he froze in place, mesmerized by the
silent figure. This angel even had wings. When this had happened
before, he had seen a robe of light and a featureless countenance. As
Nick and Lannie were going over contractual concerns, Nick noticed
the strange look on his friends face.
Mad Dog? You OK?
Gary could not take his eyes off the vision. What was this angelic
figure doing here? What did it mean?
Mad Dog? Are you comfortable with our decision here? Gary
had not even heard what the decision was. He knew well enough to
let Nick handle contractual discussions.
Uhh, yes, Im fine with it. Fine. The angel did nothing nor
said nothing. It just stood behind Lannie with a peaceful look on its
face. Its shape was not distinctive, almost like looking at a
reflection in a department store window. One of the soft people, Gary
said to himself. His mind fought with what to do, what to say.
There was nothing that could be done or said. Lannie would surely
think him fanciful, or perhaps think him unstable. However, this
appearance had to be a good sign. It had to mean they were
negotiating with the right publisher, and Lannie the right editor for
this book. But nothing was hinted at by the ghostlike figure. Only
silence.
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 38
What a contrast this was to the children who openly

acknowledged these soft people. Grown-ups too afraid to admit
the divine, were here to prepare a world for children who talked
with these beings, reached out to them, accepted them without
reserve. What is it about being grown up that denies us our own
deep truths? What kind of message do we send, what kind of world
do we foster if we espouse the wonders of heaven yet say nothing
when it makes its presence known? This kind of silence is not
golden, it is made of lead, and it weighs us down as we continue
to deny the marvels of an emerging world, a world made finer by
human acknowledgment of the divine. Gary would realize later
what this angelic presence meant, and only then would he confess to
what he had witnessed this day.
While Lannie hustled the crew down the elevator for a
springtime walk to one of New Yorks finer establishments, she and
Nick bantered back and forth about the meeting. Does anyone else
smoke? she asked politely as they cruised through the islands of
bodies along the sidewalk.
No, but go ahead, Lannie. Were outside in the fresh air, Nick
volunteered.
She wrinkled her nose, Oh, no, I dont want be bothering
anyone else.
I can walk in front of you, and listen at the same time, Gary
added. Brian walked beside him whispering how well he thought
the meeting went. Gary was only half-listening, for he could still see
the angelic figure behind Lannie. He leaned over into Brians ear.
We have company, he whispered above the crowd noise.
Brian looked around as if expecting a Mafia figure to appear.
What do you mean? he whispered back.
You know ... Gary decided this was not a good idea. Brian
wondered what was going on. There had been several dropped hints
on the part of Nick and Gary over the past several weeks that
prompted Brian to wonder if the two men had some private secret,
or private joke that only the two of them enjoyed.
Brian stared over at Nick who, at this point, was joining Lannie
in smoking a cigarette. Nick wasnt a smoker. What is he doing? Brian
wondered. A chuckle gurgled up from inside as he remembered the
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 39
episode in the cab earlier that morning. Had Nick not insisted that
Stefanos, the cab driver, throw out his cigarette because the foul air
was bothering Gary. He decided to nudge Gary while nodding his
head to the right in the direction of Nick. His companion craned his
neck to see Nick barely puffing away, obviously making Lannie feel
comfortable.
That Nick, Gary smiled. He really is just like Paul.
What do you mean? Brian asked.
I am all things to all men, Gary quoted from Pauls first
letter to the Corinthians.
Brians eyes jumped back and forth between Nick and Gary as if
he were watching a tennis match. Not knowing what else to say, he
smilingly questioned, You OK, Mad Dog?
Im OK, Bri. Gary was beginning to develop a fondness for this
new guy. He had an ease about him that transcended business as well
as the personal. Im OK. Gary knew the angel had to be a favorable
sign. Certainly all was well. Or so he thought. Later that day,
contracts were signed and deals made, but some matters cannot be
written into seven-figure contracts like certain secrets of the heart.
}
Nicky, I have a personal favor to ask you, Lannies voice
entreated tenderly. Thousands of miles of phone line could not hide
her effort to disguise her feelings. However, Nick could read people
the way Lannie speed-read books. His eyes looked far away beyond
his office window as if bird-dogging the phone lines back to the
source of this gentle voice. The contracts had been signed in New
York, and the month that followed had brought him and Lannie
closer as business contacts as well as friends.
Lannie, you OK? was his patented response. He was buying
time. These were no longer business associates talking. Lannie was
far more than an editor, and she no longer thought of Brian, Gary,
and Nick as clients. All had become unexpected friends. Whenever
Nick or Lannie wanted to make a point that transcended business or
get to the heart of an issue, they would abandon any formalities and
speak to each other in the familiar. When matters got tense, for
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 40
whatever reason, it was not Ms. Editor nor Mr. Bunick that was
resorted to. Quite the opposite. They became Nicky and Lannie.
No matter how far apart they were on any contract or business issue,
Nicky and Lannie would inevitably end up laughing.
Sometimes there might be a few tears before the laugh line, but they
would end up laughing, nonetheless. There was no business matter
that could not be resolved; there was no personal issue that could
not be shared.
The hanging silence finally surrendered, Im OK, Nicky. Im
OK. But my best friend, Suzette, isnt. Shes been diagnosed with
terminal cancer. She has cancer, and doesnt have long to live. She
could barely finish the sentence before tears tried to ease her choking
words. Her heart was breaking. Lannie loved people. There was no
other word for it. She simply loved people, from closest friends to
the homeless woman whom she called her street angel.
Sometimes, while Lannie waited for her bus, this crumpled old
woman would sidle up alongside and begin a conversation. The
disheveled old lady might talk about the smells of the street or the
weather. But she would more often than not talk about something
that seemed to make no sense at the time, only to make perfect sense
later. Angels, she would point out, it was angels who were following
Lannie. If Gary had only known. But at this moment Lannie could
not feel blessed by the presence of an angel.
Has she gotten a second opinion? Nick asked, still buying
time. He was sniffing the air for what really was agonizing the
tenderhearted Lannie.
No, but she is going to. I cant believe this has happened. She is
such an alive and good person. Nick began to realize what Lannie
was trying to do.
You said you had a favor to ask? He gave her an opening.
Nick, I know you get all kinds of requests from people who
want you to help them. And I dont want to burden you with this.
But I have to ask you this. Suzette is so dear to me. Could you pray
to your angels to heal her of the cancer?
Nick leaned back in his executive chair, his hand resting against
his cheek. This was a sensitive topic. He knew that his purpose for
being on earth this time around was different than the purpose of Paul
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 41
of Tarsus 2,000 years ago. Though healing had been a large factor in
bringing people closer to the truth of God in those days, it was not the
focus of his life now. For one thing, it would be too easy for healing to
become a media phenomenon. And that could easily get in the way of
why he was here now. It would be too easy for it to become a
distraction to the real truth: We are our own best healers. It was
paramount that people realize that God is within each one of us. That
was the message two millennia ago, but did people remember it?
Lannie, heres what I will do. I will ask the angels to intervene.
But I want you to do the same. Do you understand?
Of course, came the hopeful reply.
We cannot interfere in peoples lives. We must respect their
own journey. It simply may be Suzettes time to move on into spirit.
She may have accomplished what she came here to do. And we have
to accept that, if it is so.
I know, Nick. But I cant believe her time is over. She has so
much to give people.
All right. I want you to tell your friend we both will talk to our
angels. But I want you to tell her to constantly remind herself that
God is within her. Have her spend time forgiving herself for any
wrongs she feels she may have committed. Have her open herself to
Gods love. OK?
Ill call her right away.
That night the two friends opened their hearts in prayer to God
and to the angels. This was not a matter of begging for a miracle. It
was an act of trust that the love flowing between these people would
benefit another, no matter what the outcome. These were not prayers
of supplication, these were prayers of acknowledgment, of oneness
between humanity and angels. This was not an effort to cheat death,
it was a common recognition that we are all fully to embrace life.
And if that means that life is to pass from the body and follow spirit,
then so be it. There was nothing more to do than wait. Pray and wait.
}
Brian and Gary were having one of their typical afternoon
strategy sessions in Brians office, covering the white-board in red
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 42
lines, blue words, and green graphics. Everyone was now working
together to come up with the best way to take The Messengers before
the general public. A beep hiccuped on the office phone.
Brian, its New York, announced Heather, who used the
intercom only to interrupt, then would yell across the office suites
like everyone else. I think its Lannie. Gary took a seat next to
Brians credenza so both men could hear over the speakerphone.
Brian hit the button in comic fashion. She was probably going to give
him grief over one of his marketing ideas.
Lannie! Brian cheered, to start the conversation. Only a sniffle
could be heard on the speaker.
Lannie, you OK? Gary kidded, using Nicks patented joke.
Again there was no response. Brian leaned toward the phone, his
eyes asking Gary what could be wrong.
Lannie, this is Brian. Is everything OK?
No ... yes, a choked voice returned. Nick is busy on the
phone, talking to London. I had to talk to somebody.
Again Brians eyes flashed a what-am-I-going-to-do look at
Gary. Is there something I can do? Just say the word. Im here for
you. It was classic Brian. He would give the shirt off his back to a
stranger. In fact, hed give the shirt off his back to anyone who
needed it. No accident that he was one of the forces behind the
creation of Night Watch, a support organization for street people in
the Portland area, established to help the homeless.
You guys, Im not sure what to say. You know my friend,
Suzette, I told you about? The one diagnosed with cancer?
Both men chimed, Yes.
Well, I had asked Nick if he would ask his angels to help heal
her. He asked me to do the same. Well, Suzette went to go for tests
today, for a second opinion. They sent her home. They couldnt find
any cancer. The word cancer was almost inaudible as Lannie
sobbed uncontrollably. Gary knew she had been heartsick at the
thought of losing her best friend.
What happened in the doctors office? Gary wanted to know.
Still choking back her words, Lannie continued, The physician
said she had been misdiagnosed. He said the only thing he could see
was small fractures in her bones. He didnt see her like I did for the
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 43
last two months. This wasnt a misdiagnosis. She could hardly

move, there was no life in her, she was dying, for Gods sake. Again
the sobs poured over the phone line. Brian stared out the window
with a gaze that made you wonder if he was watching God. Gary
simply covered his face. His own emotions were being tested these
last couple of days.
So, shes OK now? Gary asked, feeling just a little stupid asking.
Shes doing great. Shes laughing, shes walking around. The
color has returned to her face. I cant believe it. Last week she looked
gray, could barely get out of bed. She was dying. I dont care what
anyone says, I know Nick is responsible for this happening.
Gary knew that Nick would be the first to correct Lannie, even
in her tears of joy. So he decided to speak for his friend. Now
Lannie, Nick would quickly remind you that it was the angels who
were asked to help in the healing.
Hes the one who prayed to his angels, she countered.
If memory serves me correctly, you also prayed to your angels.
No?
Well, yes.
Then dont discount your own role in this. Healing comes from
within. And you probably played a stronger role than anyone in
helping Suzette open to her own healing.
Nick was quite willing to take people through what he called
healing of the spirit. But he wanted everyone to understand that
such an exercise addressed the spirit, firstly and foremost. He
wanted people to understand the strong connection between our
spiritual state and our physical state. In no way, shape, or form, did
he want people to see him as the healer Jeshua was. And even Jeshua
constantly told people that they were the healers, not he. At this time
in history, Nicks role was to get people to remember. Remember the
original messages of Jeshua. Remember that God is within us all.
Remember that we are called to live a life of universal love,
compassion, and to live in truth.
Yes, I know you are right, Lannie returned. But I am still
holding Nick responsible. A small laugh tripped across the
speakerphone. Brian continued to stare out the window. No one
wanted to hang up. The electric feeling of wonder filled the space
Days.Ch2 2/12/03 11:54 AM Page 44
between New York and Portland. Wow! they all wanted to say. But
no one could speak. We have entered the Age of Wonders, they wanted
to say. But no one said anything. The truth of the matter was that
Gary couldnt speak anyway. He sat there so choked up he had to
just get up from his chair and leave Brians office. With head hung,
as if searching for invisibility, he grabbed his laptop from his office
and left the building. It was too much. This was all getting to be too
much. Was this really happening? Were we, as a people, truly
coming out of our woundedness? For the first time in his life, Gary
wanted to find a quiet, secret place, just to see if he could talk to his
angels. He wanted to thank them for this life surrounding him. This
must have been what it was like 2,000 years ago, only better, he thought.
For this time, our race, our civilization just might get it right. This time,
we just might remember Jeshuas key message: God is within each one of us.
Gary drove away carrying his silence and his recognition of God
within him. There was simply nothing to be said.
(
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 45
3
(
OUT OF WOUNDEDNESS
W e can be such a foolish people; we can be such a glorious

people. The glory of what we can create is rivaled only by
our power to destroy. How often has the world witnessed miracles,
only later to destroy the miracle workers? What is in us that is so
reluctant to embrace our own wonder? As with any age, the telling
visions of our children can be obliterated by the denial within
ourselves. It was as if heaven knew ahead of time that some
phenomenon would have to be in place to counter our tendency as
a people to deny the simple, honest truth that stands in front of us.
And Nick Bunick was no exception to this tendency. His own denial,
his own concerns over ridicule and family safety nearly thwarted his
very purpose for being here. Had it not been for the presence of
angels in his own life, we might never have been allowed the
awareness of coming events that will rival history.
More and more requests for appearances arrived at Nicks
offices. He tried to answer each letter personally but the volume was
rapidly getting beyond his capability to do so. Hundreds of letters a
week now made it impossible for even Nicks staff to help in this
effort. However, one letter stood out among the rest. The letter was
45
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 46
from a Reverend Georgie Richardson, pastor of a vibrant church,

where people teach one another to expect miracles. Would Nick be
willing to come down to Salem, Oregon, and speak before her
congregation? The Messengers was already causing a bit of a stir
among her congregation. And to further her enthusiasm, Reverend
Richardson revealed that 444 events were unfolding in her own life.
Nick discussed the idea with Gary, and the two of them decided to
make a pilgrimage down to Georgies church. Gary wanted to see
how Nick would do in front of people who might have questions,
who might press him for information that might push against their
own religious convictions.
As Gary steered Nicks Jaguar onto the church grounds, both men
grinned at seeing a welcome sign reserving a parking place for the
two of them. And a good thing, too. The parking area was jammed.
Gary barely missed one of the other cars as he tried to squeeze the
unfamiliar Jag into the tight reserved spot. Nick teased, Mad Dog,
you OK? He had Mad Dog drive the entire trip so that he would be
rested and focused for what was about to unfold. This day was
important to Nick, for it would be the beginning of what would be a
new life for this former businessman and venture capitalist.
Welcome, came the cheery voice, catching Gary by surprise. In
his effort to slide the window down, he inadvertently turned on the
windshield wipers. Finally conquering the cockpit technology of the
Jaguar, Gary pressed the switch descending the window with a whine.
Thank you, came his his belated reply.
You must be Nick, she added, bending down to see the
gentleman on the passengers side.
Yes, were pleased to be here. And this is Gary, co-author of The
Messengers. Nick gestured with confidence.
Hi, was all Gary could usher. He was blushing bright red
again, wondering what this distinguished lady must be thinking of
his klutzy battle with the car switches.
Im Georgie, she smiled while offering a hand.
Im going to like this place, thought Gary. Not Reverend Richardson,
not even Reverend Georgie. Just Georgie. Anxiously, Gary leaned
halfway out the window to shake hands. Of course, his leaning
inadvertently set off the window switch sending the blade of
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 47
out of woundedness 47
window up in reverse guillotine fashion. A Three Stooges move just

managed to stop his being beheaded. Nick decided to exit before
Mad Dog accidentally killed himself, grinning at the thought of an
imaginary headline: Local Author Strangled by Jaguar.
Georgie, it was so good of you to invite us, Nick offered. Her
knee-length dress fluttered bright flowerlike colors as she walked
over to shake hands. Gary escaped from the menacing Jaguar
unnoticed by anyone, saved from further threat. Taking a deep breath,
he stared out at the waves of green meadow surrounding the church.
Reverend Richardson gathered her flock, for it was time to begin
services. Nick would be the featured speaker during the liturgy, plus
he would speak after lunch before a crowd wanting to hear his story
and perhaps hear about the new world promised by the angels.
Many wanted to know what the angels had said to him, what was
coming that would change the planet forever. It was one thing to
hope for an era of peace across the globe, and quite another to find
out what it was going to take to get there.
Standing in front of the packed building, Georgies eyes beamed
with pleasure at the attendance. Her own elegance commanded
respect as the gathering quieted to hear her blessing. All heads bowed.
Thank you, God, for the wonder of your grace in my life, she
said. Can you imagine playing a game that you could not possibly
lose, or take a test you could never fail? Because of the grace of God
that has been given to us, we are assured that we can never fail
even if we feel we have. Each experience, whether completely
successful or not, is a chance to learn and grow. So lets be joyous
recipients of Gods grace and accept the pure, the unconditional love
that we have been so freely given. Through this love, we are
nurtured and blessed. As we rise higher and higher in spiritual
understanding, we joyfully embrace the many-faceted splendor of
Gods grace in action around us. With peace in our hearts we
gratefully say, Thank you, God, for the wonder of your grace in our
lives. And from John 11:40: Did I not tell you that, if you believe,
you would see the glory of God?
Georgie had captured the spirit of the gathering from the get-go.
All eyes were focused on Nick as she related her own 444
experiences, how she had written the letter that had touched his
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 48
heart, how blessed she felt for herself and her people that they were
among the first witnesses to see the return of such a commanding
spiritual figure as this man who was the soul and spirit of Paul the
Apostle. Her directness, her lack of apology for daring to accept such
a notion filled the air with a kind of magic. Indeed, the air vibrated
with electricity as the gathering heard their pastor announce the
beginning of a new Age of Wonders, what The Messengers had called
The Return of the Age of Miracles. Had they not already
witnessed miraculous beginnings in their own lives? Her thanks to
God had been genuine, unquestionably devout and direct.
Georgie next introduced a younger woman, named Mary Ann, a
pianist/vocalist, who had composed a special song for the
gathering, about Nicks journey. Mary Ann edged nervously on her
piano bench as she introduced her creation. I call this song Nicks
Song, but its everybodys song. Its about all our journeys, as we
open to guidance, in the many forms it comes to us. Her hands
hung suspended on the keys as if waiting for the song to sing itself.
With eyes shut, the first chord announced the beginning of
Nicks journey, a journey that would eventually span the globe. As
her words grew in feeling and intensity along with the music, Nicks
eyes began to redden. Gary did a double-take. His friend and cohort,
affected by a song? It must be the power of the moment, he mused. This
entire community of well-wishers had pulled out the stops to
welcome the both of them. Gary was struck by the irony of how
removed he felt from the affection and the anticipation of the
congregation, while Nick sat silently rapt in its sincerity and
tenderness. As the song ended, Nick wiped the tears from his eyes. I
should get a picture of this, Gary joked to himself. It was as if Nick
knew that this was the beginning of living out the very reason he
had been born. These people reflected a beauty that would
ultimately capture the world. And he felt it, knew it.
As sniffles around the room quietly responded to soft tissues,
Georgie stood before her people once again. She reflected on how
she had come to write the letter that had brought Nick to their house
of worship. In a voice that might remind one of a Mother Teresa,
Georgie looked toward Gary and Nick, and claimed before her
congregation, And so we have Gary and Nick with us here today.
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 49
Like many, when I read The Messengers, I became very excited. Nick
is a prominent Northwest businessman, and hes known since 1977
that he embodies the soul and the spirit of the Apostle Paul. Nine
different spiritually-gifted people, at different times, have told him
about that. And what a struggle it was for him to make this public,
to go before people with this information. But then the angels got
involved and started pushing on him, and he did take that next step.
And we are so grateful, because there are many of you that have
come up to me and have said, Georgie, this book has changed my
life. So its such a pleasure to have him here today.
Both Nick and Gary were surprised by the eruption of applause.
Neither had heard such a large sound in a place of worship. Nick
entered the sanctuary, and stood nearly transfixed before the
heralding, visibly moved. Yes, it had begun. And there was no
turning back. Gary reached down to retrieve his notebook. He knew
this was a moment that needed remembering.
With a confidence that seemed ancient, Nick enthralled his
listeners with his spellbinding story, balancing the wonders of today
against the truths of two millennia. Gary tried to sneak peeks at
those around him, but felt too obvious in his efforts, for every eye
was frozen on his friend. Never did he imagine that Nick would be
this effective, or the people so welcoming. This moment was meant
to be. Nick nourished the assembly with incident after incident of
how the angels had convinced him that all of us are reentering the
Age of Wonders.
There are many other stories that I can tell, he summarized,
but I wanted to share with you these particular stories so that you
might remember that the angels are the messengers of God, and are in
every one our lives. Every one of us. They intervened in my life for a
specific purpose because they wanted me to act. However, I am now
aware that they have been inspiring me throughout my life, helping
me at times when I needed help, giving me courage at times when I
needed courage, giving me love at times when I didnt know how to
find love on my own effort. And theyre in all of your lives, also.
Think of my story as your story a key that will open for you
a treasure chest everyone has inside of them. All you have to do is
turn the key and open that treasure chest, taking that gift from God,
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 50
knowing that you will have access to a wealth of riches never before
realized. And those riches will be your ability to have direct
communications with your angels. Even though it took me a while
to realize this, it doesnt need to take you so long. I can tell you are
much more open than I was.
With a humbleness and sincerity that surrendered to a charisma
of love, Nick blessed the people with a benediction, encouraging
them to follow the path that is theirs. Gary wanted to write notes
about what he was witnessing, but the truth of the matter was that
he couldnt take his eyes off the scene before him. Something had
happened in Nick, something big. A chill went up Garys spine as his
companion returned to his seat, giving Garys left hand a squeeze.
Nick isnt a hand-squeezer, he thought. Maybe the angels have snatched
his real body, he grinned at the thought. No, this was not the time to
whisper in his ear, Nick, you OK? This was a moment to cherish.
No matter how uncomfortable it made Gary, he knew that Nick had
found his chosen path, his true calling.
Reverend Georgie closed the services with a meditation and a
song. Afterwards, no one left the building. All were a hive of bees
buzzing with excitement. Nick would speak again after lunch. Were
seats still available? How was the afternoon seminar going to be
different than the homily during the service? Their questions and
comments filled the air with a hum of exhilaration.
While Nick was swarmed with well-wishers, Gary, as he was
prone to do, tried to hide in his chair, arms folded and head bowed.
His efforts to remain invisible proved futile as one of the members of
the church, a Dr. Bonnie Young sat next to him and introduced
herself. A middle-aged woman with a handsome face and nicely
done hair, she spoke with pride about her community how it had
grown over the last three years, how the walls had to be broken
down to make more room, how the offices had to be moved out into
the trailer in the parking lot to accommodate even more growth. Yes,
Gary thought, this was a place where walls are broken down. Even mine.
As the squeeze of people eased, Reverend Richardson rescued
her guests for a relaxing lunch in her office. As she spread a feast
before them, Nick took the occasion to question the make-up of
Georgies community. He did not want to offend anyone, especially
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 51
his gracious host. In particular, Nick wanted to address Georgies

congregation, discussing the role of fear in the world, and more
specifically the entire notion of hell and Satan. Georgie assured Nick
that her people were quite open-minded to many concepts from
many religions. Her house of God was a house that allowed all to
enter. It was not uncommon for them to study from the Koran, the
Bible, the Book of Mormon, or the Bhagavad Ghita. In her church, the
only requirement was openness and tolerance for all who searched
for God. She was not surprised to hear that Nick did not believe
there was a hell, nor that there was a devil named Satan.
Georgie reassured Nick The Messengers had already made it
apparent that Jeshua did not teach of hell as a place, nor Satan as a
devil. She understood that Nick believed these to be inventions of a
medieval church that chose to rule its people by fear rather than
love. He asked Georgie if she was aware of the word Gehenna, the
premise for the notion of hell. Had she heard that it was, in reality, a
garbage dump outside the city of Jerusalem. Indeed, she had heard
such a notion while at seminary.
Gary sat back in his chair as he began to recall one of the recorded
hypnotic-regression sessions that Nick and Julia had taped after the
writing of The Messengers. Once again, Julia had taken Nick back
2,000 years to his life as Paul the Apostle. Gary remembered how
Nick had played the tape back for him, how amused he became at
hearing how Gehenna was a joke among the people of that day:
Julia (J): I have a question about the city of Jerusalem itself.
Paul (P): Yes.
J: Did Jeshua talk about a place called Gehenna? Do you
have any information as to what that was?
P: I dont know if Jeshua talked about it, but there was such a
place. Gehenna was outside Jerusalem below the road, as if
you were going to Joppa, going towards the sea. It was below
the road and was in the Hinnom Valley. [Gehenna comes
from the original Hebrew ge hinnom, which meant valley
of Hinnom. Nick, personally, had no knowledge of this fact.]
J: Go ahead.
P: Well, it was a place where people would take their things
they no longer had use for [a dump]. There were people
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 52
employed there by the officials who would keep it burning. It

was a place they took things they no longer wanted and they
burnt them there. And it was sloped in such a manner that it
was in this valley. It was high on one side, the side towards
Jerusalem, and lower on the side away from Jerusalem, so the
smoke would not go back towards the city. That was the way
the valley was shaped. It was a place where a lot of cistern
canals led [carrying away sewage] because of the slope of the
ground. And the people who were responsible for collecting
refuse in the city would take the refuse by horse and cart and
leave it there to be burnt. Gehenna.
J: So did it have a kind of an odor to it?
P: Oh yes [a smile comes across Nicks face]. It was a bad odor.
People would insult each other when they would get angry,
or when mothers got angry at the children, and the children
misbehaved they would say Im going to send you to
Gehenna if you do not behave. So it became almost like a
joking curse.
It was a joke that history distorted over time. However, children
were no longer the butt of this joke. The fires of Gehenna eventually
became the premise for the concept of hell as we know it today. Nick
wanted to make sure that Jeshuas message was no longer distorted.
There was no hell, nor was there a devil, except the ones we choose to
create for ourselves. Over millennia, people had been made to fear
God because of such a notion. It angered Nick that anyone should be
made to fear a God of love. It was not Jeshuas way to create fear in
anyone. Quite the opposite. The way out of woundedness, all
woundedness, was through love, compassion, and forgiveness.
Gary enjoyed the smoked salmon as well as the conversation
between Nick and Georgie. There was a mutual respect that warmed
the air. To make sure there would be no misunderstandings or
religious differences Nick previewed some of what he wanted to
address on the topic of Satan.
If you go back and look at the Old Testament, there are
references where we have the Israelite armies referring to their
opponents as satans meaning evil people, monsters. As we
might refer to the Nazis during World War II as devils, they would
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 53
refer to the enemy as satans in their behavior. They were evil

people. What happened over the years is that this concept of satan
was changed. Instead of conveying a sense of evilness, it began to
take on the embodiment of evil, as if an entity. Unfortunately, it
began to be used in the gospels through various stages of
translation. Jeshua did not cast out demons, as entities. He cast out
attitudes or states of being within a person. Back in the time of
Pythagoras and Plato, hundreds of years before Jeshua was born,
they referred to people who had attributes in their personalities that
were bad such as jealousy, envy, anger, hostility, greed as
daemons. Meaning they have these unpleasant parts in their
personalities. When Jeshua drove daemons out of peoples hearts
and souls, he was taking away from them this maliciousness they
might have toward their fellow man or even toward themselves. But
what happened over a period of time, was that the concept of
daemon was changed to the word demon. And with the change in
word came a change in concept. This was not the concept of Jeshua
and Paul, Nick insisted.
The primary reason for Nicks review of these ideas was to show
people in the afternoon session how to find a place of healing for
themselves. And that place of healing had to rest upon the notion of
self-forgiveness and letting go of fear. Scripture was adamant in
stating Where there is fear there is not love. And Nick wanted the
world to be reminded of Jeshuas desire for all people to understand
that they walked with love, for God is within. And God is love.
Georgies comments were as dynamic as Nicks. Gary listened
to the two, reminded of scholars from ancient times discussing
moral issues in Solomons Temple. Were not good works as
important as good words? Georgie offered. Were not Jeshuas
messages hung on the branch of action as well as the branch of
moral thought? Did they not come from the same tree? Georgies
had steeped her life in good works. She practiced what she
preached. Gary made a point to interrupt his silence to accent what
Georgie was bringing to the discussion, for was not Nicks concept
of a greater tomorrow to be based on that very point that Georgie
stood for? Besides, it would give Nick a chance to talk about his
vision of the Great Tomorrow.
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 54
After making his point, Gary moved from the smoked salmon to
the plate of assorted cookies as Nick and Georgie continued their
lively discussion. Life was to be enjoyed to the full, and he was
enjoying himself in the company of these two marvelous souls.
Besides, he never met a chocolate chip cookie he didnt like.
Georgies nurturing eyes spied the empty cookie plate as her guest
munched the last of the homemade cookies. While listening
attentively to Nick, she quietly reached behind her for the container
holding more of the booty, filled the empty plate, and gestured
politely for Gary to help himself to more, never missing a word.
Gary felt as if he were at home instead of a church complex.
I was at a talk show recently, in Seattle, Nick said, where a
person called in to challenge me. His name was John, and John
protested, How can you say what youre saying and claiming to be
who you are, while at the same time not taking the Scriptures
literally? He said, Youre wrong! This is terrible! This is
blasphemy! He was a very articulate man. My response was, John,
let me ask you a question. I dont take the Scriptures literally. But I
commend you and I applaud you, and I say God gave you the free
will to take them literally. But Paul wrote in his letters to the
Romans, as well as in his letter to the Corinthians, I shall not judge
you, and you shall not judge me, for only God shall judge us both.
Even though I dont take the Scriptures literally, Im not judging you.
And you tell me you take them literally, and yet youre judging me!
Theres something wrong with that. And there was silence. He
didnt know what to say! Nick laughed a laugh of delight that
brought a smile to everyones lips. It was not so much that he had
managed to turn the tables on the fellow, but that he had managed
to take the mans own words and show him he was living in
contradiction. Nick wanted the whole world to know Jeshuas
words in their hearts as well as their heads. Over the millennia,
something happened where peoples hearts had forgotten the
beauty and simplicity of Jeshuas messages.
God gave us free will, Nick continued, going after another
bagel with cream cheese. Whether its the Book of Revelation or
whatever, God gave us the free will to interpret it. Theres two ways
we can accept Scripture: We can accept it using our rational mind,
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 55
our logic, or we can accept it through faith. And there are times
when you may accept something that may not be logically right to
you, but by faith you accept it. And other times you apply your
logic. And sometimes you use both. Thats the free will God gave to
us. I dont accept the gloom, I dont accept those people who try to
teach of God by putting fear into our hearts. I reject that kind of
teaching. And I wish that other people would recognize that its
harmful, particularly to children, to have children growing up with
fear in their hearts, wondering if Gods going to punish them,
wondering if this God theyre learning about is going to send them
to hell.
Georgies eyes raised in grateful expectation. The afternoon
session would be even better than she had guessed. Politely she let
both men know it was time to get ready. Gary kidnapped one more
chocolate chip cookie before going out the door. A crowd was
already gathering around the front of the church.
The next day, Gary spent much of his time staring out his office
window. After revealing to Brian all that had happened in Salem, he
felt a kind of emptiness. Not the kind that leaves one with a sense of
loss, but the other kind: the kind that feels as though all the burdens
of the world have been washed away. He had heard similar
comments from others after the Salem presentation. Nick had saved
the last part of his session for what he called The Healing of the
Spirit. He had made sure to tell the congregation of his intentions,
giving those who might be uncomfortable a chance to leave early.
But none had left. All disposed themselves to an event that Nick, as
Paul, had not exercised in 2,000 years. All who were there were
affected in one way or another. Georgie had later called on the phone
telling Nick, For one thing, I awoke Monday morning, and got out
of bed totally free of the body stiffness and discomfort Ive been
having for a year or so now. I believe this can be attributed to the
spiritual healing you offered at the end of the afternoon session.
Gary replayed over and over again the sobbing of the lady who
had sat three chairs down from him. Nick had come over to her after
finishing his blessing of the assembly and held her in his arms. Are
you OK, dear? he asked in the most gentle way. She was more than
OK. She had somehow unleashed a torrent of guilt she had
Days.Ch3 2/12/03 11:55 AM Page 56
burdened herself with because of a divorce. She had given up her

two children and a life that would have been intolerable. She had
chosen a new life, but at the same time had cursed herself with
untold guilt. She had never forgiven herself for relinquishing her
children, or for rejecting her ex-husband. Nicks spiritual healing
had included a section where the pains of divorce had been
mentioned. He had encouraged those suffering from divorce,
whether they were husband, wife, or children, to open themselves to
a new kind of happiness, to forgive all who either injured or were
injuring. Sometimes, our emotional wounds are far more serious than
our physical wounds. And Gary had witnessed the consequence of
letting go of such woundedness. In his heart, he knew that Nick was
ready to face the world. He knew the time had arrived to test Nicks
wings on a national level. But was the nation ready to hear? Only
time would tell whether the many would be willing to move out of
woundedness. Yes, indeed, sometimes we can be such a foolish
people; we can be such a glorious people.
(
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 57
4
(
SIGN OF THE ANGELS
T o be completely truthful, Nick had not believed in angels. Like

fairy godmothers and Easter bunnies, he thought them to be
cute stories for the imaginations of children. It was not until they
made their presence known to him personally that he understood
the power of what is to come, and what he must do. The first time
the angels spoke to Nick, they related, through a gifted woman
named Sara, that they would make their presence known to him
through the number 444. At the time, he dismissed this message as
he had others. The number 4 had always been prominent in his life.
It was his lucky number. Little did he know that the angels would
not only make their presence known to him through this number but
to thousands across the globe. After The Messengers had made
known this sign of 444 from the angels, letters poured in from all
over telling Nick how readers had felt the presence of angels in their
lives.
One letter, in particular, arrived shortly after the release of the
book. It was from a business professional, like Nick, and it had a
particular impact on Nick at this time, as he began to realize he was
not alone in being the object of angelic attention. The letter read:
57
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 58
Dear Nick,
I am writing this letter because I think, I believe, I need to talk to

you. I will be as brief as I can. Yesterday, December 11, 1996, two
things happened in my life. One I can understand, I lost my job
with my company. The other, I cannot. It is the second incident that
I need help with.
My youngest son plays hockey in Portland. Wednesday mornings

he has practice at 5:30 a.m. Typically, he gets up and gets ready,
then comes in and tells me it is time to leave. Since we only live 4
minutes from the rink, we usually do not leave earlier than
necessary. Yesterday morning, I woke up before my son came in. I
glanced at the clock and at 4:44 a.m. arose out of bed. My son and
his two hockey friends were getting dressed. I went back to my
room, got dressed, and told my son that I would wait for him in the
car. I turned the car on, and the radio was set at 103.3 FM, a soft-
rock station. But music was not playing. Instead, there was a man
on the radio that told me to go out and buy the book, The
Messengers, and that it would change my life.
I did not think much of it at that time. I went to my office in the

morning knowing it was my last day there, and as I sat in my chair
I was moved to get this book. I went to a local bookstore nearby but
they did not have it. I called Powells in Beaverton, and they had
just sold their last one, but said I should contact the downtown
store, which I did. They had a copy, and said they would hold it for
me for up to three days. I usually am one to wait for the last minute
to do things, but in this case I left the office immediately and
purchased the book. I drove to our house in Beaverton.
I read Chapter 1 The Manuscript and was in awe, yet

confused. I knew that I had to get back to my office to get the news
that I knew was coming. I got into my car and as I was driving,
instead of going to my office, I was told to go tell my wife, Louise,
what I just felt. Louise is a school teacher in Lake Oswego. I have
driven to her school hundreds of times along the shore of Lake
Oswego, and never thought of anything much. This time, I thought
of you running (I am also a runner) and the leaves and needles
under your shoes. As I was driving, I was looking at the lake and
wondering where you had stopped. It was a very peaceful drive,
even knowing that I had to go to my office afterwards.
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 59
sign of the angels 59
I arrived at Louises school and waited for her in her office in the
gym. She knew what was happening at my office, so she thought
that was why I was there. I surprised her with a smile on my face,
and told her something happened to me today that I didnt
understand, and that I was confused but felt at peace. I told her
that I woke up at 4:44 in the morning and that it was significant,
but to what degree, I was still not certain. I asked her to give me a
little time to figure this out, and not to think that I was crazy.
I then proceeded to my office to receive the news I knew was

coming (about losing my job), and it did not affect me the way I
anticipated one day earlier. Three years ago, I was in a very serious
accident. The doctor came into my room, looked at me, and said,
John, you had an angel on your shoulder. You should be
paralyzed, possibly even dead. I just thought I was lucky!
My wife came home after work, and we sat in my office at home

and discussed what happened with my job, but the conversation
turned to what I was experiencing in my life. I tried to explain
what was going on, showed her the book, explained the
significance of 4:44 (that morning), and said I was still confused.
That night we went to bed early and I brought the book with me to
read (by the way I never read in bed). I read Chapter 2 the
444s, and when I got to [the part where the angels are having Rick
Eckard write down information], my wife heard me exclaim,
Wow. What I was reacting to was what Rick had written at the
bottom of the page: Dont be afraid.
At one of the lowest points of my life, February 25, 1992, I was

lying in a bed all alone and a very strong, soothing voice said to
me, John, dont be afraid. A couple of years later, I was sitting in
a very small meeting with a group of people I did not know, and I
shared this experience with them. A lady looked at me and said,
You are blessed. You must share this with others. I have not
shared this experience with anyone else other than my wife,
Louise, my daughter, Joanna, and now you.
This morning, December 12, 1996, I again woke up and saw 4:44
a.m. What I did not know until later in the morning was that
Louise also woke up at exactly 4:44 a.m. I think this scared her.
It is about noon on the 12th, and I just finished Chapter 3 The
Sound of Wings. I, too, twice in my life, have experienced the
glow of golden lights from the sky I could not explain. I am not
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 60
sure why I am writing to you, other than maybe you can help make
some sense of what is and has happened in my life, and these
experiences that I have felt.
My life has been filled with hills and valleys, events that I now
understand, some I am beginning to understand, and some that I
still do not understand. If you have the time, I would love to just
sit and talk with you.
Thank you for taking the time to read this. After reading only three
chapters of The Messengers, I knew you would understand what
has been locked inside of me for years. Merry Christmas!
John G.
Nick read this letter with a sense of appreciation, and a sense of

knowing. It was at this time that he began to realize that he was not
alone in his journey. Hundreds, maybe thousands, now knew what
he knew: Angels are here now to work with humankind. And when
they come into your life, you want to believe with all your might that
it is really happening, but maybe, just maybe, youre making the
whole thing up. Maybe, just maybe, we shouldnt talk to anyone
about any of this. Nick had not wanted to admit to himself that he
was the return of the soul and spirit of Paul the Apostle. And in
similar fashion, he had not wanted to admit that angels were talking
to him when it first happened. Nick saw in Johns letter the echoes
of himself.
Five months later, Nick received another letter from John, a letter
of confession. It would remind Nick how he must continue in his
efforts to listen, to hear the divine as it works in our everyday lives.
May 15, 1997
Dear Nick:
In December of 1996, I wrote you a letter explaining how I first

came in contact with your book, The Messengers, and what events
have occurred in my life. When I first came in contact with your
book, I was awakened several mornings at 4:44 a.m. When I started
to read your book, I began to believe that I, too, had been
contacted by my angel.
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 61
There were several times, while reading your book, when I was
extremely moved by what I had read and how I was feeling at the
moment. However, I got to chapter 11 and put the book down. In
looking back, now, I think at that moment, I became afraid of what
I was reading and getting myself into, and how I was feeling. I put
the book away and did not pick it up again. Since that time, I have
had no more contacts at 4:44 a.m. or p.m.
About a week ago, my wife asked me if I had ever finished reading

your book, and I sheepishly said no. On Tuesday of this week, I got
up and got ready to go to morning Mass. That morning, I happened
to pick up my little Bible that I kept with me while I was
incarcerated at Sheridan [a correctional facility]. In my Bible, I
would write notes to myself almost like it was my spiritual diary.
When I arrived at Mass that morning, I was kneeling and happened
to open it to the back page. I almost fell over when I read what I had
written. More specifically, when I had written it. The message I had
written to myself started this way: It is 4:44 p.m. on 10-25-90. The
message I had written was about my relationship to God and Jesus.
The time of this writing absolutely floored me! This was almost
seven years before I had even heard of you or the book, The
Messengers. I called my wife at her work and told her that I now
have to finish reading your book. She said, John, you wont
believe this, but this morning I woke up at 4:44 a.m.!
I now know that I have to finish reading your book. I am not sure
how or what I will feel when I am done, but I will write to you and
let you know.
Thanks!
John G.
Johns letters told a common tale about us all. His was not a
unique story; his struggle and self-discovery is a story that could be
said of each one of us. Even when we try to deny the heavenly
within our midst, it still is there trying to awaken us, help us, work
with us. The reason why Johns letters were among Nicks favorites
was because of their sincerity, their truth, their honesty. John
embodied the fear we all seem to carry with us when we realize that
something is happening in our lives that we may not want, or do not
understand. And the reason we dont want it stems from our inward
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 62
terror of having to surrender notions with which we have grown too

familiar, notions that have allowed us to settle for being less than
who we are. Why is it easier to stare at our feet when we can look up
and see the beauty reflected back to us in this mirror we call life?
Months after his letters had been sent, John came to a place of
strange peace. Upon reflection, he realized how even his worst
moments had provided him with important lessons. At one point he
had owned a $5 million-a-year company ... and lost it. He had almost
lost his family after finding himself incarcerated in minimum
security at Sheridan. But something kept speaking to his soul, kept
showing him where he might find his true happiness. And in the
end, that happiness was found. With a pleasant smile and eyes that
pierced ones soul, John frankly confessed that he did not have
abundance after losing his job and finding another. But he frankly
confessed that he was now the happiest he had ever been. And it
was reflected in his family. When asked what message he would
give to the world if given the opportunity, he responded without
hesitation, Open your hearts. Open your ears. Open your eyes.
Dont be afraid. John had found peace with himself ... with a little
help from his friends.
}
It was around this time that Nick was receiving more and more
information from the angels. Sleep was almost impossible to come
by at times. So much change was entering his own life that he would
arrive at the corporate offices yearning to read the letters now
arriving from around the world, telling him how others were also
facing change. His communication with the angels was becoming
stronger, clearer, and more descriptive as they began to provide
more information about the changes that would transform the entire
world. These were not changes that would bring doom and
destruction, but changes that would flood humanity with
realizations, new wonder, new ways of perceiving ourselves and our
planet. Had not the angels told Nick that 444 represented the power
of Gods love, letting us know the angels are there for us, that 444
was to become the symbol for thousands of people, perhaps
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 63
someday millions? Had not the angels increasingly opened channels

of communication to those who would simply allow it?
The following letter not only echoes the fear John faced, it also
demonstrates a common theme heard repeatedly in letter after letter
delivered to Nicks offices. Many others attest through their letters to
the puzzling guilt we carry around that tends to force us to make the
unwarranted assumption that humankind is basically sinful, or evil.
The angels tell us that nothing is further from the truth. God is
within each one of us. We are vessels of light, a light that is a part of
God. The only evil that exists is the evil we choose to create. It is not
authored by God. Consider the kind of world we would inhabit if
we all chose to see the inherent goodness that dwells within each of
us. Would a criminal choose to rob a store if he felt loved, and in turn
loved? If those around him had treated him with compassion, and
had spoken with the kind of truth that opens any heart, no matter
how hardened, would he not have been able to address his needs
whether material, emotional, or spiritual? Would not his fears, his
inner darkness be confronted by a light that already resides within?
Listen as one person tells the rest of us how we change one single
life, and ultimately the world.
Dear Mr. Bunick,
I dont know where exactly to start. I just feel its time I try and find
out more information. I am so grateful for your appearance on [the
TV show] Northwest Afternoon in Seattle a few weeks ago. It, in
some way, gave me a partial answer to whats been going on in my
life since 1992.
It wasnt until that day when you were on Northwest Afternoon

that I first had any suspicion that something could be happening of
an angelic nature. I had just sat down for a moment with my 14-
year-old daughter and her friend, just to find out about their day
and relax for a couple of minutes. We turned the TV on only half-
listening, but being drawn more and more by the conversation. We
were frustrated that [the host] never let you finish any sentence to
a question she asked you. Frankly, your story was compelling but I
wanted to allow for ... well ... could this man be a fruitcake like half
of the televangelists we hear so much about?
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 64
Then the host asked you about the significance of 444. I felt a rush,
and my daughter leaped off the sofa yelling at me, Mom, are you
listening? Until then, I chalked it all up to coincidence.
I worked for QFC, a local grocery store, while we built our dream
home. Something started happening a few months after I became a
cashier. The number 444, or 4.44 would come up on the cash
register. So much so, that I asked the other cashiers. They thought
I was crazy, and, after a while, told me I should play the Lotto. They
were my lucky numbers. Not only was it happening at work but
many times Id look at the clock and it would say 4:44. I, never in a
million years, could imagine what it was. I never felt any evil. I just
thought Im somehow locked into 444 for whatever reason.
You can imagine the feelings that came over me when I heard you
talk about 444s and the angels. Ive always kind of felt God didnt
like me, and was determined to make my life challenging until I go
crazy. I had myself convinced that I just never give enough to
others, or dont believe enough, or I am not a good enough person
to be able to have a peaceful life. I feel differently now.
Anyway, I had gone to the bookstore a few weeks ago to find a

book for some business associates. I had very little time, but as I
was racing down the aisles, I was stopped in my tracks by a book
that caught my eye, and I felt compelled to reach for it. I turned it
over to find it was your book. I dropped everything and looked for
anything on 444. I sat right there and read that entire chapter. I
bought the book and had a very hard time putting it down.
Every free moment I had, I had to read. I felt like I was there living
it with you. I had the most peaceful yet euphoric feelings as I read
the book. I never wanted it to end. I still need more.
When I was through with the book, I started thinking its just a
coincidence about my 444s, and Ive never felt I had a message, and
the best to my knowledge I had never been awakened at 4:44 a.m.
... until about 1 1/2 weeks ago the day before I left on my trip to
California for work reasons, and to see friends and family. I am
currently on a plane going home this minute.
Anyway, I remember hearing a popping noise in my room. Its kind

of a familiar noise. Our house cracks at night sometimes. It woke
me out of a very sound sleep, but I went back to sleep realizing it
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 65
was the house popping. However, it continued to pop and crack

over and over and over until something told me to wake up all the
way and look at the clock. It was 4:44 a.m., and my heart jumped
out of my chest and started racing. When I realized what could be
happening, I laid on my back trying to calm down, and told myself,
listen ... listen ... listen. All I heard was dead silence. I laid there for
25 minutes and I realized the house didnt make one more sound.
I told my family about it. My husband said to me, What is it going

to take to get you to find out whats going on? I guess thats why
I am writing you. I keep thinking this is all made up and its a
coincidence. There is nothing about me that angels would want,
but I still find myself bothered and wondering. I would really like
to talk to your angel lady and find out once and for all so I can put
this thing to rest or know for sure whats going on.
Can you help me? Please contact me please dont think Im

crazy. You must be getting all kinds of letters or phone calls like
mine of people assuming they are in the presence of something
extraordinary.
I have never witnessed a miracle of birds on a lake or heard wings

or wrote messages. So, I kind of think Im a fruitcake, too!
I just need to know what, if anything is going on. Thank you, and
thank you for your book.
Kathie
Nick was touched by the sincerity of Kathleens letter. It

deserved a personal response. Taking his Dictaphone in hand, he
spoke from his heart about the importance of seeing how important
each one of us is. God is here for you, he said intently. Many of us
think we are unworthy, when the exact opposite is true. The earth
itself depends on our knowing and believing that God is within each
one of us. We need to accept that, he affirmed. If every single
person believes in their importance with God, and in God, then each
of us will ultimately change the world. The occurrences of 444
experiences has manifold purposes. But chief among them is being
reminded that the angels are here for us. They wish us to
acknowledge them, and in so doing, enlist their aid and comfort. For
there is little they can do without our asking it of them. The 444
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 66
experiences are reminders and indicators that the angelic realm is

trying to work with us.
Kathleen usually did not write letters in fact she never writes
letters. But upon reading Nicks response, she thanked herself for
her own courage. And from that day on, courage became her
watchword and her byword. In fact she made a copy of Nicks credo,
found in the last pages of chapter seven of The Messengers, framed it
and hung it on her wall. Particularly noted is the following section:
You must believe in yourself at all times. You must never lose faith
that you are capable of doing anything in life you choose to do.
And you must always choose the highest. It is not enough for you
to choose that you must achieve excellence. For you must believe
in yourself enough to accomplish that which others cannot
accomplish.
To believe in yourself, you must have courage that exceeds the

need for consideration of courage. It must be a natural part of your
life that avoids any need for decision-making based on whether
you have courage to do that which you must. This must be a belief
beyond personal question, beyond personal doubt, to a point when
it can no longer be considered courage, but a way of life. This shall
be so, for you will believe in yourself.
Kathleens journey was no longer one in which she thought that

God could not, did not, love her. Hers was now a journey of courage,
self-courage. It is that kind of singular courage that moves into the
collective whole of society, touches it, speaks softly to it, and forever
changes it. Kathleens newfound courage made her a beacon of love
and acceptance, for she now was able to love and accept the gift she,
herself, was in this world. The angels had opened her eyes to the
truth of who she was. Truly, this kind of self-discovery is the key
that, when turned, unlocks the treasure that is ours. Imagine a world
of people who see their own inherent goodness, believe in it, and
live it. How can such reality not change this world forever? We have
only to look at Kathleen to believe in its possibility.
Wherever Nick would go, whether in restaurants or airports,
people began to approach him telling about 444 experiences they
had witnessed and/or experienced. It amazed even him to hear how
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 67
varied and numerous the stories were. As coming events approach,

it becomes increasingly obvious that the angels are seeking a
communion with the people of the Earth. One night, Nick decided to
ask the angels why there were so many reports of the 444
phenomenon. And they answered back to him, It is because we
have always been here, but only now do the people of the Earth ask
us to help them. We have been waiting.
(
Days.Ch4 2/12/03 11:56 AM Page 69
Part II
}
A TIME FOR HEALING
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 71
5
(
THE SECRET
M ad Dog, why dont you have Julia Ingram regress you to find
out how much you can add to all thats been uncovered?
Nick had hinted around before at revealing Garys ancient past but
this was the first time hed been so blunt.
Taking a sip of pinot noir, Gary let silence linger for a while
longer. I have my reasons, he mumbled. With his fingers steadily
rotating the stem of the wineglass, his eyes stared trancelike into the
rich redness, thinking what a treat these dinners were. Like Solomon,
Nick had an appreciation for good food and good wine. Had not
Solomon proclaimed these two blessings the only worthwhile
pursuits of life? Everything else was folly?
Oh come on, Mad Dog. You know more about me than even my
kids. Which was saying something, considering how few really
knew Nick at all. Nick valued his privacy as much as he did his
business investments.
I dont know, Nick, still turning the stem of the wineglass.
Ive been regressed before, and promised myself I wouldnt allow
it to happen again.
Nick smiled. He loved a challenge. That bad?
71
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 72
Not really. What happened is beyond believing. I can still hardly

believe it myself. How can I expect anyone else to take me seriously?
Nick leaned forward, breaching etiquette by firmly placing his
elbows on the table. After all Ive been through, you expect me to
be less open-minded than youve been with me? As he finished the
sentence, Nick reached for the wine bottle and began refilling both
glasses. For Gary, Oregon pinot noir was nectar of the gods. Wasnt
this supposed to be a business planning dinner? Gary asked to himself.
Nicks insatiable curiosity stood as a force to be reckoned with. The
man knew how to get what he wanted. And how did the old adage
go The truth is in the wine? Can insatiable curiosity be justified
in pursuit of the truth?
Its not so much about being open-minded, Gary countered
gently. Dont you think some things are better left alone? Some
mysteries should just remain a mystery? Gary ceased playing with
his wine glass and looked straight into Nicks eyes, trying to catch a
glimpse into Nicks soul.
Normally, Mad Dog, I might agree with you. But who knows
whats ahead for both of us? Life is too short. We are at the dawning
of great mysteries being revealed. And who knows what you have
hidden away? It may contain an important piece to the jigsaw
puzzle we are trying to figure out. Besides, you know I can keep a
secret. And you look like you need to get this off your chest. Nick
was right. He could keep a secret when he wanted to. The real
question was whether he wanted to.
Gary removed his spectacles and massaged his eyes, letting out
a sigh. It all started in 1983 when I came down with what would be
diagnosed as an incurable disease. Nick leaned back on his chair
letting the restaurant chatter surrounding them fade away. This was
going to be better than hed thought.
What kind of disease?
Well, no one knew at first. Later it was diagnosed by a well-
known dermapathologist as subdermal-something-or-other-some-
thing-or-other. All I know is that it was like being cursed with poison
ivy, only all the time. Really awful stuff. Started one day after
picking Gravenstein apples all afternoon in the hot sun. Got bark
dust all over me trying to get the last apple from the tree top.
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 73
the secret 73
Gravensteins make the absolute best applesauce. I went back home

with my booty and crashed on the couch. When I woke up and
stripped to take a shower, I started noticing a rash. When I stepped
out of the shower, the rash seemed to be all over me but I dismissed
it as my skin reacting to the hot shower. By midnight the rash had
erupted into hives, accenting any crease or crack where the bark dust
had been. I looked like a drawing done in red ink, itching all over
unbearable. Had to go to the hospital because there was no way I
could sleep. The emergency room doctors put me on prednisone and
Demoral. Told me to soak in the tub at home until the itching
stopped. For seventy-two hours I lay in the tub soaking in oat water.
Couldnt eat, couldnt sleep. After I finally left the tub, tiny blisters
broke out in every imaginable crack and crevice of my body. The
itching finally lessened, but now orange ooze started to cover me as
the blisters broke. The ooze hardened into orange plastic-looking
scabs. Thought I should tell this part before dinner arrived. Taking
another sip of the wine, Gary stole a glance at Nick to see how
squeamish he looked.
Nice of you to tell me now, Nick kidded, noticing the waiter
coming with their salads. No problem; go on. Gary decided to
wait until the waiter finished with the plates, taking note of the
matador-like fashion in which he placed the first course, as if a cape
were being laid before them instead of plates of baby bib lettuce.
After waving off the peppercorn grinder, Gary continued, With
the orange plastic scabs covering me, I looked like something out of
a Star Trek movie. I couldnt work in that condition. If I so much as
bent my arms to type on my computer, the scabs would crack like
thin peanut brittle and let out ooze all over again. I couldnt even
leave the house. My wife spent as much time with me as possible,
but someone had to work.
You were married?
Were coming to that part. After six months of scabbing and
healing, oozing and scabbing, with the whole cycle repeating over
and over again, including episodic visits to the emergency room, I
lost my job. Which meant I also lost my house, lost my self-respect,
and almost lost my wife. For a year I saw every doctor, every
specialist, every allergist I could think of. But to no avail.
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 74
The second year, I resorted to alternative medicine, seeing

acupuncturists, homeopaths, herbologists, even shamans you
name it, I saw it. Nothing worked. Since I couldnt get a job, I began
doing computer consulting and started my own digital music
company. At the time MIDI had just hit the market. Even though I
couldnt read a note of music, I could generate copy by paying
musicians to keyboard in the notes and then Id clean it up later. I
understood the mathematics of music and had no trouble creating
publishing quality songbooks and sheet music at a quarter of the
price of the old way. Because of the efficiency and reliability of the
technology, I managed to snag a lucrative contract with a major
publishing house. That was my baptism into publishing and
writing. And it allowed me to remain a recluse, since the disease
continued reinfecting me into the third year. By that time, I
discovered how to reduce the reoccurrence of infections by having
my wife pressure cook all my underwear. Even if one drop of
residue serum were left anywhere on my cleaned clothes, the rash
would start all over again. Can you imagine having to pressure cook
your clothes? Because of this discovery, I could actually start to act
normal again, going for a couple of weeks or more at a time without
another bout of infection.
Gary picked at his salad. The memory of the agony he had gone
through took his appetite away. Nicks salad languished as well. He
was too enthralled with what he was hearing. So, you gave up on
modern medicine; you gave up on alternative medicine. What was
left?
A smile fought away the blushing on Garys face as he pondered
how to answer the question. I began reading everything I could on
the unexplainable: Life After Death, Life After Life, To Hear the Angels
Sing, and finally Dr. Brian Weiss book, Many Lives, Many Masters.
That book changed my life. Weiss originally started out to debunk
what was then being called The New Psychology, which included
past-life regression hypnosis. But instead of debunking it, he ended
up becoming one of its strongest proponents. In the book, he had a
patient whose case was as hopeless as mine. Wild stuff. I decided Id
have to find someone like Brian Weiss. And you know me. When I
put my mind to something, neither heaven nor earth can stop me.
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 75
the secret 75
The salad plates disappeared as the waiter readied the table for
the main course. Nick wished the waiter would disappear but
waited patiently for what he knew would be a culinary marvel. The
two men were pampering themselves in one of Nicks favorite
restaurants, hidden away in Northwest Portland. Being hidden
away had done little good in the way of coziness, for the reputation
of the chef had spread throughout the city as well as the suburbs.
Getting a reservation could prove difficult at times. But Nick made
it a point to be remembered. His generosity served him well at times
like this. For Mr. Bunick, a table could always be found,
accompanied by great wine and a great feast. As the last of the main
course was set, Nick returned to the conversation. Had you heard
about Julia at this time?
This was just before Julia got a name for herself. Finding a
therapist well versed in classical psychotherapy, like Weiss, was
daunting. I wasnt having much luck. But one night, while watching
the Community Cable Channel, I stumbled on a trance channeler.
Well, kind of a trance channeler. He wasnt like J.Z. Knight. He could
move in and out of his trance at will, carrying on a cogent
conversation with you when he wasnt channeling information. He
brought through an entity he called Maitreya. I couldnt take my
eyes off what I was seeing. Callers were phoning in with outrageous
questions, only to get the most incredible answers. I decided to try
and call in, and actually got through. Being the skeptic I am, I
wanted to ask him a question he couldnt possibly know or guess the
answer to. It was a question about the bardo, or afterlife. Did I get the
surprise of my life when he stated over the air that I had already
died when I was a child, and had been sent back to bring new
information to the world. There was no way he could have even
guessed at that. But it was true. I had drowned in a river during a
family reunion when I was eleven, and had been pronounced dead.
Through all my years, Id never told anyone what happened to me
as my body lay on the bottom of that river. I had gone to a place I call
the God-Light, where love is beyond description sheer ecstasy.
When I had been told by the God-Light that I had to return, I
objected vociferously. But even before finishing my sentence, I found
myself back in my body. The rescuers had found me by then, and
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 76
had covered my body in an army blanket, ready to cart it off. They

didnt have mouth-to-mouth resuscitation in those days. I remember
being so utterly confused under the blanket by all the weeping and
wailing I could hear. How could anybody be sad with all this love
pouring in? When my body started to move, pulling the blanket
back, you should have heard the screaming. My parents never spoke
about that afterwards.
So you can understand why I was a bit stunned that this
channeler knew such information. After the TV show, I decided to
make an appointment with him. It was during my private session
with him when he told me, On December 15th you will experience
a heavenly event which will affect you and everyone around you.
This was in March when he told me this. Plus, he told me I would be
moving to Seattle. I laughed on my way out the door. There was no
way I was moving to Seattle. I had this big publishing contract, and
there was no way I would walk away from that. Hah! A few months
later, deeper into the contractual obligations, I realized Portland
didnt have large enough of a talent pool to finish the work that
needed to be done on the songbooks and a hymnal. So guess where
I moved? Yep. Seattle.
The waiter now moved in between the tables with ballerina
grace. The matador must have gone on vacation. Water glasses were
filled and wine goblets carefully topped. The gracefulness and
efficiency caught Gary off guard. For the first time that evening, he
focused on someone other than himself. Even the waiters eyes
danced. Noticing the pinot noir bottle empty, he asked if another
bottle would be desired. Nick looked to Gary. Why not? Gary
answered with bravado, I think Ill need it. Nick wondered what
he meant but decided not to ask. The evening was unfolding
beautifully. Why interrupt the flow? Business affairs would
surrender to another time.
As Gary finally dove into his dinner, his mind worked at how to
reveal to Nick the real pearl of this story. As December approached,
the skin condition grew worse. I heard about a famous derma-
pathologist at the University of Washington who might be able to
help me. Normally it took one to two years to get an appointment
with him. When I phoned in, someone had just canceled. Ya gotta
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 77
the secret 77
love such coincidences. Three days later I was sitting in his office. For
the rest of the month, the more he worked on me the worse I got.
When he finally told me that what I had was incurable, that Id have
it the rest of my life, I was furious. I was furious with him and his
profession, and I was furious with God. I felt like Job in the Bible.
Completely abandoned. Cursed with a dreaded skin disease that
would torment me to my dying day. The specialist gave me
prescriptions like all the rest had done. He told me I could have a
normal life if I continued to use hydrocortisone. Doctors must think
people are stupid. Id already done my research and knew the
consequences of continued use of such steroids. I left the office
fuming all the way down to my car. I had made a promise to myself
that if it ever came to getting such a life-sentence, Id do whatever I
could to find someone who knew about the New Psychology.
So you found someone to regress you? Nick asked trying to
push the story along.
Not just someone, but someone who knew both classical
psychotherapy and past-life regression. Took me a while, but I found
just the man in Bellevue, Washington a wonderful doctor of
psychology, named Dr. Larry DeHerrera. It wasnt easy for me to call
him, since I didnt know what exactly I was getting myself in for.
When he answered the phone, I asked him about his credentials and
he asked me questions about my case. When we finished
interrogating one another, he told me that he wasnt accepting any
more clients, that he was full up. However, my case was so
intriguing, he decided he would slide me into the one remaining slot
he reserved for his usual patients, in case of an emergency. When I
asked him the date and time, he told me December 15th. I sat there
stunned, and then mumbled Holy shit. He asked me if there was
something wrong, and I told him that everything was just fine, the
date would be just fine. Hah. If I had only known. The channeler had
been correct. This date would end up changing my entire life.
Silence hung in the air while Gary nibbled at his dinner. Telling this
story always brought back old feelings of anxiety. Before he laid into
the most difficult part of the story, Gary listened to conversations
going on around him. Hed always been blessed with exceptional
hearing, and eavesdropping had been a curious pastime for him.
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 78
From past experience hed learned that the more conversations

going on around him meant the less likely his conversation would
be sat in on. All the adjacent tables were engaged in serious chat. He
would proceed with his tale.
The first session, Dr. DeHerrera tried to use hypnosis to get at
the source of my incurable disease. Nothing happened. So the next
couple of sessions were spent with classical psychotherapy. Which
made me glad I had taken the time to find someone of his talent. In
the middle of one of the therapy sessions, Doc, as he encouraged me
to call him, said, Ya know, Gary, you are really a good psychologist.
I laughed thinking he was making jest. No, he continued, Im
serious. You really know your stuff. Its obvious you are well read on
the topic. Im truly impressed. But I tell you what. Why dont you
give it a rest? Let me be the psychologist. Youre paying me good
money to help you. Why not just relax and let me work with you.
Wow, did that catch me by surprise. And frankly, it wasnt easy to do
what he asked. Doc was teaching me a lot about myself. It was the
next session where he really threw me for a loop. With those kind
eyes of his, he stared right through me and said, Hrumph, you
remind me of me. Id like to tell you a story about me. I used to really
feel lonely much of the time. It wasnt because I hadnt any friends.
I had many, but they werent there when I truly needed them. And
that puzzled me. I realized that life is like a canvas. Each of us tries
to paint our lives, our souls, on the canvas. And right next to us our
friends are painting on their canvases as well. I discovered that my
friends used to love to look at my canvas. I think it is the same for
you. Here I am painting away, showing my love and my life to my
friends as I paint. But when I look over at their canvases, they have
stopped painting. They are standing there looking at mine. And
thats when I felt the most lonely. I wanted to see their paintings but
there was nothing more to see. Ya know what I discovered, Gary?
Sometimes you have to put your fuckin brush down ... so you dont
feel such loneliness even among friends. Nick, that guy took my
breath away at times. I couldnt talk for about ten minutes after that,
I was so choked up. He had me nailed.
About the second week of January, Doc looked at me and said
point blank, We are done. There is nothing wrong with you
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 79
the secret 79
psychologically. That one rattled me royally. What do you mean

were done, I protested. You havent done all you can do. And he
looked at me with one of those sagelike looks of his and asked, And
what more would you have me do? Damn, could he ever turn the
tables on me. I practically yelled at him, You havent even
attempted the hypnosis again. And why not? Thats the main reason
why I came here. And he retorted, Thats what I was waiting to
hear. Shall we begin?
Nick had to grin at such candor and cleverness. As he waited for
Gary to continue the story, he knew that some long-held secret
would was about to be uncloaked. It was time to fill Garys
wineglass again. As he leaned over with the bottle, Gary laid his
hand across the top of the goblet. No thanks. I need to have a clear
head to tell the rest of this.
Tell me this, Nick said. Why do you think the therapist spent
so much time with classical psychotherapy when he knew you were
there for this new stuff?
I think he truly understood that I had gotten in my own way,
that I was still getting in my own way in doing what I came here to
do. We had discussions about what it was I would be looking for
while under hypnosis. Was it more than finding the cause of the
disease? And it turns out that I did want to know more than the
cause of the disease. I read volumes on the possibilities available
using past-life regression. And one of the areas most interesting to
me takes place in what is called the bardo. This is the realm of the
afterlife. The Tibetans believed in eight bardos. However, modern
regression work had only explored two: life after death and life
before life. Raymond Moody had done breakthrough work in that
arena and others followed suit. I wanted to know why I was sent
here. In one of our sessions, Doc found out about my having died in
the drowning accident. He wanted to know what had been said
while I was on the other side. So the both of us were interested in
finding out why I had been sent back. Who was I? What was I sent
here to do? We didnt know if we would be allowed to find the
answers to these questions but both of us were quite interested in
uncovering that part of the painting that was my life.
So what happened?
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 80
Nick was all ears as Gary began to describe the session,

describing how the hypnosis finally took, how Doc had simply asked
one short sentence once Gary was under: Let us find the cause of
this disease. That was it. This simple request called forth swirling
scenes wrapped within the other. Each scene laid out a lifetime of
confrontation and enlightenment with the status quo throughout
history. Doc asked for detail from each passing scene, hoping to find
out as much as possible that would give the underlying cause of the
disease. But before much detail could be discerned, another lifetime
would roll in on top of the other. It was as if these lives were being
lived concurrently. But that wasnt possible, was it? How could one
life be lived in colonial America, while another was being lived in
ancient Egypt? The rolling scenes settled into one particular lifetime
in 17th century France. Gary had been a famous cathedral architect.
Nick noted each piece of detail as Gary described how he had
fashioned a statement into one of the cathedrals, which was not
uncommon for architects to do at that time, especially architects with
a large following. The architect had under him many apprentices,
who in turn not only mastered his mathematical techniques but also
adopted his sense of justice and righteousness for the downtrodden.
Gary looked up at Nick to check whether he should divulge the
next piece of information. He decided he would. The architect had
fallen in love with the Lord Mayors daughter. They were engaged
to be married. Their love for one another surpassed any found in
stories or lore for both fully adored the gifts of the other, the
richness of life they both brought one another. The supreme irony of
this love lay in the architecture of the newly finished cathedral. For
the architect had been an outspoken critic of conservative elements
within the Catholic Church, and how they had taken love and
sexuality out of its sacredness, focusing instead on any and every
aspect considered sinful. This Baroque period had been a period of
religious fervor and spiritual revolution. How could love ever be
sinful? These conservative voices within the Catholic Church threw
a dark shadow on the splendor of love in a time of enlightenment,
and the architect wished to make a statement against them.
Elements of the new cathedral reflected conservative echoes of
Renaissance architecture in its rectangular and circular shapes, as
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 81
the secret 81
well as Gothic architecture in the use of downspouts, not unlike the

conservative elements within the changing Church. High atop the
cathedral roofing stood rows of gargoyle-like angels ready to carry
any excessive water away from the walls of the beautiful structure.
The building was lauded as an architectural marvel by the bishop
and the city elders. But what they didnt know showed itself one
stormy night. An evening thunderstorm dropped buckets of water
on the city, giving way to parting clouds undraping a full moon. The
downspouts proved their worthiness, sending out copious streams
off the cathedral roof. But what the architect had not accounted for
was a full moon silhouetting the gargoyles, betraying his clever
secret. From ground level, the angelic beings no longer looked so
angelic. In fact, the entire cathedral appeared lined with a row of large
penises taking a collective whiz off the cathedral roof. The wings of
the angels no longer appeared so winglike but more like matching
scrota to the phallic angels the architect had humorously designed.
The sight was not lost on the townsfolk. A crowd gathered some in
shock, others in hysterical laughter. The subtle statement no longer
served to be so subtle. Word spread like a plague. When the bishop
heard of the incident days later, the Lord Mayor and the town elders
found themselves in the bishops quarters. How dare such scandal
come to the diocese and the city. Something had to be done. The first
step was to summon the architect, remove any and all support for
his school and his followers, issue an edict of shame, and ostracize
him before the entire city.
Rather than fight the establishment and rally his supporters,
the architect found himself devastated, abandoned by his bride-to-
be, sent away by her farther. The engagement had been
immediately canceled, with any talk of a marriage completely out
of the question. The architectures apprentices wanted to rally the
voices of architectural freedom, hoping to take advantage of the
creative fervor of the age. But the Church fathers threatened a
heavy hand on any who dared show any form of support for this
outrageous scandal. The cathedral now had been facetiously
dubbed the Cathedral of the Night Waters, forcing the bishop to
enlist renovations of the gargoyles as quickly as masons could be
found.
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 82
Instead of becoming a rebel for free architectural expression, for

the city as well as the whole of France, the architect took to drink,
becoming instead the town drunk. His fall was quick and total. One
night, while in a drunken stupor, he rode out of the city on a road
that skirted a church graveyard. Not paying attention to the trees
along the road, he clotheslined himself with a sagging tree limb,
falling from his horse into a ravine, breaking his neck in the process.
As he lay dying in the ravine, townsfolk found him in the early
morning. Because the neck fracture had paralyzed him, he was
thought dead. And because he had been ostracized, the local priest
made it known that he could not be buried in any cemetery. A small
crew assembled to cover the body with dirt where it lay. And as the
shoveled dirt piled upon the architect, he had no choice but to watch
himself being buried alive.
Alive? Nick broke in. You watched yourself being buried
alive? Nick remembered the vividness of his own regression
sessions with Julia Ingram, especially the beating of the Apostle
Paul. So real had been the scene that bruises had appeared on his
arms. The thought of watching oneself being buried alive ran
through his body with a shudder.
Well, yeah, I watched the first several shovelsful. Doc quickly
took me beyond the death and into the bardo, not wanting me to
suffer any longer. Then he asked me what the scene around me
looked like, what it felt like. I told him that there was nothing but
peace, which was so amazing, since I had freshly experienced the
panic of being buried alive. The peace was beyond description, kind
of like the passage in Scripture: ... peace that passes understanding.
Gold light surrounded me, no matter where I looked. Love filled the
gold light, which filled me with this rich sense of profound peace.
Fantastic experience. Ill never forget it.
Then Doc asked what was my mission in coming here to Earth
at this time, as we had agreed early on. It was then that an angelic
being appeared in front of me a distance away. At least, I thought it
was an angel. Never in my born days have I seen anything like it. In
place of a face there shone this featureless countenance, lustrous
with an incredible white light. Its body seemed made of half
substance and half light, maybe eight to ten feet high. The top half,
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 83
the secret 83
from its left shoulder down to its right hip, looked as though it were
made of prisms within prisms, rainbows within rainbows of
glowing light. The most vivid colors imaginable. I remember
thinking whatever this was looked like a Picasso painting, only
alive. The beings lower half sported a robelike garment shining
with iridescence, as if it were made of mother of pearl. The outline
around the apparition diffused into a soft mist which emitted
constant love. Then the angel began to speak. And when it spoke, I
could hear it on three different levels simultaneously. In my mind it
issued what I would call a holographic message while a spoken
message came through my own voice. The holographic message was
like having an encyclopedia stuffed into your brain, enabling you to
know all the knowledge contained there all at once. As soon as I
would have a single thought, the holographic knowledge would
explode into fragments and turn into what could be described as
separate books on a library shelf. Any of these books could be visited
later for their content and knowledge. And while this was going on,
I could feel a subconscious message moving into my heart. As all
this unfolded, I could also see my conscious self sitting to the side
wondering what in the hell was happening. My conscious self sat
there like a cougar ready to jump in if this got any more weird or if
something didnt seem right. My conscious self knew that it could
end this whole session in a split second if it wanted.
The angel gave the answer to Docs inquiry through my voice,
saying, Your purpose is the same now as it has always been: To
bring justice to the unjust, to lift up the downtrodden, to throw light
into the shadows created by mans efforts to make evil out that
which holds beauty and harmony. It is the same in this lifetime as it
has been in every lifetime. I dont think Doc had a clue that the
angel had appeared or knew where this message had come from.
What Doc didnt hear was the holographic message, the
encyclopedia in my brain. This volume of information allowed me to
see all my pertinent lifetimes in full concert and harmony with
regards to this spoken message. Seeing this composite allowed me to
realize how I existed in more ways than I thought. There are those
who come to Earth as more than simple human beings. Multi-
dimensions exist, and to those who live in those composite
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 84
dimensions, they bear a holographic soul. I had entered the Earth

time and time again to set forth new truths, justice, and
righteousness. Powers that I did not understand or realize with my
conscious mind could be given to humanity, or humanity could be
made to remember its past abilities with these incomprehensible
gifts. I had come once again in this lifetime to bring gifts and to
address matters of injustice. The holographic message was so
pervasive that an entire book would have to be written to explain all
the wrongs that had been created and perpetrated in the name of
stamping out the evil of homosexuality. When in reality,
homosexuality is nothing more than a remedy to mans creation of
separateness, having divided his masculine and feminine, putting
them at war with one another. In separating masculine from
feminine, man needed a bridge back to oneness, oneness with
himself and also with the God-Light. That bridge was the holding
together of the masculine and feminine in one, a witness to the
original time spoken of in Genesis: And God created Man. Male and
female he created them, and he blessed them and named them Man
when they were created. In the English translation, it is made to
sound like God created men and then he created women. But in the
original Hebrew, especially in sections of the Zohar, we realize that
Man was both male and female in the same body. This same truth is
reflected in the name of God. In English, God is male. But in Hebrew
the word for God, Yahweh, is neuter. Not the English neuter, which
means neither male or female, but the Hebrew neuter, which means
both male and female. In our modern world, Carl Jung, the great
psychologist, discovered this same phenomenon in his writings on
the animus and anima.
Yet man has chosen to call that which is not masculine or
feminine, but in reality both masculine and feminine, as sinful, so
that mankind might destroy it. And in destroying it, humanity
would not have to face the truth of how ego has separated us from
God, separated us in our world, separated us from our inner selves.
There is more, much more. It is all so intricately tied together.
Gary looked over at Nick to discern whether he had told too
much. Nick scratched his chin sagaciously. So do you still have
access to all this information?
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 85
the secret 85
Well, let me finish my tale before I answer that. It may have an

impact on the work we do together.
Would either of you care for dessert? the waiter asked,
catching Gary by surprise. Hed been so absorbed in his storytelling
that hed phased out the entire restaurant.
Actually, I could use some dessert, Gary volunteered. After
ordering a large raspberry cobbler a la mode, he looked over at Nick,
who waved off any further calories. As the waiter carried off the
dessert menus, Gary took in a deep breath as he continued his
bizarre account. He knew Nick was rapt by the story by the mere fact
that he had not interrupted with his typical bombardment of
questions.
Then Doc asked if there was another mission. Before me
appeared the other mission. I could tell that this mission contained a
far greater purpose for me, and ramifications for others. The purpose
appeared behind a scrim in the abstract shape of a shining ball, like
a great pearl. The veil or scrim, as thin at as it was, acted to block any
information coming forth from the pearl about this other purpose.
Not sure what should be done, I told Doc, The purpose is hidden
behind a curtain. His response was, Then let us draw the curtain
back so that we may learn of this other purpose. As I reached with
my mind to draw the scrim back, the angel stepped in front of the
curtain. It would not let the curtain be drawn. Again, not knowing
what to do, I reported to Doc, I cant draw the curtain back. The
angel wont let me. I can no longer see the purpose. Docs response
came immediately. Angel? His voice betrayed his wondering what
the hell was going on. After a pause he added, Ask the angel to step
aside so that we might know this other mission you came here with.
And the angel responded, once again using my voice, You may not
know this at this time. For if you did, you might misuse it or abuse
it. For reasons I cant explain, I knew what the angel meant. Because
of my own self-doubts I was not ready to know why I had truly
come to the Earth, nor was I ready to handle the extraordinary gifts
that were to be given to humanity.
Nicks curiosity got the better of him: Do you know what the
purpose and the gifts are now? Didnt this happen a couple of years
ago?
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 86
Yes. I believe the mission has to do with the work you are trying
to do with the Great Tomorrow, this marvelous organization you are
trying to create. What my role is remains to be seen. And I believe
the gifts have long been spoken of throughout history through
prophecy from many religious traditions. At this point, Im not
exactly aware of what the gifts are.
Dont you think a hypnosis session with Julia might bring some
of this info forward?
Wait until you hear the rest of the story before I answer that.
Dessert arrived. Gary toyed with the topping trying to reorganize
his thoughts. Nick caught the eye of a business associate entering the
restaurant. She waved, and then approached the table. Gary smiled
and looked down at his dessert. He wondered how much he should
tell Nick. This next part was going to be the toughest to tell. Nick
politely made introductions, the associates eyes wondering what
kind of power dinner was unfolding. Business executives have a
knack for picking up nonverbal clues or body language. Anyone
who knew Nick knew how much he loved food. The fact that the
dinner table was empty of everything but a raspberry cobbler and
wineglasses told the associate that whatever was being discussed
must be important. And since Nick imparted only polite chatter, the
executive figured out she needed to leave the two men to their
meeting.
Nick returned to Gary, OK, where were we?
Well, when Doc heard that the angel would not let us see any
more, he decided to end the session right then and there. My
conscious mind, still sitting on the sideline was screaming, No, no,
you cant. We have to find out why this angel is here. Dont stop
now. As Doc began to prepare me for leaving the bardo, my
conscious mind stepped in saying aloud, You dont need to bring
me out of this. I can bring myself out now. I think my conscious
mind was hoping to control what was happening and wanted to
wrestle away Docs ability to end it. But Doc insisted, Please let me
do this. Just relax and let me guide you back. As I count backwards
from ten to one .... My conscious mind was not pleased as I came out
of the hypnosis. In fact, I was pissed. What Doc was not aware of
was that the angel gave me another message. Instead of giving the
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 87
the secret 87
message on three levels at once, it began giving me the holographic

message first. Another encyclopedia of information exploded into
my brain. I cant tell you what a wild sensation this was. I kept
wanting it never to go away but as soon as I had a single thought the
hologram of knowledge would fracture into pieces and separate into
fragments of knowledge.
Can you give the overall sense of this holographic message? Or
is that impossible with language?
The message told me of the wonder of my intentions to undo
the sorrows that mankind had brought upon itself with sexism and
homophobia. The angel let me see how I had wasted so much of my
life by running away from this sacred mission. Then it gave me
another message that I relayed to Doc. With its voice came my voice:
You have sought oneness and harmony with God in the highest of
places. You have taken the highest roads and pursued the highest of
truths. But you must realize that God is not only to be found in the
highest of ways. God is also to be found in the least of these.
Immediately I knew who the least of these were for this lifetime.
They were the gays who were suffering as never before in history.
And why? As a punishment from God? No. AIDS is not a disease
just of the body; it is also a disease of spirit and mind. The disease is
here only to force all of us to deal with the great disharmonies that
we had created over the centuries. It is here to help us focus on our
own evils that we had created in separating the masculine and the
feminine in ego-based ways. Such things were never meant to be
separated as if by war. They were meant only to be in balance, in
harmonious equilibrium with one another. We are a patriarchal
society that has disenfranchised women along with the feminine
within men. We have ravaged the Earth out of a sense of ownership
and egotistical power. We came here to be stewards of this Garden
Planet, not rulers. I realized the importance of my mission as Doc
continued counting. The more conscious I became the more anger
rose up in me. What gave Doc the right to end the session? What if
the angel had more to say to me? As I looked at Doc, I was about to
chastise him for his actions when I noticed a light to the left of me in
the corner of his office. As I turned my head, there it was: the angel.
Standing there as big as life in all its splendor, its head just barely
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 88
touching the ceiling. Was I ever relieved. I could tell Doc was
puzzled by what I was staring at. That is when the next message
came forth. The angel said to me, You have abandoned your
purpose. You were born into a gay body for a divine reason. Yet you
have fled that reason. It was like being struck by lightning. Gary
checked Nicks body language out to see how he had reacted to the
revelation.
And you were married at this time?
Uh huh. I was in my fourteenth year of marriage. The
consequences of what the angel had said crashed in on me like a
falling building. My first reaction was that of horror, not because I
had been outed, but because of the immediate realization of how
many years of my life had been wasted. An unspeakable shame
flooded me. I dont know if there is anything worse for a man than
to realize he has wasted his life. The sorrow shook me, and I began
to weep uncontrollably. Tears that had not been shed for the
previous twenty years welled up and would not be stopped. Poor
Doc. He had no idea what was going on. All he saw was this grown
man bawling his head off.
Then the angel did something very strange. It lifted its left arm
to its side, the one made of the mother of pearl, and then swept it
across its body. As it did this, an opening occurred, like a round
doorway. And in the doorway was the God-Light. I hadnt seen that
Light since I had drowned and died when I was eleven years old.
The Light once again flooded me with love and let me know that I
had been forgiven. The incurable disease was an effort to get me to
wake up to my purpose once again. I had suffered enough. There
was no need to suffer anymore. There was no need for shame, just
self-forgiveness. I looked into the God-Light, feeling unmeasured
gratefulness, but what I also saw was that even though the God-
Light had forgiven me, I could not forgive myself. No matter how
hard I tried, I could not forgive myself. And the God-Light faded.
The third message came into my heart, like the previous times. I
knew that I was to tell this story to five people, my closest friend and
associates. And if they heard what I had to say and believed it, then
they would be involved in the putting together of a company that
would begin to change the days of suffering for humanity.
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 89
the secret 89
It was then that Doc finally said something. His voice was quite
shaky as he told me, Gary, youve taken a lot on. You dont have to
take everything on at once. You can come back and we can discuss
what has happened further. Im here for you. I turned to Doc and
said, I know what I have to do. And I did. As soon as the last word
fell from my lips, the angel disappeared in a flash. Gone. Poof. Doc
tried once again, You have my phone number. Call me anytime. You
dont have do this all yourself. And I told him, I know what I have
to do. Let me pay my bill now. I wont be returning. I paid my bill
and left. Never to return.
Thats quite a story, Nick volunteered.
I will understand if you feel the need to terminate our business
relationship. My being gay could cause you problems.
Doesnt change a thing as far as Im concerned. I kind of
thought you were gay anyway. The two stared at one another for a
while appraising the consequences of the story that had just been
told. So, was one of the people you had to tell the story to your
wife?
Yes. Having to tell her was horrific, but I did it. I let her know
Id give her a divorce if she wanted. But she wouldnt hear of it. She
felt that nothing had changed. I was still the man she loved. As
remarkable as that was for me to hear, I had to tell her that I could
no longer hide who I was. I now owed it to myself to live the life I
came here to live. What would happen if I met a man and fell in love
with him? She quietly answered that wed cross that bridge when
we came to it.
The other four people werent so understanding. Only one of
the four stayed friends with me. The rest were polite, but I didnt
hear from them after that. So the company that was to be formed by
their combined talents never came together. Thats why I think your
dreams of the Great Tomorrow are the second chance at creating a
new kind of world that will allow the days of suffering to end.
And the incurable disease?
A few days after leaving Docs, I went to bed with the rash
starting to cover my chest once again. This is when the itching is at
its worst. By morning I knew Id be covered in blisters. After putting
on a new undershirt to prepare for the eventuality, I went to sleep.
Days.Ch5 2/12/03 12:00 PM Page 90
When I woke up in the morning, the disease was completely gone.

No sign of it. And it hasnt returned since.
So what do you think the angel meant by your not being
allowed to see your further purpose because of the possibility of
misusing it? Nick had shelved this question away ever since
hearing that part of the story. He was determined not to forget it.
Gary paused a while before answering. I believe it has to do
with the information we are bringing to the world now. I believe we
are to prepare the world for the beginning of the coming together of
Heaven and Earth. For us to be able to be credible with others in this
regard, we must be true to who we are, true to our hearts, and
truthful in all we say. In this we cannot be afraid.
(
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 91
6
(
A BAND OF SEEKERS
W hen Larry Marcy walks into a room, it brightens no

matter how deep the darkness. How often has any of us
asked why terrible things happen to good people? If you were to ask
Larry about the terrible things that befell him, he would only look at
you with a quizzical grin and ask back, What terrible things? I am
so blessed. Most would have thought otherwise.
In our hi-tech age of instant wonder and scientific marvel, we
tend to look to individuals of great talent, leadership, or power, to
act on our behalf. We elect presidents who we think can speak to the
world, yet we find behind the political facade mere men with human
flaw. And we become disillusioned, even cynical. Perhaps the reason
for this is our lack of recognition of our own circles of goodness,
fortitude, and marvel. And perhaps it is through people like Larry
that we discover the simple wonder and joy of being ourselves.
It is too tempting to look toward the highly gifted healer or the
charismatic leader to show us our intended paths. Oftentimes, with
angels in tow, it is far better for us to stumble along, feeling for our
path in the shadows of our own doubts and fears. For then we own
our self-discovery, we trust our own way. Larry was about to find
91
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 92
out that he was not alone on his journey, that there were others who
would reach out to him, assure him he was, indeed, a light among
lightworkers.
Brian first met Larry at one of the symposiums that Nick had
presented. His inspiration from the event spilled over in his
enthusiasm to Brian. Just tell me whatever I can do to help. Im
willing to fold papers or clean trash cans. Whatever. The offer
opened Brians heart to the way Larry saw so much genuine
goodness in the ideals of the Great Tomorrow. Any modern
company would envy Larrys people skills, yet he was willing to
perform the least flattering task simply to help out. Larrys generous
heart, his affability, his capacity to include all around him in
conversation and enthusiasm captivated Brian.
Youve gotta meet this guy, Brian had told Gary later. Little did
Gary know the Divine Plan that would bring them together.
Over the Internet, and later in person, Larry had become close
friends with a woman known on the Net as Angel Scribe. Anyone and
everyone who had anything to do with angels knew Mary Ellens
reputation for being the Queen of E-mail. Whenever she signed her
name, it was with a :) (smiley face) afterwards. She was either the
grown-up version of Peter Pan or the embodiment of Pollyanna. Like
Larry, she tended to see the best in everyone. But unlike any Pollyanna
figure, she possessed the moxie of an Amazon. In other words, Mary
Ellen could sell doorknobs at a teepee. Hers was the gift of gab, but
God had balanced that out with a heart of gold.
Mary Ellen touched the entire world from the confines of her Gig
Harbor, Washington, living room. Her computer hummed and
buzzed from morning to the wee hours of night. For she had the
innate calling and constancy of enthusiasm to send angel stories to an
entire world day after day. The mailing list she had generated from
her connects, most corporations would die to have. Silver-haired
grandmas in Sun City, Arizona, as well as teenagers in the Bronx read
Mary Ellens angel stories about wanting to create a better world for
our generation. Famous authors, promoters, and lecturers secretly
resided on Mary Ellens mailing list. So did ministers and celebrities.
But most importantly, ordinary people read her angel newsletters
regularly. And one of those people was Larry Marcy.
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 93
a band of seekers 93
One day, unannounced, Gary received an e-mail from Angel

Scribe. Little did he know that her ebullient letter would bring a
light into his world that would shine into the most unexpected of
places. Like Larry, this Angel Scribe had read The Messengers and
was promoting it around the world through her angel newsletters.
She wanted to thank the authors, and she wanted to help out. At
first, Gary responded in his typical fashion, thanking her, letting her
know that many had responded in the same way, and that the staff
at the Great Tomorrow was in the process of organizing ways in
which to channel peoples offers of help. But Mary Ellen would not
let it rest. The experience of having been awakened at 4:44 a.m. the
day after reading the book filled her with an enthusiasm that would
not be denied. She sent a stream of e-mails insisting that her contacts
could help the authors in promoting the books in the Pacific
Northwest. It didnt take long for Gary to realize she should be taken
at her word. And so a warm friendship and mutual respect
blossomed as Mary Ellen buttonholed book-signing engagements
for him and Julia Ingram as co-authors of The Messengers.
Mary Ellens contacts amazed Gary. Not only did she introduce
him to radio talk-show personalities, but also to bookstore people
who believed in more than selling books. One such bookstore,
Crystal Voyage, nestled in a renovated warehouse in North Tacoma
that had been turned into a funky kind of mall. Gary thought
Tacoma a strange city, despite its being his birthplace. Originally, it
had been known mostly for its air pollution, branded by the entire
state of Washington with the tag line the aroma of Tacoma. But
now, it had transformed into an emerging jewel since voters had
decided to close down the smelters. The beauty of the Tacoma Dome
stood majestically where once the heart of the stink had pumped.
And as a further symbol of this new blood, stood a warehouse-
turned-mall, named The Freighthouse Square.
Inside the all-wood mall, a smallish bookstore hugged against
the planked wall with steel frames towering about the open ceiling.
Most of the stores were merely partitioned sections, zigzagging back
and forth through the length of the long, narrow freighthouse. As
Gary stood staring at the store display of his book in the front
window, Mary Ellen swooshed in, handing him information about
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 94
his future schedules, books to sign for other promotions, and telling
him about the old lady she had run into who had caused her to be
late. It was another patented Mary Ellen angel story. This time the
anecdote involved a senior citizen who had been caught in the rain,
having had trouble crossing a street, handling packages and
maintaining her balance, trying to keep her bounty dry. Mary Ellen
had stopped to give her a hand across the street, and ended up
taking her home.
You will never guess what she said to me, the Angel Scribe
gasped, taking just barely enough time to get her breath. She said
that she had prayed for her angel to help her out, because she had so
far to walk. She had asked her guardian angel to bring the bus by,
and then I showed up. After I took her home, she insisted I have a
cup of tea. And of course I couldnt say no. Mary Ellens sentences
seemed to have no periods at the end of them. She told me about
her prayer, and how I showed up. She said to me, My dear, you are
my angel. Now isnt that just wonderful? And before a word of
answer could be offered back, Oh my, will you look at that. Isnt
that a great display the store has created for your book?
Well, theyre not selling like hotcakes. I already signed what
they had.
And before Gary could duck for cover, Mary Ellen whispered,
Watch this. With a voice that certainly must have shaken the
warehouse skylights, she pointed to the book and pronounced,
Wow, you know, Ive heard that this book, The Messengers, is a great
book and an incredible read. All my friends have suggested that I
buy it. What do you think? Every head within thirty feet turned,
including Garys. Only he was trying to hide his blushing. This was
so Mary Ellen, he thought. She was simply shameless. On the one
hand Gary completely admired her ability to have no fear or
embarrassment; on the other hand, he wanted to be in the next state,
and correspond with her from this day forward only via the safety
of e-mail.
It didnt take long afterwards before new e-mail arrived from
Mary Ellen. I think it is time you meet Atira, she insisted. I think
she is the most gifted psychic in the state, maybe the West. She
would be upset for me calling her a psychic. She says that she is a
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 95
mystic. Like your Sara in The Messengers, Atira has the capacity to
speak with the angels. And her angels are starting to tell her things
about you and Nick. Perhaps you would like to give her a call
the phone number trailing after the message.
As best friends, Atira and Mary Ellen competed as to which
person visited the other the most between Gig Harbor and Seattle.
Atira was a noticeable woman, her blond hair contrasting with her
hallmark turquoise, large-rimmed glasses. Her talents many, she
often traveled as a wholesaler through the Middle East or designed
works for Universal Studios. She simply loved to walk in beauty,
whether that beauty hung on a wall or dwelt in a heart, it made no
difference to her. Hers is a heart of wisdom and kindness equal to the
gift with which she has been blessed: her capacity to see and talk
with angels. She uses her gift the same way Mary Ellen uses her
communication skills to talk to the world: both are bearers of light
into peoples gray days. Both give beyond their means to others, and
both love the comfort and truth of the angelic realm. They are a
natural pair. The great contrast between these two women lies in
their personalities. Mary Ellen can voice her thoughts to passing
strangers, if she felt it would enrich their lives, while timid Atira
carefully chooses when and with whom to speak.
Gary kept putting off a phone call to Atira, with more than
enough filling his days helping to establish the Great Tomorrow,
which inundated Brian and Nick as well. The new publisher fussed
about planning a book tour, and Brian was the primary contact. Both
Gary and Brian spent an increasing amount of time on the phone
discussing concepts, strategies, and stories with one another. It was
as if they needed to check in with one another just to stay grounded.
Working with Nick was like rafting down one of Oregons wild
rivers. You hang on for all youre worth wanting to scream, Stop,
stop, let me off, and at the same time laughing like a kid on a joy
ride, astounded by all the excitement around you, yelling Dont
stop, dont stop.
And so it was that Nick, Brian and Gary would find themselves
on adventures in meeting extraordinary people. But perhaps more
important was their continual discovering the extraordinariness in
ordinary people. For the Mary Ellens and the Larrys are to be found
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 96
across the globe. We have only to acknowledge them, choose to

notice them. In American society it is too easy to focus on the
hurricanes of the awesome and miraculous when we are truly in
need of summer breezes that call us to our resting places where we
smell the flowers, look at our own reflections on quiet streams, and
know that God is to be found in the stillness.
Having witnessed Saras gift of being able to converse with the
heavenly realm, Gary was a bit suspicious that Atira might be another
wild ride down an uncharted river. Certainly it could be fun, with
new other-world scenery to behold. But it could also be another mind-
blowing experience for which he just wasnt ready. His shyness and
her timidity kept them from meeting, or even calling one another.
Expecting Mary Ellen to settle for this was like expecting a pregnant
mother to be content with delaying birth after the ninth month.
At one of Nicks speaking engagements, Atira accidentally
bumped into Brian and Gary. Mary Ellen feigned complete surprise
at the coincidental rendezvous in her most angelic way. Wasnt it
nice that everyone was here? she had said coyly. And with
exaggerated aplomb, she found an excuse to leave her best friend
with her favorite author and his favorite friend. To Mary Ellen, this
needed to happen. Simple. So make it happen. For a woman in her
forties, she had more push than Sherman tank, to the point of
repeatedly embarrassing her teenage daughter.
Hello Sweet Spirit, Atira opened, shaking Garys hand. I
truly am glad to meet you. And you, as well, Brian. Did you guys see
what happened toward the end of Nicks talk?
You mean the emotions and the energy in the air? Brian offered.
Oh, no, Atira said with the kind of voice that wants to say You
poor boy, you mean you missed it? It was one of the most incredible
angelic scenes Ive witnessed in a long time. All of a sudden she
had Garys attention. Oh, I hope I wasnt the only one that saw all
those angels. Ive never seen so many in one place. There were these
magnificent creatures of light behind almost everyone in the
symposium when Nick was giving his blessing, his healing of the
spirit.
Nothing surprises me anymore, Brian smiled with the kind of
smile one normally sees after church. What did they look like.
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 97
Oh my gawd, they were so tall. Ive not seen these kinds of

angels before. Im telling you this was some kind of special event.
Angels are coming out of the woodwork. A kind of giggle
punctuated her sentence. What a lovely, innocent creature, Gary
thought, but I need to go fold my socks. She then turned to him as if
knowing what he was thinking of her. And I think Mary Ellen
wants me to tell you about how your angels have been waking me
up at 4:44 in the morning, she said to Gary.
No wonder Mary Ellen was playing spiritual Yenta, thought Gary. It
was beginning to make sense now. Really? he murmured, stealing
a glance in Brians direction. Brians eyes twinkled, wondering if the
Mad Dog in Gary was going to come out.
Yes, they have several things they want me to tell you, but most
of it needs to be in private. I hope that is OK.
Brian patted his friend on the back with a Go for it, big fella. I
think I need to rescue Nick from the crowd. He wasnt even
supposed to be out here after the talk.
Atira proceeded in telling Gary about the fate of The Messengers,
as well as events coming in his direction. But most teasing of all was
a warning about his driving. His angels were telling him to slow
down. Gawd, even the angels are complaining about my driving, he
mused to himself. On the highway, Gary truly became Mad Dog. His
reputation as a driver was notorious.
You need to be careful in the next two weeks. For there will be
a car that will crash into you from the right side if you arent.
That got Garys attention. He actually drove the speed limit for
the following week. But one night, while in a state of distraction, he
entreated his friend, Jesse, to watch out for cars as he was driving,
relaying to his friend Atiras warning. And not twenty minutes later,
Jesse screamed for him to hit the brakes, barely missing an oncoming
car ... speeding in from the right side. If Jesse hadnt kept an eye
peeled, the Volvo the Sherman tanks of the highway would
have certainly hit Garys car squarely. Atira and Gary became close
friends after that.
As their two lives weaved together with each passing message
over the Internet, Gary began to realize Atiras true ability. His
growing admiration of her didnt stem from the fact that she could
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 98
talk to angels, it was how clear her messages were. Like anyone else
interacting with the spiritual world, she was not 100 percent accurate
in all she had to say. That is to be expected when dimensions are
crossed over or free will is engaged. What is understood in the world
of angels is not necessarily understandable in our world. As Scripture
warns us, My ways are not your ways. And so it is. What also must
be recognized is what weather forecasters call chaos theory. As a
weather front passes from one coast to the next, the breeze from the
wing of a butterfly on the West Coast has the capacity of changing the
weather pattern by the time the front reaches the East Coast. Similar
affects are engendered with human free will as events come and go.
But in spite of the random affect of free will, Atiras capacity to help
people remained remarkable. One of her e-mail messages that
particularly tickled Gary talked about how his angels had woken her
up again at 4:44 a.m. Cant you learn to talk to your own angels? she
had asked rhetorically. I need my beauty sleep. And then she would
proceed to pass on more information that left him scratching his head.
How does she do that? he would ask himself.
A surprise message arrived at Garys computer one night.
Sweet Spirit, it started in the usual way, Spirit tells me there is
someone you are to meet. His name is Dan McMahan. He gave me
permission to tell you about him. She went on to tell of events that
were approaching in which several people that Gary would meet
would all contribute to the bringing forth of healing knowledge. But
it was Dan McMahan that he had to meet now, she insisted.
And just who is Dan McMahan? How do I even meet this guy?
Gary queried, wondering why there were all these people he had to
meet of late.
The e-mail zipped by on a daily basis. In fact, Gary was
beginning to wonder whether he wrote more e-mail than he did
stories. She replied, Hes a very specially gifted man who can lay
hands on people and help them in their healing process. Hes read
your book and is completely supportive of the messages within. He
also feels called to help in whatever way possible in bringing forth
the spiritual healing centers you mentioned in the book.
It had to be more than coincidence that these healers were
appearing like, well, angels. These were not people who thought
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 99
that alternative therapy was to replace modern medicine. They

simply realized that even modern medicine had limits. People need
more than diagnostics and prescriptions at times. We are more than
just our bodies. Our emotions, our spirit, and our thoughts govern
much of what happens to us. Any bright heart surgeon or respected
oncologist knows that a patient with a healthy attitude has a much
better chance of survival than a patient with an unhealthy attitude.
A few hospitals in the country were even allowing Reiki workers
into the operating room to support patients undergoing critical
surgery. And now, medical research has proven that patients who
are being prayed for have better survival rates than those who dont.
Even patients who didnt know they were being prayed for do better
than those who were simply left to the limits of medicine as we
know it today. Atira and Mary Ellen had even set up such a prayer
team, which connected over the Internet.1 Gary was also aware that
Nick was working with others in planning a center for healing of the
spirit. The entire notion of watching all this unfold filled Gary with
hope, and at other times with puzzling questions.
And one question that would puzzle him the most came in the
form of a phone call from Atira. It wasnt a matter of this being a
friendship of convenience for Gary, it was truly a friendship based
on mutual respect. And out of that respect, Atira called to ask
something of Gary he didnt know he possessed.
Sweet Spirit, her voice sounding troubled over the phone, I
have a wonderful friend who is in need of help. I call him SpiritLife;
thats his online name. His real name is Larry Marcy. I got a phone
call that Larry is in the hospital. Ive found out that he has suffered
a brain hemorrhage. While helping a friend move, Larry had felt
something go pop in his head. Apparently he knew he had hurt
himself. As he sat down to explain it to his friend, she couldnt
understand a word he was saying. His words were coming out all
gibberish.
She had exhorted him, Larry, I cant understand what youre
saying. I want you to get yourself to a hospital immediately.
Sweet Spirit, Atira choked, Ive found out that its serious.
Please, will you pray for him? Hes is the most dear, sweet, person.
1 http://angelscribe.com/prayteam.html
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 100
Id be devastated if he left us. Please, would you pray to your angels

to help him? Do whatever you can do, even if you dont know youre
doing it, to send healing energy his way.
OK, Atira, Ill do what I can. Are you going to be all right?
Oh, yes, Im fine, Sweet Spirit. Im just concerned about
SpiritLife. He is such a dear friend. Im going down to Portland in
the morning with Mary Ellen to be with him, to pray for him.
Can you tell me where he is located?
Hes in a Portland hospital on the eastside of town. Thats all I
know. Ive got the hospital phone number if that will help.
It was no secret that Mary Ellen and Atira had put together what
is called a prayer line for just such occasions. Gary surmised that
everyone on Atiras prayer line was being called this night. After he
hung up the phone, Gary turned off his computer, bowed his head
and prayed for this man he had never met, but seemed a part of his
life by all he had heard from others. He prayed for this stranger
whom his friend loved so dearly. Because of all that was happening
around them, Nick, and Brian, Gary had learned to expect miracles.
The next day Brian called Gary on the phone to talk about the
marketing of the book. Gary decided to ask Brian if he had heard
about Larrys condition. He had not.
Gary, have you met this guy?
Actually, I havent. Ive heard a lot of good things about him.
He is something else, Brian continued. Nick and I both have
met him a couple of times. He has a heart as big as Mount Hood. Ive
got to go check on ol Lar at the hospital. After calling the hospital,
Brian told everyone on staff at the Great Tomorrow that Larry was in
trouble. Hold him in your prayers. And off Brian went to visit the
man of a thousand hearts.
Brian tried to be cheery as he stood next to Larrys bed. Lar, ol
buddy, how ya doing?
Larry, looking gray as a fence post, offered the answer one
would expect from one such as he. Oh, hi, Brian. I am so blessed.
The people here are so wonderful. Atira and Mary Ellen were here
earlier. Im so lucky to know people like you. Life is so good. Brian
winced at the slur in his speech and the slowness of the words. There
had obviously been some brain trauma. Brian sat himself down and
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 101
took Larrys hand in his. The clamminess betrayed the truth of the
tough night Larry must have gone through. Brian teased him a bit,
knowing how Larry would turn the tease into positive counterplay.
Brian loved to witness this magic in his friend. And as if on cue,
Larry turned his focus to the old guy in the bed next to his, trying to
emotionally take care of the old buzzard, cheer him up. The old guy
responded right away, asking if Larry could adjust the TV set for
him. Brian forced Larry back to his pillow, then helped adjust the
angle of the TV. Leave it to Larry to think of others when he, himself,
needed even more care.
As Brian returned to his chair, the doctor entered the room with
charts in hand. Larry, he said pausing, I dont know what to tell
you. I dont have any explanation for being able to visit with you this
morning; theres no way you should be here, actually talking with me.
You mean I might have missed dinner last night?
Brian snorted a laugh that said I cant believe this guy. He should be
dead, and here he is cracking jokes with the physician.
You mighta missed more than dinner, Larry the doctor said in
an almost soft voice. His eyes reflected the amazement he held for
his patient. Not only should you not be here right now, but I have
absolutely no explanation for the fact that you can talk. I want to do
some more tests and have you come back so we can put together a
therapy program for you, as well as make suggestions as to how we
can prevent this from happening again.
Brian thought to himself, The power of prayer rules again. After
listening to the list of instructions the doctor gave Larry, Brian
listened and then offered to help Larry any way he could. Shortly
after, Nick called on the phone checking in to see how Larry was
doing. Everyone who knew Larry offered help. Was there anything
they could do? Of course, Larrys only wish was to get out of the
hospital. And since the doctor could give no compelling reason for
him to stay, Larry walked out of the hospital that day. The doctor
wasnt the only one shaking his head in wonder.
After returning to the office, Brian relayed the story back to Gary.
This is simply amazing. Youve got to meet this guy. Brian echoed
what was becoming a repeating message. Gary decided maybe it was
time to meet this Larry character. There was some magical trait in
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 102
Brian that constantly connected him with remarkable people.

Perhaps Brians heart, also, was as big as Mount Hood. There was no
one who met Brian who did not sense his love, his peace, and his
genuine concern for all around him. There was no denying that
Brian walked with the angels. And if he insisted that his friend
should meet Larry, then it simply must happen.
Upon their return, Atira and Mary Ellen burbled with delight
over Larrys miraculous survival. Thank-yous were sent out to all on
Atiras prayer chain. Mary Ellen relayed the event around the world
through her angel newsletter, telling what their prayers had
accomplished. What an age we are in, she thought, When else could you
ask people from around the world to pray for a single human being at a
moments notice?
A week later, at Atiras insistence, Gary had arranged to meet
with Dan McMahan in the Portland area. A mutual friend, author Joe
Irgovich, would be in town, and all sought out each others company.
Mary Ellen had sponsored Irgovich in the Seattle area promoting his
author tour, helping out as she had for Julia Ingram and Gary. Upon
hearing that Joe was flying up for a talk at the Living Enrichment
Center near Portland, Mary Ellen called Atira and another friend,
Corey, who also knew of, and wanted to meet, Joe Irgovich. Before
they knew it, a crew of six people were headed toward Portland on
the same day. Dan would rendezvous with the rest at the Center.
Gary then called Larry Marcy from Seattle to ask if Larry was
well enough to receive visitors, since Gary soon would be heading to
Portland. Upon hearing that several mutual friends also were
traveling to Portland to meet with Joe Irgovich, Larry decided to
impose, for he knew of Joes story. Polite and complimentary as
always, Larry chirped over the phone, Gary, I am so happy to get a
call from you. It would be wonderful to see you. Ive heard so much
about you. Ive also heard so much about Joe from Mary Ellen;
would it be possible for me go with you folks to the Living
Enrichment Center for the book signing?
Was this a good idea? Gee, Larry, are you well enough to drive?
No, but my mother is here with me, and she needs to get back
home. It would be easy to have her drop me off and rendezvous with
you wonderful people, if someone could bring me home afterwards.
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 103
Lets see now, Gary thought, youve just had a death-defying

experience, just left the hospital. Your mother is there to help you take care
of yourself, and you want to go galavanting all over tarnation? Gary
arranged to meet Larry at the Crown Plaza, next to the freeway, in
Lake Oswego. So, not only would Larry receive visitors, he would
also be counted among the visiting.
A bright sun warmed Atira, Mary Ellen, Corey, and Gary as they
reposed on the lawn outside the hotel. They figured Larry would be
able to spot Mary Ellen from the car upon his arrival. Her rich, flowing
hair and her typical springlike colors made her a walking vista. The
grayish-white streaks highlighting her mane, her conditioned body,
and her flowing dresses, all contributed toward giving her the
appearance of those she most admired the angels. The grass smelled
freshly mown, the shade of the trees soothing, as conversation drifted
around Larry and all hed been through. Corey had not met Larry, and
listened attentively to all that had transpired over the last month.
You know, Sweet Spirit, Im a little concerned, Atira mentioned.
Why? Whats going on? Gary knew his friend well enough by
now to know the angels had said something to her. Atiras ability to
hear angels rattled even the most skeptical.
Well, Larry had an appointment this morning with the
neurosurgeon. And I am hearing that he is going to have to have
major brain surgery. Hes been through so much already. My guides
are telling me that he may elect not to have the surgery, that he may
decide it is not worth the agony. He has had such a good life that he
knows he can pass over without regret. I feel he has so much more
he can do on this side.
There was a stillness in the group as a swallow darted silently
overhead. Gary pulled at blades of grass and lifted them to his nose
to smell their aroma. Well, maybe we might have something to say
about that. His eyes looked off into the distance, as if spying on the
statue of the Angel Moroni standing atop the Mormon Temple across
the highway. Atira stared at him, saying nothing. She reached over
and patted him on the shoulder. She knew what he meant.
Hey you guys, Mary Ellen interrupted, Larry should have
been here by now. Do you think someone should go looking for him?
Maybe hes in the hotel lobby.
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 104
Youd think he would have seen us here on the lawn, Corey

offered, shading his eyes from the afternoon sun. Nothing was
stirring that might hint at a visiting car. Corey didnt want to be late
for his meeting with Joe Irgovich. Like Irgovich, Corey had been
awakened one night by a bright light surrounding a human figure.
It had called out his name. As he bolted upright in bed, the figure
had faded from view. Ever since that night, he obsessed over what
the appearance had meant. Perhaps Irgovich might offer some
assistance since he had gone through the same kind of experience.
Mary Ellen, why dont you go check, Atira suggested. We can
watch for him from here. And off the earth angel glided, her hair
and dress fluttering behind her.
Theres something about Dan you should know, hinted Atira.
Gary turned his head to her, thinking, What now? She was always
surprising him. Dan has a special gift, as you know, she continued.
He asked me to do a reading for him a while ago. And his angels
told me that he had the hands of the Master. Do you know what that
means?
I can guess, Gary answered. Coreys ears stuck out like a
horses, listening for the arrival of an oat bag. Apparently, this
gathering of new friends held more than eyes could behold. Perhaps
he wasnt the only one here on a quest for understanding the weird.
His angels told me that he doesnt fully know or understand his
gift, yet, but that he can call upon ... She decided to just say it, That
he has the hands of the Master when he works on people; he can help
them heal. He doesnt even have to be in the same room to do it, or
even the same state. It will take him time to fully comprehend this.
Have you told him?
Yes. He was embarrassed at my mentioning it to him.
And you called him the night Larry almost died? Asking for his
help?
Course, she said, meaning Do you think Im stupid? I called
everyone I could think of. It was a group effort.
A few minutes later, Mary Ellen returned with Larry in tow. He
held fast to her arm as he shuffled along beside her. Gary could tell
that his steps were short and deliberate, caused most likely from the
brain trauma. His appearance was that of part Eastern wise man,
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 105
part Native American shaman. His hair, neatly tied into a long, dark-
brown pony tail, framed eyes that could melt icebergs. He was as
Gary had imagined: Larry walked in the presence of love.
Introductions were made, and as Gary crushed the marigold shirt of
his new friend with a hug, he could feel the tremors rippling across
Larrys torso. Just sensing the twitching muscles filled Gary with
empathy for what this marvelous man must be enduring. Larry, its
so good to have you here.
A great smile beamed across Larrys gentle face. I am the lucky
one, he almost sang. Even in his struggle with speech, Larry
seemed to make the words sound like carefully constructed poetry
rather than halted speech patterns. It was as if this man was
incapable of anything negative. Life is so rich, he crooned, What
an honor to be with such wonderful people. I am so happy!
Gary had to turn his head so as not to show the emotion flooding
him. His heart ached for Larrys troubles. And his mind reeled at how
this man could possibly stand there and convince the rest of them
that he was, indeed, lucky one week removed from a brain
hemorrhage that had almost killed him, leaving his body and his
mind traumatized, yet finding life to be so rich. If he had not seen the
man in person, he would have thought him surely to be a cartoon.
Unable to speak, from the rock in his throat, Gary glanced over to
Corey, whose mouth was hanging open, apparently with delight at
seeing such rare people. He was basking in the light of these amazing
souls. Though he had shaded his eyes from the suns brightness, this
other kind of brightness he could not and did not want to shade.
What planet did these people come from? he asked himself.
How did your session with the doctor go? Atira asked with a
twinge.
Oh, hes a really nice guy, but he wants to cut my head open.
Basically, he wants to rearrange the blood vessels on both sides of
my head. It could eliminate the source of the blood-vessel problems.
Or not. His hesitation betrayed the seriousness of what could
happen. So, I do have options, he concluded, his eyes looking back
into the concern of those around him.
Atira owned up, Im afraid I knew they were going to want to
operate. You know we will be with you through all of this.
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 106
Emotions rose up in Larrys face. Thanks. That means a lot to

me. I need to get a second opinion on all this. There was no more to
be said. Larry was here for some fun, so let the fun begin.
As the crew piled into cars to head down to Living Enrichment
Center, conversation focused on meeting Joe as well as Dan. While
Larry sat next to Corey, Coreys professional eye caught telltale signs
of Larry holding significant pain. Are you doing OK? Corey asked
in his caring way.
Actually, Im having some real painful back problems. I think it
was from lying so awkwardly in the hospital bed.
How about I work on you when we get to LEC? Im a doctor of
Chiropractic. I believe I can fix you up, if we can find a table or a
good place for you to lie down.
That would be great, Larry purled, a brightness glowing on
his face. Im so lucky, he began again, after a pause of thoughts.
So lucky.
The Living Enrichment Center nestled itself in farmland south of
Portland, standing like a concrete Haystack Rock among a sea of
fields. Simply put, the complex of buildings was huge. No wonder
the place had the reputation for having the largest Sunday gathering
of worshipers in the Northwest. As agreed, the gang of well-wishers
waited at the front entrance for Joe and Dan while Corey went inside
to see if a spare room could be found for working on Larry. Dans
arrival erupted into a family reunion. The hugs and gleeful words
carried the evidence of common goodness and joy these people had
for one another and those around them.
Corey emerged from the building with news of finding an empty
room. As the gaggle of friends waddled down one of the grand
staircases into the Garden Room, Atira began softly weeping.
Whats the matter, Atira? Gary whispered his right arm trying to
comfort her. The building carried a kind of architectural sacredness to
it, teasing him with the feeling he was in church, when in reality this
part of the main building looked more like the entrance of a large
bank building fashioned of formed concrete. Their voices echoed
from canyon walls, especially since all the conference attendees were
presently in classes. The bookstore appeared less a store and more an
island in the cavernous midsection of the main building. The only
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 107
way to know there existed a bookstore and not a library alcove was
to observe the sales people and the book-signing area.
Sweet Spirit, if only you could see what Im seeing. The light
coming off all you people is magnificent. Ive never seen anything
this beautiful before. Its like fireworks on the Fourth of July ... only
indoors. Gary gave her a gentle hug as they entered the Garden
Room. They immediately understood where the name had derived.
A wall of glass opened to a walk-around garden of trees, shrubs, Zen
fountains and statuary. With its overstuffed sofas and brightly
patterned chairs, the furniture in the room gave one the feeling of
being at home. Corey had already started working on Larry. Atiras
weeping moved into awe as she gazed around the room at the
fireworks. After she and Gary planted themselves next to Dan on
a sofa, Dan leaned over to Atira and whispered, My gawd, what
great energy. Gary felt left out of the light show. All eyes focused on
Larry who was now replacing Atira in the weeping department.
Life is sooooo rich, his words straining to escape his throat. I
cant believe Im with you people. Corey grabbed Larrys right hip
and shoulder and with a snap that all could hear relieved Larry of
his back pains. A gasp of half-groan and half-ecstacy rumbled from
Larrys throat. That feels soooo good, he stage whispered, causing
more tears to jettison from Atiras eyes.
Mary Ellen leaned over to Atira and murmured, Am I crazy? I
smell sandalwood.
No, dear, youre not crazy, Atira choked out, hands covering
her face, Thats a sign that healing masters are present in spirit.
After composing herself, she leaned over to Dan, I think you and
Corey should work together on Larry. Taking Atiras cue, Dan and
Corey moved Larry to a more accessible position, while the roomful
of people joined together in sending Larry all the love they could
muster from their hearts. One didnt need to be able to see invisible
fireworks to feel the rapport swirling in the air. All were deeply
moved in their desire for this treasured creature to be well. Larry lost
complete control of his emotions. His convulsive sobbing only added
to the bonding effect of the moment. Corey and Dan started sweating.
Profusely. One would have thought the two men were working in a
steam room instead of the Garden Room. Heat could be felt in the air
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 108
itself, affecting everyone. Mary Ellens eyes goggled. Gary reddened,

but this time not from blushing. The formation of people around the
sobbing Larry remained statuesque as if courtyard candidates for the
garden. No one breathed, no one said a word.
Five minutes passed when Dan took a deep breath. There, was
all he said, his signal that the hands of the Master had left him.
Somehow, he knew, on this unexpected occasion, he had not been
the only one to feel these hands. It showed on the faces of
everyone there. Larry continued softly sobbing for several more
minutes, interrupting his weeping with intermittent variations on, I
am so blessed. Life is just wonderful. His hands wiped his eyes as
emotional gratitude poured out. Life is sooooo rich. Thank you.
Thank you.
As quiet as a prayer stood Joe Irgovich witnessing all of this. He
wouldnt have missed this scene for all the avocados in California.
Not much was said for a while, until Mary Ellen broke the silence.
Hey, everyone, Joes here. After Larry regained his composure, the
room became a festive reception area instead of a hiding place for
amateur healers. Joe became the recipient of hugs and chatter, well
wishes and how-are-yous. The afternoon wore on as the Garden
Room became less and less private. Classes were out. Joe would
have to return to the room in which he was giving his lecture. It was
time for good-byes.
As the visitors got ready to pile into their cars, Corey invited
everyone to drop by his mothers house for Chinese dinner. Coreys
mom was a speech therapist who had volunteered to work with
Larry while he recovered from his mishap. No one really wanted to
leave the others. Larry spoke for everyone, I think it would be
perfect for all of us to have dinner together.
Gary noticed immediately that the slur was gone from Larrys
speech. He wanted to talk to him more to see if it was his
imagination. Im sorry, gang, Ive got to give a talk to the Oregon
Writers Colony right after this. I wont be able to make it, Gary said.
Should he say anything to the rest about his observation?
Larry asked, Whose car should I go in? and Dan volunteered.
As Larry walked down to where Dan had parked, it was obvious to
Gary that Larrys shuffle also was gone. He was walking normally.
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 109
Why wasnt anyone else noticing? He wanted to run over and give
Larry a hug to see if he still had his tremors. But all he could do was
stand there with goose bumps camping out across his body. Maybe
it was just his imagination. Let it go, he thought. Wishful thinking.
Before he could say anything more, doors slammed, and cars full of
hungry passengers set out in wagon-train style, destined for the
Chinese feast.
Introductions were made and dinner ordered. Coreys
grandmother and mother were delighted to have a houseful. All had
been overwhelmed with the events of the day. Mary Ellen kept
looking Larrys way every time he spoke, noticing the growing ease
in his speech. With each sentence his words sounded increasingly
normal, the delivery of his speech flowing at a normal rate. Unable
to contain herself any longer she blurted out, Does anyone else
notice the difference in Larrys speech?
Well, I thought it might be just my own high hopes, said
Corey, but Ive noticed it, too, Mary Ellen.
Coreys mom joined in. I can verify that it is obviously better,
she said with the authority of a speech therapist, much better than
last time we talked. Larry, what has happened? Had she not, one
week earlier, determined he could work with her in speech therapy?
What had happened, indeed?
It is the love of these wonderful people, Larry confessed.
They have supported me since this all began. I am so blessed to
know them, so blessed. What have I done to deserve you people?
The house fell silent as six sets of eyes searched other searching eyes.
The entire group then started to talk all at once, how they had
noticed the improvement and been too shy to mention it.
Dinner arrived, the table was spread, and everyone gathered
round. Stabbing at the selections with chopsticks, the tableful of
visitors could speak of nothing else but the wonderful meeting and
seeing Joe Irgovich at LEC. Coreys mother and grandmother felt
like they had adopted a new family. Where had Corey managed to
find such a group of people? For the next few hours all talked on
how Spirit had provided the miracle of their coming together,
working with one another, how precise the Divine timing had been
at every step of Larrys incredible journey.
Days.Ch6 2/12/03 12:01 PM Page 110
Only Larry could put the moment in true perspective. You

know, its amazing what can happen when people come together.
Life is so rich. You just have to savor it.
All were smiles. Larry was right. Grandmother gazed over at
Corey and, with a wink, let him know she approved of his
marvelous friends. Everyone seemed to be savoring the meal as
much as Larry wanted them to savor life. No one wanted to leave the
magic of the moment, for the conversation was a witnessing of the
rapport that had overtaken all of them that day. The unconditional
love of the group, the feeling of oneness, the work of the angels that
had brought them all to a common path none wanted to leave, all
this had created a moment none would ever forget. In the months
that would follow, Larry would find that his healing path would
include brain surgery. But like these people who surrounded him
with their different gifts but common purpose, he would serve as an
example to all how we as humans can heal one another in many
ways. There is no one way to bring the fullness of life to us. Like the
many choirs of angels, we are a many-splendored people, endowed
with great capacity to foster manifold blessings upon one another.
Sometimes, we need people like Larry to remind us of that.
Over the ensuing weeks, Larry went two dangerous brain
surgeries. Vigils at the hospital had been planned, as well as the
prayer chain notified of the upcoming operations. In each case, he
amazed both friends and doctors, especially during the second
surgery. Not only had his doctor marveled over the lack of swelling
and side affects, but all who knew Larry were astounded each time
he had walked out of the hospital after only a few days of recovery.
The circle of Larrys friends could only wonder at the blessing in
their midst. Larrys continued litanies of how rich life is ... I am so
blessed ... what a great world we live in ... I am soooo lucky
continued to affect everyone around him. Many would shake their
heads with smiles on their faces. Was this guy for real? Didnt he
watch the evening news? But the five people who had bonded with
Larry at the Living Enrichment Center could never forget what he
had shown them. To a person, each admitted that they truly believed
in the coming of a greater tomorrow.
(
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 111
7
(
SHEKINAH MINISTRIES
T he pages of Nicks journal were like time capsules of events

from the past catapulting hints of our coming future. He was
meeting phenomenal people laying the groundwork for organizations,
ideas, and movements that will eventually prepare us for coming
days of need and wonder. Leaders blessed with talent were net-
working with others who see a bright light shining within the heart
of our nation. But besides those who would eventually move among
crowds, there were also those, as well, who work with the few, who
influence the fabric of life one thread at a time. One such person was
Melodie Blair, a dynamic, powerful woman with a gentle spirit,
endowed with seemingly endless energy. Initially, Nick heard about
her through letters from others. Eventually, he received a personal
letter from Melodie inviting him to pay a visit. It was a visit he
would inscribe in his angel journal, for hers was a story that left him
with his head shaking in amazement.
A lean woman with a youngish face for her forty-something
years, Melodies beauty flowed from her soul and through her eyes.
She could easily pose for a painting of Madonna and Child. With her
two sons, one twenty-one, the other fourteen, she lived in a house
111
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 112
that seconded as a childrens crisis center. Every inch of the two

stories had been put to use in helping others or teaching others how
to help one another. On this occasion the two met over lunch.
Melodie ate like a sparrow, her attention focused on Nick as he told
her his story. Then it was her turn to captivate him with her own
storytelling. Either of them would have seemed like contestants at a
liars convention. But what they spoke was the truth.
From the time she was three years old, Melodie remembered
being consumed by a purposefulness, a strong desire to help children,
numbers of children. Even as a youngster she kept seeing herself
surrounded with children. Her mother would listen as her tiny
daughter would insist she knew exactly what she was going to do
when she grew up. Throughout her childhood she remembered
always having this inner conviction, a strength in the heart, which left
her with the capacity never to sway from the path that would lead
her to a future few could survive. She needed approval from no one,
so stalwart was her sense of purpose. From the time she was little, she
remembered seeing her friends, the angelic beings, particularly
around the age of eight. Like most precocious children, oftentimes
she would share these events with her mother who feared for her
childs sanity. Her mother would walk around he young daughters
room, night after night, touching along each of the walls to illustrate
a point. No, Melodie, she would insist, theres nothing here!
Melodie would stare, wondering what Mother could be talking
about, watching the angels stand next to her as well as her Mom.
As the years passed, the child became a young woman who
finally questioned whether there really were invisible friends there.
After all, she seemed to be the only one who could see them. To cope,
she convinced herself that these beings were figments of some kind
of claustrophobia, for she did have a tendency at times to bury
herself in sheets and covers. Pressing a magic button that hid at the
head of her bed, she would pretend to flip her mattress over,
protecting her from an unbelieving world. But she never forgot her
visions. Throughout her teens, Melodie worked with children
however she could, finding particular comfort dedicating herself to
the Big Sisters program, taking on a little sister, and helping families
by caring for underprivileged children. Simply put, she adored
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 113
shekinah ministries 113
children. And this adoration expanded as she entered her

womanhood. Are we not all Gods children? she would say.
So you stopped seeing angels? Nick interrupted.
I chose to quit seeing them, she returned. But not seeing
didnt make them go away. Not seeing them made me increasingly
aware of another kind of guidance, a guidance I would later call
Spirit.
Though never taught a religion, Melodie had a strong spiritual
life. Her family simply did not talk about religion. Such topics were
not a part of her life, even though her father was an open-minded
man who talked about there being more than the here-and-now.
What she did hear and read about left her with an admiration, if not
an attraction, for Jesus. He was the one example where she could
innately feel heavens ability to come to all people. What others told
her about God simply did not register in her kind heart. How could
God be small? she would ask herself. How could God come to only one
group of people? It was a concept her childs heart could not accept.
When I was older, she confessed, I used to see light
brilliant, brilliant light. I would rub my eyes and look, and look
again. What could I have ever done as a teenager that would cause
this? Little did she know how the angelic realm was readying her
for events to come. At the age of fifteen, Melodie chose a future in
personal development, taking a course from a professional school.
Young women looking for careers in modeling or public life,
typically enrolled. Rather than just completing the course of study,
Melodie found herself literally rewriting the course. It was her first
recognition that she was meant to be a teacher. And it didnt stop
there. One day, in her early twenties, while teaching the course, she
asked herself Why are we waiting until were teens and adults to learn
abut how we carry ourselves in the world? Why not bring that to a childs
level? And she never looked back after that.
With her first son just over a six months old, an unfortunate
marriage behind her, and five dollars to her name, Melodie began her
own Montessori-like school. Her instincts were clear, and her
cleverness legendary. Because she did not possess teaching
credentials, she hired those who did, those who could train her so that
she could acquire the knowledge she desired. She wanted her
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 114
firstborn to live in a world that listened to children, nurtured the spirit

of children, letting their desires blossom into whatever field of interest
called them. The school acquired a reputation for its programs, which
employed song, dance, music training, storytelling and whatever else
was needed to empower the hungry mind of a child. Seven years
passed, and to add to all she was creating was the arrival of another
son. As with her first child she wanted to foster an environment that
would bring fullness to this little life. Children were her life.
To further her own yearnings, Melodie started taking individual
classes in herbology. She felt called to it. It was another tool that
could be used in helping her own children. Deep within herself were
planted hidden seeds that began to sprout as she became adept with
her knowledge of herbs and their healing power. It all seemed too
natural to her. Parents began to notice that their own children were
unusually healthy, compared to their neighbors children attending
public schools. Melodies growing knowledge of natural healing
methods had become a part of her everyday life, and the children
benefited. It was a big draw to my school, she confessed, along
with everything else. Parents outside of the school began seeking
her advice in how to treat their own children. Her reputation spread.
She even began assisting doctors in family practice who had heard
about her knowledge, her capacity to help children.
Her success with herbs matched her success with her school. It
was said to be the largest home facility in the state. Nothing
comparable existed at this time. She expanded her program into new
areas with another facility, this time for infants and toddlers. With
the emphasis on quality, rather than quantity, she began an out-of-
home mini-center at a time when there were not yet laws or
regulations to handle such a concept. It was at this time when she
began experiencing what she called dreams. To the rest of us they
would be called visions. In one particular reoccurring dream, she
saw how her efforts would expand into a center dedicated to helping
people grow, helping people to become whole. At this time, she had
no concept that her dreams had anything to do with Spirit. It was
later that she would fully understand that the center, itself, was to be
a ministry of ministries, based on spiritual awareness. It was later
that she would discover at the deepest level how people truly heal.
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 115
All seemed wonderful. Melodies dreams were being lived out,

her life with children fulfilling. What happened then was like an
initiation, a time of preparation before my awakening. To get to this
point, my work was my life, I really dealt little with any kind of
social concerns. I was in my school from the hours of 6 a.m. to 6 p.m.;
then I taught personal development classes from 6 p.m. until 10 p.m.
My role changed entirely in the evening hours, going from blue jeans
and sweatshirts to impeccable professional dress. I taught
professional modeling and personal development in self-esteem
courses. Melodies days were consumed with a constant outpouring
of her mothering skills. Little did she know of the kind of strength
and conviction that such dedication would bring. For with times of
glory, challenge is usually close behind. When we find ourselves at
the top of the ladder in life, all we have to do is look around, where,
not far away, is inevitably a new ladder. And what we find ourselves
staring at is an awaiting bottom rung.
Melodies mother grew ill. She was found to have an inoperable,
malignant brain tumor. Neither Melodie nor her mother knew of the
trials the forthcoming months would bring. But one thing was clear
to Melodie. She always believed parents raise you when you are
little and in need. And when they grow older and need our help,
then we are to care for them. Believing this, she took her mother into
her own home, committed to caring for her. She knew her mother
was getting ready to die. An independent, brilliant woman, the
effects of the deteriorating disease now brought great frustration,
confusion and anger. And as demands grew for more time and more
attention within the home, pressures resulted from other sources.
Clients began removing their children, thinking it would give
Melodie more time. Others felt they did not want their children so
close to death. Eventually, she had to let go of one of her schools,
selling the home that had housed it. Though many would have
found professionals to take over in such a situation, Melodie stayed
to the end, lovingly holding her mother in her arms as she took her
last breath.
But her mother was not all that died in her life. She found herself
faced with a family situation resurrected from a Gothic novel. It
wasnt so much the family drama that shook her foundations, but
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 116
the adverse affect it had on her father. This man she had known all
her life now claimed he was not, and never had been, her father. And
with the claim came legal repercussions with the family trust that
would cause Melodie to have to fight for her school and her home.
Eventually, she could not, would not, go against her own father,
disowned by him or not.
As Nick listened to her story, he could not escape the feeling of
this womans self-determination, her outright power of will. She did
not just talk about her ideals, she lived them. Hers was a story he
would have to remember, noting this meeting with her in his angel
journal. This very thought seemed to take the conversation to the
topic of angels. He watched her eyes fill with emotion as she
unfolded a part of herself few were allowed to see.
As if heaven had other plans for Melodie, events took a bizarre
turn. Doing a favor for a friend who needed help manning a display
booth at a conference, Melodie found herself among people the likes
of which she had never met. Human-growth workshops were going
on in areas surrounding the booths where reps displayed products
in Melodies case, herbal remedies. Strangers walked up to her asking
if she did readings. She wasnt sure to what they were referring. Her
exposure to the metaphysical community was nil. Seeking a place to
rest while it was her friends turn to take over at the booth, she found
refuge in a lecture area partitioned off by curtains.
The conference half perplexed and half delighted Melodie with
its strangeness as well as with its excitement. She had never been to
a conference like this before. It was unlike any of the speaking
engagements in which she had participated. A stranger, a lady from
the conference, soon joined her in her hiding place, introducing
herself. Both needed rest from standing at their respective booths.
The two became rapt in conversation. Melodie began to share the
story of what was happening in her life. As the two women delved
deeper and deeper into their shared stories, the electricity from the
conversation grew. They both became aware of an overpowering
presence. It was the same presence that Melodie had felt before. It
intensified to the point that Melodie felt she was being watched.
And as she turned her head, magnificent creatures of light appeared
before her. They announced themselves and began conversing with
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 117
her, telling her of her purpose and events in her life that were yet to
come. They told her that they were there to take her through an
initiation. Specific instructions were relayed as to what she was to do.
The presence within and around her grew so strong, It was as if I
were here and somewhere far away simultaneously. The information
was long and so involved I could not remember or retain it all. For
a woman whose life had been absorbed by the confines of classrooms
and playgrounds, this seemed too much. She looked over to her
newfound friend, who was overcome by what she had been
witnessing. Tears streamed down her face.
Melodie said back to the angels, This is way over my head. I do
not understand.
One of the angels responded in a loving voice, But you will,
and both disappeared. The two women just stared at one another.
Did you see all of that? Melodie asked her companion, hoping
her face was reflecting an affirmation.
I not only saw it, I heard it. Who are you? was the unexpected
response. You are so blessed.
What had happened was beyond logic, beyond describing,
beyond their own believability. She knew she hadnt imagined the
angels because the other lady had heard exactly what she had heard.
The question still remained: What did it all mean?
The days that followed were days of wonder. The presence, as
she now referred to it, filled her with awe, reminding her of her
favorite saying when she was a little girl: I love being here,
captivated by the color of the trees against the sky, the sound of
waves crashing against the shore, or the song in a childs voice.
How deeply she had been affected, even she didnt know.
Her peace was fractured one day, at school, by the scream of one
of the little girls. Little Jackie had fallen and split her lip while playing
in the classroom. The tyke was only a year-and-half old. Melodie
rushed to the room to find the teacher, Judi, holding the toddler in her
arms, trying to comfort her. Tears mixed with howling, her upper lip
was already swollen twice its normal size and bleeding. Melodies
thoughts raced about trying to think what to do. A part of her wanted
to take the child in her arms, another part argued, No, I cant run in
like this and take over as if I know I can do something nobody else can do.
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 118
She stood frozen in self-controversy as the presence began flowing

into her hands. While the electricity heightened with warmth, she
realized she could not ignore what was going on within herself. Judi,
knowing about the story of the angels, sensed something was
happening to Melodie. As if by instinct she lifted Jackie up, carrying
her to the doorway where Melodie was suspended. Almost
automatically, Melodie reached out with her arms as if to say, OK, Ill
try, not knowing at all what the results would be. Her heart opened
with a hope, even a knowingness as she took Jackie into her arms. The
childs face nuzzled into Melodies right hand as she supported the
toddler on her left shoulder. With the right hand covering the bleeding
lip, the sobbing quieted with Jackie cuddling up against the nice
feeling upon her face. Melodie and Judi conversed back and forth now
that the crying had subsided. The tragedy had passed. Thirty seconds
transpired before the baby turned her head around to gaze at her
comforters. The bleeding had not only stopped, but the lip was
completely healed. No split, no swelling, no bleeding. Nothing! Did
you see that? asked Melodie, her voice almost lost. The women
gawked at one another, stunned by what their eyes could not believe.
Judis answer was a calm, Yes, I saw that.
Youve got to be kidding, was Melodies reply. Little was said
of the incident. But its impact was profound for both women. Little
Jackie had changed Melodies life. The infant had taught Melodie
not only how little ones dont carry patterns of disbelief, but also
taught Melodie to expect the unexpected from that day forward. The
school became a learning place of healing for Melodie in the days
that followed.
As if to hammer the message home, another incident with one of
the children occurred on the playground. One of the girls had been
twirling around on one of the monkey bars, her knee hooked over
the bar, pretending to be an acrobat. She had spun around the bar
with increasing speed only to lose her grip and crash into the
ground, knocking her unconscious. Melodie was immediately
summoned as the teachers carried the girl into the building
unconscious. It was apparent the child had suffered a concussion,
her eyes rolled back in her head. Discussion ensued as to what to do:
Put an ice pack on? Revive her, call an ambulance, or take her to an
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 119
immediate care facility? And like before, Melodie became aware of

the presence once again upon her. A hum moved into her hands
and warmth filled her arms. The intensity of it surprised even
Melodie. Instead of arguing with herself or denying what was
happening, she simply said, Let me hold her. Something within
took command as she lifted the child up, laying her right hand on
her head. The presence intensified like never before. Within a
matter of seconds the little girls eyes rolled back to normal, now
staring up at her caretaker. With her own little hands, she grasped
Melodies hand and moved it to different areas of her head as if
directing the healing energy wherever she needed it. The room was
stone quiet. Nobody could speak.
Holding Melodies hand to her injured head, the child began
talking about the tingling she was feeling, and how she liked it. She
wanted to stay in that feeling. And so they did, child and healer,
locked in a knowingness. After a while, the child sat herself up, with
nothing apparently wrong, skipped out of the building to return to
the playground. She was fine. A while later she returned to
Melodies company. I scratched my finger. Will you hold it,
Melodie? she asked, holding the small injury up for inspection. To
this child, everything in her life was now open to healing, a
testimony to suspending disbelief.
This time of initiation the arrival of the angels, the growing
role of healing in her life, the success of her school, and her own
growing awareness had altered Melodies world beyond
comprehension. There was much I had to learn. There is a quote I
like to use: Seek to understand before you seek to be understood.
Its the reason why we are all here together. If we were to come from
a place of whole love, truly, and unconditionally to seek to
understand each other and the energy, that force which rises up in
us, that determines the Presence we carry, that which we project
we would not have the discord, the disharmony we have in the
world today. That is what healing is all about: Bones can move, split
lips can mend before our eyes. Many things, which let us know that
God is here working, can happen. But its ultimately about us
every single one of us learning to work in harmony with each
other from a place of love.
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 120
The months passed as court dates and legal matters regularly

interrupted Melodies growing love of all that was holy. She had
developed a deep and personal relationship with Jesus and with
God. Those in the realms of the heavens had become her daily
companions. Rather than spend any more time in court over who
owned her house and her school, Melodie felt it was time to leave all
that behind her. In contemplating what to do, where to go, and how
to handle what life had dealt her, the voice of Spirit told her, All
things are handled in the kingdom of God. She understood this to mean
that she didnt want anything she had to fight for against her own
kin. You dont want to expend your life investing in such unfortunateness,
she realized. These are the roots of a society obsessed with
possessions, willing even to go to war to protect them. Refusing any
longer to battle in court, Melodie let go of everything: her beloved
school, her house, her way of life. Now homeless, she felt God
calling her to come to the mountains.
With the remaining cash she had left, a tent, camping gear, and
sleeping bags were purchased. Moving into the Cascade Mountains,
on a spot next to the Skykomish River, there she lived through the
remainder of summer. Clothes were washed in the rivers waters,
meals cooked out of doors. Her oldest son stayed off-and-on with
friends while she cared for her younger son in the wilds of
Washington. Her closest friend left her, unable to tolerate her choice
of poverty. He simply could not understand what she was doing,
thinking she had gone mad. But these were times when Melodie
grew closer to Spirit than ever before. Her choice was alignment
with togetherness, rather than fighting in separateness. Her life
served as a testimony to others she would come in touch with, from
this moment on. For she feared nothing, least of all loss of
materialism.
The voices of nature called to her about the harmony of all
things. The wind in the trees whispered harmoniously with the
chattering river about the oneness of life, while Melodies heart
yearned for a world of togetherness. She gave up everything she had
because God had asked her to do it. And she responded wholly in
faith. She considered it one of the most valuable experiences of her
life. For she had overcome all adversity, chosen simplicity and
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 121
poverty as her allies. The noises in the night served only to remind
her to trust fully in God, to hear clearly the voice of Spirit. She would
not fear.
As she discerned the next move in her life, Melodie knew she
was not to plead for what she felt she needed. Instead, she was to
direct her life, searching her own strength, and through such
personal conviction, align her own purpose with Gods presence. In
other words, Melodie realized that if she was ever to tell her story
and offer the lessons of life she had learned, if she was ever to teach
again, it had to come from what she knew, and that had to come from
her own experience. What she had to offer the world was her life, not
her ideas.
I was in a sink-or-swim situation, she told Nick. I could not
believe what was happening in my life. I began asking, Why is this
happening to me? I wasnt expecting an answer from God. But I
found myself filled and surrounded with the most profound
presence. The feeling of love was like nothing I had ever known
before. I knew it was God.
This was the time of Melodies awakening. The day was August
16, 1993, and she would never forget it. She had spent forty days and
forty nights in the wilderness. Her days in the woods had brought
her ever closer to Spirit and the purpose of her own heart. It was the
voice of Spirit that spoke to her, telling her that her time in the
wilderness was over, showing her how it was time to find a home for
herself. She was told to simply place an ad in the newspaper stating
her desires and what she had just gone through. How could it be so
simple? Just put an ad in the paper? Her trust in Spirit lead her to do
exactly that. A woman answered the ad and allowed Melodie and
the boys to stay in a house. The condition was that Melodie would
pay what she could, owing as debt what she could not pay at the
time. It seemed that the goodness of others had answered Melodies
directions from Spirit.
Nick listened to all this, baffled by what he was hearing. This
was a woman of singular dedication to spiritual awakening. He
believed her words as she stated, There is nothing but trust. There
is nothing but faith. There is nothing but love. That is the true value
of that time of awakening, preparation, and completion. At
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 122
Melodies time of awakening, Spirit had told her that she would
begin a ministry which she would call Shekinah: A Ministry of
Ministries. And that is exactly what she did. In the confines of a
borrowed house, she drew together people of all talents. She would
begin a concept that would be a model for others to follow, creating
a oneness on Earth as it is in Heaven. Classes were offered in
varying fields, such as self-discovery for teens and adults, workshops
on how to care for the elderly, presentations on transcendentalism.
Spiritual groups were formed to educate people on the life of Christ,
the life of Buddha, or any other religious discipline that interested
folks. Others would come to the dwelling and stay with Melodie for
different time periods for different kinds of healing. The house
seconded as a retreat center. What had started out as shelter for her
and her sons turned into a spiritual center for the many. It was like
a multiplication of loaves and fishes, only this time it was a
multiplication of talents and people who fed the minds and hearts of
others.
Poverty was still Melodies ally during this period. She asked
nothing of anyone except what they could afford to give. And in
several cases that was nothing.
As time progressed, she was once again asked by Spirit to move
on. In this case she was directed to seek employment by finding a job
in the newspaper, something she had never done before. She was to
find work that would open her to her gift of healing. Her fingers
searched down the want ads when Spirit told her, This is the one. It
was an ad for a position as a nanny. Spirit spoke to me. Sometimes I
know things in advance, and sometimes I dont. This was one of
those times where I wasnt told in advance. I just trusted. Even
though she had never been a nanny, she knew this was where she
would go next. Over 200 applicants sought to fill the job, Melodie
being one of those asked to come in for an interview. While it took
weeks for her interview to arrive, she left the borrowed house and the
center she had created out of nothing but desire, and moved in with
a friend, Mishe by name. Melodie had helped Mishe with caring for
her mother earlier, and Mishe was now was returning that love.
Watching television was not one of Melodies habits. In fact, she
never watched it. So the interview did not prepare her for what was
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 123
to happen. Her employer was a well known television personality in

the Seattle area, who would later return to national prominence.
They were looking for more than just a nanny for their child. How
do you feel about being in a home where someone is terminally ill?
asked the lady doing the interview. And Melodie smiled knowingly
inside at Spirit.
It gives me all the more reason to be here, she responded. The
interview went far better than Melodies lack of nanny experience
might have indicated. Her work with children, her experience with
Mishes mother and her own mother made her a natural for the
position, and it was offered. She would begin immediately.
After being on the job for four days, Melodies work with the
terminally-ill mother told her that it was more than just the mothers
time to go, it was also the familys process of learning how to receive
support, give support, caregiving, and the transition of life to death.
Melodie and the dying woman hit it off right away. And on the
fourth day she said pointblank to Melodie, I know you were God-
sent to me.
Looking into her warm eyes, Melodie responded, Youre right,
I am. The relationship that followed became so strong that the
daughter said to Melodie at one point, You know, I think she really
believes that you are her daughter as well.
During the days of horrible pain, Melodie asked the older
woman, Well, do you believe in ... you know ... healing through the
hands like touch?
You mean like pressure points or something? she offered in
return.
Yeah, something like that, Melodie answered. She didnt want
to go into any further in description, a little hesitant to do anything
at all. But she knew she was here at Spirits direction to help this
woman. Would you like to try that?
Sure was the trusting response. And Melodie laid her hands
upon the woman where the pain was the greatest. The pain went
right away. The suffering woman asked her to try relieving pain in
other areas, and the pain stopped there as well. Before Melodie
finished, the silver-haired lady turned her head and stopped
Melodie. You cant disguise this, she said bluntly. This is about
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 124
God. Upon acknowledging the truth, Melodie continued working

on the ailing woman, relieving her of her chronic pain. After that, the
two developed a marvelous relationship. They conversed about
religion, ministry, the life process and all matters under the sun. It
was a time of great growth for a woman on her deathbed. It was a
relationship that Melodie would cherish forever. Like her own
mother, the old woman died in her arms.
Employment as a nanny permitted Melodie to find her own
house to live in. While she worked as a caregiver and nanny during
the day, she continued doing healing with others during the evening
at her own home. It was during these three years that she chose to
become involved with some of the most needy and vulnerable in
crisis situations, privately fostering children and families coming
from abuse, drug addiction and alcohol dependency. Word of mouth
spread, bringing more people to her door. She taught them
responsible living and wholeness in life through spiritual conviction,
creative problem-solving (placing the emphasis on the solution
rather than the problem), and child/parent interactive guidance.
Her work would become the foundation of Shekinah Ministries.
Teenagers on drugs were worked with like no one had ever worked
with them before. Not only was the addiction addressed through
laying on of hands, but so was the source of the addiction,
oftentimes a dysfunctional family. Because of her spreading
reputation, crisis intervention became a part of the ministry to such
a degree, that after her job as a nanny ended, she fully invested her
efforts in helping children in varying ways. Her only limitations
were the amount of space she had in her own home.
As she talked to Nick about her incredible lifes story, it became
apparent to Nick that Melodie represented the kind of work all of us
may be called forth to do in the future: open our own hearts, our
own homes to others. Melodie knew all that Nick represented in his
own role before the world. And she wanted to leave him with a
message to give to others. Her message was, I call you forth as God
calls you forth. And I say to you as God says to me: If you know the
vision and you know the dream, and you do not live it, who will?
It was a statement that would remain with Nick as he continued to
scribble in his journal, reading and rereading the stories of people he
Days.Ch7 2/12/03 12:02 PM Page 125
was meeting along his own journey. Melodies challenge was more
than words, her challenge was the calling forth of hope based on her
own actions, her own humanness. This is about coming out of
ourselves, she said, and joining together collectively, to create
together, as an example to people all over the world.
As Nick closed this part of his journal, he reflected on all the
different kinds of people he had met in his travels promoting The
Messengers. Like Melodie, many others were in the process of
starting centers or looking for others who might join them in
manifesting their own ideals in some kind of communal support. As
a businessman, Nick realized that the Atiras and Melodies, who
were coming forward, had exceptional talent in communicating
with the angels, with Spirit. The paths they had chosen were not
paths that many could follow. It was too easy to dismiss such
wonder as the unattainable, or even madness. The truth of the
matter is that people like Melodie need help from others. She
charged nothing for healings, relying on the donations of her clients
and admirers. As a spiritual ideal, this made sense, but as a business
reality it did not. People like Melodie often are in need of support,
and dont get it to the full extent that their ideals demand. Even as
all three, Nick included, embodied the ideal of once again bringing
Heaven and Earth together, the fact of the matter is that the angelic
realm seems far more supportive in this ideal than the earthly realm.
But certainly, that is only an illusion. For the thousands of letters that
had passed through Nicks office doors provided substantial
evidence that there were those willing and able to support these
ideals encompassed by emerging centers around the planet. There
seemed to be a need for bringing these dynamic forces together: the
willing and the able in league with the visionaries. There seemed to
be a missing link. If the Great Tomorrow did nothing more than
connect people of good will to those of integrity and gift who were
capable of creating these centers, then surely that alone would be
enough to change the world. Perhaps thats what Melodie was
trying to impart in her own challenge: If you do not live the vision
and the dream, who will?
(
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 127
8
(
DOWSING FOR ANGELS
T he Bitterroot Valley of Montana harbors the strangest assort-

ment of human talent known to man. Along the shores of the
Bitterroot River homes of the famous and obscure sit side-by-side,
not unlike the diverse tribes of centuries past. For the valley was
considered a sacred land, a healing land, where wars were not
waged and intertribal trading flourished. To this day some of the
best hunting and fishing in the world ranges between the banks of
the river to the jagged peaks of the Bitterroot Mountains.
A day came when white men coveted the beauty of the valley
and brought forbidden wars to the sacred places. Like the Cherokee
of the southern Alleghenies, a Trail of Tears descended upon the
Salish tribes of the Bitterroot as they were force-marched from their
lands. According to local lore, an ancient curse hangs over the valley,
incanted by an enraged shaman of that time. As the legend goes, the
Salish would one day return and conquer the white man and his
ways. Though you wont see it printed in the local newspaper, many
of the folks who have moved into the Bitterroot Valley will tell you
that they were led here for reasons they cannot voice. And some will
come right out and swear theyve been here before, the reincarnated
127
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 128
souls of those taken from the healing lands of the Bitterroot many
years ago.
One of those folks who will tell you he has returned is Michael
Hoefler, a man of some legend himself. For Michael has made a
name for himself as a gifted dowser and healer, and he will tell you
that he once lived in the valley long ago as a medicine man of the
Salish. Ask anyone who has witnessed Michael do his magic and a
broad smile will stretch across their face. You see, Michael makes
people laugh. All the time. His joke telling is as renowned as his
dowsing. And when he helps people with their healing, one cant tell
whether its some kind of wizardry or the belly laughing that cures
them. Of course, Michael doesnt care which it is, as long as people
suffer less.
The first time Gary met Michael was at a speaking engagement
in Hamilton, Montana. The local dowsers society had heard about
Garys work, his books, and his messages from the angels. Rumors
from Missoula had reached the southern valley about an angelic
gateway that opened the dimensions between the realm of humans
and the realm of angels. Gary had learned the information about the
angelic gateway while writing another book on angelic phenomena.
Barnes and Noble had sponsored a book signing in Missoula at
which a few of the valleys dowsers had attended. Now, if you
havent seen dowsers at work, you are in for an enchanting surprise.
Its amazing the different ways these talented people divine
information with their dowsing rods, or pendulums, or bobbers, or
copper u-tubes, or coat hangers, or willow branches, or even their
hands. One of the hand dowsers had attended the book signing
where Gary had set up the gateway using seven different kinds of
crystalline stones. During the talk and book reading, she had set her
hand in motion near the gateway to measure the energy and the
authenticity of the claims. It wasnt long before all the dowsers in the
valley had heard about the phenomenon. Michael was one of the
first to actually construct a gateway for himself so he could test what
this creation was all about. Not long afterwards, an invitation was
extended to Gary to speak before the dowsers society of the
Bitterroot Valley on April 16, at Common Ground, a center for
alternative events. And he accepted.
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 129
dowsing for angels 129
As Gary sat in the front row waiting for Michael to finish his
introduction, a folded piece of paper emerged from Michaels vest
pocket. Well, you know I cant let an opportunity like this slip by
without a joke. The audience immediately began tittering,
knowing Michael had a joke for any and every occasion. Gary, I
hope you dont mind but I cant resist getting people into a good
mood for your talk. As all of you here know, Ive experimented with
Garys angelic gateway and have found the energy magnifies
dowsing abilities tenfold. Amazing, simply amazing stuff. Gary will
explain that later, if I ever yield the podium. Michael truly was a
humble man who loved to be around people. And if people were
around, that meant it was time for a joke: There was nun waiting
to catch an airplane to Chicago. She sat patiently with the boarding
pass in her hand. Gary also sat patiently as the joke progressed. He
noticed how Michaels eyes constantly scanned the crowd as if
spying on any heart carrying sadness. Any hint of depression or
sorrow and Michaels radar locked on. The scanning would cease,
yielding to a concentrated attention aimed at the less-than-joyful
heart. It was as if the dowser used comedy as his dowsing rod and
his jovial antics as healing salve. Truth be told, Michael Hoefler had
an uncanny resemblance to Howdy Doody, only without the
strings.
Well, being the punctual kind of person she was, the nun had
arrived well ahead of the time needed for catching her plane. As she
looked around the concourse she spotted a fortunetelling machine in
the corner that also gave ones weight. Ive never used one of those
before, she thought. Maybe I should try it. So she moseyed over to
the machine and stepped on the scales. She saw it took a quarter to
get the fortune and her weight, so she fished into her habit and came
up with a quarter, dropping it in the coin slot. A card popped out of
the machine, and on it was printed, You are a nun, you weigh 122
pounds, and you have a flight to Chicago.
She thought this was amazing. How could this little machine
know all this information about me? So she put in another quarter,
and another card popped out that said, Youre a nun weighing 122
pounds, you have a flight to Chicago, and youre going to play a
fiddle. And she thought, No way, I never played a musical
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 130
instrument in my whole life. This is wrong. So she went back to her

chair and sat down.
Within a minute a man sat down next to her with a violin, and
she asked him if she could play the violin. And he said, Sure. So she
played the violin like she had played it her whole life. It was just
incredible. She went, Oh my God, that machine knows something
about my life I didnt even know. So she goes back over to the
machine, stands on the scales and drops in another quarter. And
another card pops out saying, You are a nun, you weigh 122 pounds,
you have a flight to Chicago, and youre going to break wind.
No, Ive never broken wind in public in my whole life. This is
embarrassing. So, as shes getting off the machine, she sort of
stumbles and breaks wind. She is thoroughly embarrassed but says,
Ive got to check this out one more time. She gets back on the
machine, puts a quarter in, and gets a card that says, Youre a nun,
you weigh 122 pounds, and youve fiddled and farted around and
youve missed your plane to Chicago.
After the laughter had died down, Michael endeared the
audience further with his, Gee, I hope that didnt offend anyone. If
it did, I apologize. Introductions were made about the guest
speaker, and as Gary approached the podium the applause
resounded the welcoming environment Michael had created with
his humor. What the attendees did not know was that Michael and
Gary had privately agreed to do a co-presentation. For Gary had
become quite amazed at Michaels capabilities. After talking about
his work with Nick and the creation of The Messengers, Gary began
presenting other sources of information about the angelic realm.
Every eye in the crowd was locked onto him as he began to reveal
prophetic messages regarding the coming together of heaven and
earth. As part of that message, Gary began explaining the set of
stones on the meeting room floor that he and Michael had placed
before the talk. The geometry of the seven stones created nothing
less than an angelic gateway in which man and angels could come
together. It was at this time that Gary asked Michael to stand and
speak about discoveries he had made about this new phenomenon.
As Michael got up from his seat, he began to pull objects from
his satchel. He called the dowsing rods L-rods because of their
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 131
shape, and explained to everyone how they worked in his hands.

This was done for the benefit of visitors who were not yet
acquainted with the world of dowsing. A bottle of water was placed
on the floor with Michael backing up to make distance between him
and the water. After asking the rods to show him the location of the
water, he then ambled in the direction of the bottle and as he neared
it, the L-rods swung to the center and crossed. He repeated the
demonstration from the opposite side so all could see. Michael then
described how he had taken this sacred geometry in which the
stones were laid, and had begun to measure the energy emitting
from the center of the geometry where the gateway resided. He
explained to the audience that he had never seen this kind of energy
coming from any other geometric object or grid. To illustrate this,
Michael marched to the far corner of the room and asked the rods to
show him how far out the energy from the gateway emanated. After
taking only a few steps the rods crossed as before. A murmur began
to rumble among the dowsers in the meeting. When it was explained
that the geometric layout of the stones in the room was a smaller
version of what the angels had given, Michael then disclosed that a
full-size gateway had been constructed in the valley where he had
tested the full strength of the gateway. The outer edges of reach of
the full-size gateway extended as far out as 350 feet. Such power had
convinced Michael to construct a gateway in his own apartment,
enabling him to do his healing work and phone consultation work
with far better results.
Gary peered around, watching certain participants pulling out
their pendulums, most of them made of some sort of crystal
dangling from the end of a chain. Their heads were nodding yes to
everything Michael was telling them. The buzz grew as Michael
continued. What Gary and I would like to show you now is how
this gateway can work with the angelic realm. Michael extended a
hand toward Gary to continue.
What weve found out is that this sacred geometry can actually
be used in assisting us in better communicating with the angelic
realm. Naturally, you can talk to your angels anywhere and anytime
you wish, but using this gateway is like getting an especially clear
phone line to facilitate the conversation. You will see that the
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 132
geometry has seven places where you can stand. The place you
stand depends on the creative energy or creative ray of light you
were born under. Think of it as a different kind of astrology. Instead
of being born under a star sign, imagine being born under a certain
ray of light which determines what gift you carry, what gift you
were born with. This gift carries a certain signature of energy. The
seven rays are the seven colors of the rainbow. Let me illustrate.
Before the meeting, Gary had made arrangements to use
Michaels wife, Jane, to show how the rays work. Using the dowsing
tools, Michael had determined that Jane had been born under the
green ray while he had been born under the blue ray. Those born
under the green ray reflected the gift of those who mend that which
is broken or healers. Janes gift was that of healing the environment,
displaying this gift in an unusual way. Her artwork was well known
around the valley. The pictures she created with her colored
pencilwork almost always told a story about a particular animal,
whether that was a totem animal or medicine animal. A story went
with every picture, educating and encouraging people to
understand the environment around them. The valley was sacred to
Jane and she in turn was respectful of its beauty and riches. Her
work had been dedicated to healing the environment and healing
peoples attitudes about nature.
As Gary asked Jane to stand in the position of the green ray in
the south, he explained how Michael would stand in the west
because he was born under the blue ray. When seven different
people born under the seven different rays stood in the geometry,
Gary explained, the angelic gateway would open. However, because
its not easy to find seven different people who can come together at
the same time, the angels had given out information as to how the
seven different stones (each a different color) mimicked the energy
of the rays the people were born under. Gary then asked that the
angels remove themselves from the gateway, causing a few in the
audience to smile quizzically. Was this for real? We can ask angels to
come and go at will? He then yielded the floor to Michael who
explained, Im going to walk through this geometric construction to
dowse, to test to see if any angels are present. With L-rods in hand,
he made a beeline toward Gary right through the center of the
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 133
angelic gateway. As you can see, the dowsing rods dont move at
all. No angels are present. Now Gary will call in Janes helping
angel, whose name is Gabriel. I believe this is the helping angel of
greens, those born under the green ray?
Gary nodded an affirmative. With certainty in his voice he
announced, I now ask that the angel Gabriel come forth to assist
us. Now the interesting thing about dowsers is that they know
energy, they sense energy, and they arent afraid to let folks know
they are using energy. Whoa, could be heard from several dowsers
next to the gateway. The audience was already being tipped off.
Now, Michael, if you would, please check for the presence of
Gabriel in the gateway.
As Michael set the intention for his divining rods, he began his
trek across the width of the gateway. About six feet before he reached
the center, the rods crossed. He continued walking until he was about
six feet beyond the middle and the rods went straight again. People
in the back began to stand. This was not to be missed. Michael
volunteered, A pretty strong presence. I can see that some of you
sitting nearby can feel it as well. Heads began to bob in the
affirmative. Questions immediately followed about whether we can
see these beings. Gary began to describe how we all have to start
somewhere with a new phenomenon. When he had first worked with
this geometry, he could see nothing, and he couldnt really feel much.
But the more he worked with the energy, the easier it became to feel
the presence of an angel and ultimately to start seeing them. He
pointed out that dowsers usually have no trouble feeling or sensing
energy, and that this was an exceptional group because of that. To
make his point even stronger, Gary asked how many in the audience
could see the presence as well as feel it. Michael and several others
raised their hands. The rest of the audience sat captivated.
So, like other alternate-reality events, the real question is how
can we make use of this? Surely this phenomenon would make great
party conversation or make one popular with the neighbors, but so
what? Why have the angels given us this gift? Gary paused a few
moments to let the questions set in. The angelic realm has stated
purely and simply that they wish the days of suffering for humanity
to come to an end. They wish that we prepare ourselves for the
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 134
coming of a better world. And dare I say it? They tell us this world will
be even better than the legendary Garden of Eden. So how can we use
this gateway? First of all, we can ask questions or seek guidance by
standing in the outside positions of the gateway. Lets illustrate. Gary
asked Jane to voice a question that would have an obvious answer of
no. This would help to form a dialog between Jane and Gabriel. The
first trick was to totally focus on ones body, to become aware of ones
feelings, senses, smells, sounds. Then ask the question. Look for any
changes whatsoever to indicate whether a yes or a no was being
given. He asked her to phrase the question in such a way as to not ask
the angel how to live her life. Angels arent here to live our lives for
us. They are here to guide us and help us. We are not puppets; we
have free will, which the angels honor more than anything.
Jane stated that she was getting a tingling in the back of her neck
which told her that the angel was using that to give her a no. She
next asked a question she knew would have a yes to it. This time her
hands became warm. And to add to that, one of the ladies nearby
commented she could smell gardenias. The participants began to
understand that a language was being developed to establish a
means of communication between Jane and Gabriel. Jane then began
asking other questions, to the audiences delight. Pendulums were
pulled from several pockets as many of the dowsers began checking
the veracity of what was happening. There was little doubt on
anyones part that the angelic gateway was actually working. A
broad grin spread across Michaels face as he began witnessing what
he had hoped for: His dowsing colleagues would spread the news
far and wide that the realm of angels has created a doorway to the
realm of humans a doorway that would facilitate the end of
suffering for humanity.
The second way to use this gateway is for receiving, Gary said.
To receive, one must simply stand in the middle. Jane, would you
kindly take your shoes off and stand in the middle? Doing as
requested, Jane removed her Birkenstocks and tiptoed into the
middle of the configuration of stones. The center of the gateway
allows us to receive whatever it is that we need: comfort, love, peace,
healing, joy, calm, rest whatever. We simply have to ask. Its a
great place to meditate, allowing one to focus like never before. Jane
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 135
if there is anything youd like to receive, now is a good time. Jane

closed her eyes and took several deep breaths. After a few minutes
she simply said, Wow. After a few more minutes, she opened her
eyes to address the crowd. You people have to try this out. This is
great. Gary let everyone know that the talk would end soon and
anyone who wished could then stand in the gateway. Gary
requested that people remove their shoes before entering since they
were entering sacred space.
Questions were taken as Jane returned to her chair next to
Michael. The meeting had to be lengthened so all the answers could
be addressed. No one left at the prescribed time. All attending
wanted to know as much as possible about this new phenomenon.
Gary announced that he and Michael would be attending the
Spokane Mind, Body, Spirit Expo over in Washington State, and that
a full demonstration of the powers of the gateway would be
demonstrated there. The two had already agreed to present the
information with a colleague from Spokane named Harvey Caine, a
respected healer in that area.
As the meeting ended, folks flooded the gateway wanting to
check out the energy, or what Gary had carefully described as
grace. Michael sidled up next to his co-presenter and whispered,
Pretty good, huh? We may be here all night if these people keep
standing in the gateway. The truth was that those who had entered
the gateway first simply did not want leave. A line had formed with
those waiting to have their turn in the middle of the geometry of
stones on the floor. All wanted to believe that the days of wonder,
indeed, were upon us. The dowsing community of the Bitterroot
Valley would never be the same.
Gary got to know Michael better as the date of the Spokane Expo
approached. The more time he spent with the waterwitcher, the
more surprised he became at how this quiet man had become aware
of his gifts. Michaels life had been no more typical than the
profession he now chose as a diviner and healer. As a sophomore in
high school he first became aware that he knew things that his
classmates did not. We had a class in the library at school, and I was
watching the teacher moving the desk, which had a movie projector
on it. With a vividness that surprised me, I saw in my mind the
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 136
projector falling and crashing to the floor. Immediately, I started to

get up to prevent the accident but then stopped myself, feeling
awkward. It seemed so ridiculous to see with my eyes, you know,
the projector sitting there. What was I thinking? As I recovered from
my embarrassment, it happened. The projector tilted to one side and
fell in a crash to the floor. After that I started looking at myself
differently, and I began to examine how to use these warnings in a
way that would not embarrass myself. In hindsight, if I had gotten
up and simply said that I just wanted to make sure the projector was
OK by grabbing ahold of it, everything would have been fine.
Baseball is one of Michaels passions, and after the projector
scenario, he began to realize that he could see plays before they
happened. And like the falling of the projector, it took him a while to
begin believing he could act on these premonitions.
As was his way, Michael kept these awarenesses to himself
throughout his college years, not wanting to attract attention or have
people think he was different than they were. But in 1994, while
desperately looking for work, he signed on with the Psychic Readers
Network. It was also around this time when he started attending
dowsing conferences. And to his amazement he discovered his
abilities were greater than even he realized. His days with the
Psychic Readers Network were enlightening in teaching him more
about his abilities, but they also trained him to deal with the human
condition in all its foibles and eccentricities. One of his favorite
stories to tell involved an eighteen-year-old boy from Texas who
called up wanting to know when he was going to lose his virginity.
Michael laughs when telling of the conversation with the lad who
was adamant about being deflowered. As their conversation
continued over the phone, Michael began to see a scene in the back
seat of a car that would occur in the month of June. So Michael
relayed to the teen that he would have his first experience in three
months. Hearing the cheers of the lad whooping over the phone
made a lasting impression. The pressures of our society do strange
things to us, and Michael had began to witness how we mess
ourselves up in several ways, even to the point where people bring
disease upon themselves. The Texas teenager never called back,
which told Michael that the youngster had found his Holy Grail in
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 137
the back seat of a car, as foretold. But what had the boy learned
about love?
Another typical human trait Michael repeatedly scratched his
head over was the client who would pay good money for advice and
then not listen to it. Another Psychic Readers Network caller had
asked which car she should buy. There was a particular car the lady
had her eye on out of the several she had examined. She had driven
a red car which she favored but wasnt sure if it was the right car for
her, whether it was a lemon or not. Michael had dowsed for specific
information and relayed to the woman that the car was indeed a
lemon, that it would not be reliable. In his mind he began to see that
there was another car at the same dealers lot that was for her. He
told her, Go back to the dealer and have him show you three
different cars. There is a GM car on the lot that would be good for
you, a blue GM car. If I were you, Id buy this one. But there is also
a Ford and a Chrysler that you should look at in case you dont like
the style of the GM. The lady thanked him profusely and went right
out and bought the red car. The next day she called back asking
specifically for Michael. After purchasing the red car she discovered
problems right away with the thermostat. Upon taking the car to a
garage even more problems showed up. What should she do?
Michael wanted to yell at her that she should have listened. There
wasnt much else for her to do except learn a lesson, take the car back
to the dealership and ask for a car that worked.
Questions about medical conditions started to surface as
Michaels reputation began to spread. His first efforts with dowsing
came about by building what dowsers call a bobber. After attending
a dowsing convention, Michael constructed his own bobber by
stretching out a clothes hanger, keeping a curve on the end. He then
drilled a hole in a little peg and stuck it on the end, fashioning his
first high-tech dowsing instrument. It wasnt as if he were a
neophyte to the world of dowsing. While growing up in Colorado,
Michael had heard how his uncle had a reputation as a dowser. His
mom had told the kids, If you want to have a good well, you need
to have it witched. The bobber became Michaels entrance into the
world of dowsing. Watching it jump around while searching for
water or looking for lost objects fascinated him. The instrument
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 138
seemed to have a life of its own. As part of his expanding world,

Michael began to experiment with healing energy. At the dowsers
conferences they constantly stated that all of life is energy. And if its
energy, then it can be dowsed, altered, or healed with intent. Michael
had met friends who did healing work, showing him how he could
use his talent, as well as his bobber, to help others with their healing.
His first client was a psychic friend who encouraged Michael to
work on his injured back. Under the friends tutelage, Michael
discovered the bobber could transmit as well as receive. The friends
back healed with Michaels good intentions and strong ability to
funnel healing energy. Little did he know that he would start down
a path that would lead him to a world he never dreamed of. After
lending the bobber to a lady friend who wanted to do some work on
her property, the instrument was never returned. And just as well,
for it forced Michael to begin working with pendulums, which were
easier and faster to use. Jane created aids by which the pendulum
could be used for discovering all kinds of information: dates, times,
dietary needs, chemical imbalances, health problems, and even what
food to eat at a restaurant. So familiar had Michael become with the
pendulum work that he could be seen at a restaurant with friends,
swinging the pendulum over the menu and ordering whatever it
was his body most needed. Waitresses loved him. Took away some
of their humdrum. One thing about Michael: Around him, life is
never boring.
}
Gary stood in shock at the throng of people jamming the
Spokane Expo. Over 15,000 people had shown up. And he had been
billed as one of the main attractions. Twice the Expo staff had to
move him to larger rooms to accommodate the crowds. Both he and
Michael had to abandon their detailed planning to adjust to time
changes and space constraints. Their main workshop had moved to
one of the keynote speaker halls. Because of the unexpected move,
they had to rush to construct the angelic gateway near the front so
the audience could see what would happen. Harvey Caine had lent
his own reputation to the three-man effort to show the people of
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 139
Spokane that a world without limits was more than a matter of

dreams. Both Harvey and Gary took turns amazing the crowd with
demonstrations, Harvey showing the immense role that love plays
in bringing healing to our lives, Gary showing the crowd how the
angels had taught techniques where water could be changed by
blessing it with grace (divine love). He had asked for four volunteers
to come up before the crowd. Each volunteer was instructed to
randomly select from a case two bottles of sealed water, purchased
at a local grocery store. One of the bottles was to be placed under the
persons seat while the remaining bottle would be brought forward
to be blessed. After blessing the four bottles of water, the volunteers
were encouraged to then taste the blessed water, followed by a
sipping of the unblessed water waiting under their seats. The
stunned look on their collective faces told the audience everything.
When comments were solicited, each volunteer expressed
amazement that water could be made to taste so fresh, so alive, so
sweet. The unblessed water, according to some comments, tasted
like crap in comparison, with the taste of chlorine and plastic mixed
in. Gary then asked for another volunteer to come forward who
would be taught how to change the water in front of the audience,
so that all would know that each of us is able to change not only
water but also our bodies even our lives with these techniques.
Are not our bodies made up of 75 percent water? If we can change
the water in a bottle, then think what could happen if we changed
the water within ourselves, the life forces within our bodies.
Now it was Michaels turn. After asking for a volunteer who had
a medical problem to come forward, he instructed the lady to take
her shoes off and step into the middle of the angelic gateway.
Information had been shared with the workshop attendees as to how
to construct their own gateway, how to use it, and how to place the
seven different stones. Like before, the audience saw how Michael
could dowse for angels, could help a person begin their first steps in
learning how to talk with angels. But unlike the presentation in
Hamilton, he would now show the participants how the gateway
could be used in assisting people with healing.
The gray-haired woman standing in the middle of the gateway
looked around wondering what she had gotten herself into. Her
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 140
bright orange sweater acted like a neon sign as every eye in the
conference room focused on what was going to happen. People in
the back stood on chairs so as not to miss a single detail of this
healthy looking, lithe older woman standing before them. Michael
tried to put everyone at ease with a joke. Noting that the lady still
exhibited a bit of nervousness, he followed up with another joke
which got her to laugh. Then he began. He explained to everyone,
You will see that I use a pendulum as one of my tools to discover
what is out of place with a person. As it swings in this direction I
know that everything is in balance. If it swings the other direction,
then I know work needs to be done. The rocking pendulum hung
above the womans head, indicating all was well. As Michael
lowered the pendulum down the body the rhythm of the crystal on
the chain did not change until it reach the groin area. Well, uh oh,
Michael politely stammered. I guess we have some issues around,
uh, relationship. The woman burst out laughing.
Oh, come on, you can say it. Im having more than a problem
with my relationship; there seems to be an issue around sex. I like it.
And I aint gettin enough of it. The crowd chuckled at her candor.
A broad grin swept across Michaels face, which now turned a nice
shade of crimson. He always tried to be respectful of peoples
privacy, especially in a public environment. But this lady didnt
seem to mind telling her story in front of God and everyone. As the
pendulum swept back and forth from the ladys left hip to her right
hip, it once again changed direction.
Yes, Michael confirmed, the energy block does seem to be
coming from a male figure. Let me see ... Pulling out a laminated
card from his shirt pocket, Michael began swinging the pendulum
over the card. Well, it looks like you and this man have past-life
issues that are a part of this problem. And it looks like you are ready
to let go of these issues even though he may not.
Wow, you got that right, the lady in orange volunteered. Do
you think you could use that thing on him? The audience rippled
with laughter. They were caught up in the event, sympathizing with
what this lady was facing and how she might deal with it. Michael
always had a way of winning people over. The hall full of people
was one with the woman in the middle of the gateway. As all waited
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 141
to see what would unfold next, Michael asked the woman, If you
like we can ask the angels to help us here in ridding you of any past-
life energy that is blocking you, and to remove any emotional
baggage that may be affecting you.
Oh, yeah, Darling, just do it! she sang out. Again the audience
tittered with laughter. Michael began focusing on the womans
abdomen and hips as if he were looking inside her.
OK, lets let this happen. I ask your angels and guides to assist
you in removing these problems. A silence came over the room as
the woman stood motionless while Michael focused on the swinging
of his pendulum over the card in his hand. Im seeing that its
starting to happen. Your helpers are starting to move this old, stuck
energy out.
Oh my God! the woman said in a loud voice. Im getting so
dizzy. I dont get dizzy. Whats going on?
Youre OK, Michael encouraged. Its quite common for
people to get disoriented as this stuff moves out. If it gets too much
for you to handle, let me know, and well back off for a bit.
No, no, dont stop. I want this to be over with. Even Harvey
and Gary were now standing to watch what was unfolding. My
goodness, dear oh me, the lady stated in a heavy whisper. Im
getting so hot. I dont do hot. I never get hot, Deary. Im always
having to get blankets to keep myself warm. Thats why Im
wearing this heavy sweater, cuz Im always cold. But now Im
starting to sweat. Look at me. Like a conductor before a symphony
orchestra, the lady began pulling the sleeves back from the sweater,
waving her arms for Michael and everyone else to see. Honey, I
dont sweat. Never. And Im starting to look like I just got out of the
shower. Wow. Like a southerner in a heat wave, she began fanning
herself rapidly with her hands. If I get any hotter, Im going to
have to take my sweater off. Ive never stripped in front of a crowd
before. Again, the audience broke into huge laughter. What was
happening before their eyes was affecting them as well. A kind of
excitement filled the air. It was like watching a miracle unfold
before you.
Well, if you want to take your sweater off, I think we can find a
sheet or something to hide you. Are you doing OK?
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 142
Oh my, the dizziness is really getting bad. I hope I dont pass

out, she said looking at Michael as if she were a damsel in distress
and he were Dudley Doright who could save her.
I think wed better get you some water to drink. Turning his
focus to the watchers, Michael continued, Its quite common for the
body to give off huge amounts of energy during a session. And that
can mean that water is needed to refresh and resaturate the body.
The water also acts as a grounding device to help get rid of the
dizziness. Oh, good, a nice big bottle of water. Has it been blessed?
The young woman who had handed him the bottle nodded yes.
Everyone watched bug-eyed as the lady in orange downed the bottle
like a logger guzzling a tankard of beer.
Gary interjected at this point and added, Michael, would you
check to see if her spleen meridian is OK? Im seeing a blockage
there as well.
Sure, good idea. Michael flipped his laminated card over and
started checking meridian paths, the same used by acupuncturists
and Chinese medicine practitioners. Yep, youre right. The spleen
meridian is blocked. Do I have your permission to clear your spleen
meridian? he politely asked the lady.
Honey, you have my permission to do anything you want.
Michael laughed along with the audience. Once again he invoked the
womans angels and guides to assist her in this effort. And this time
the frivolity changed into high emotion. Within seconds, this affable,
delightful matron went from all smiles to exhibiting tears. Obvious
emotions erupted on her face as she began to silently weep. Michael
asked for tissues. The tender silence changed the conference hall into
a sanctuary. Others reached for handkerchiefs as well, dabbing their
eyes. Telltale sniffles fractured the quiet in several places.
God, honey, this is so embarrassing. A lady who wasnt afraid
of stripping in front of the gathering now was afraid of exposing
herself in another way. How often do we do this to ourselves in
American society, where the jester and the tough person are
admired, and the tender heart is hidden in shame? How intimate the
setting had become. How revealing to everyone. Earlier in the talk,
Gary had pronounced to the audience that when we heal one, we
heal all. How evident that had become in the time it took a
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 143
pendulum to swing back and forth. Michael kept checking his

reference card.
No need to be embarrassed. We are all friends here. Youve got
angels helping you and watching out for you. I see that you are
almost done. Almost all the blocks are gone. How do you feel?
Darling, I feel great. Its like this huge weight has been lifted
from me. I feel so alive. This is great.
Wonderful. Glad to hear it. OK, Im getting that everything has
been cleared, he said, folding his pendulum into his hand and
placing it back into his vest pocket. I want to you thank you for
coming up here and showing everyone how this works. You were
wonderful, really wonderful. Orange arms surrounded Michael
with gratitude. As this delightful woman returned to her seat, the
entire hall erupted in applause. Never had Michael been so
appreciated in public, never had he heard the thunder of such
recognition. It was now time for questions, and hands shot up like
bean sprouts with people wanting to know more about what had
just happened.
A younger man wanted to know what it was the lady was
experiencing, what it was that made her so hot, what it was that
caused the healing. After letting the woman speak from her own
perspective, Michael decided to answer the mans question with a
story. First of all, it doesnt matter what someone else does in terms
of our own healing. If we are not ready for healing, nothing will
work, or if it does, it will only be temporary. We are our own healers.
You see that even in ancient texts like the Bible. In there you hear
over and over again where Jesus keeps saying, I have done nothing.
He meant it. What you just saw was my assisting this lovely lady
with her own desire for healing. You know, if we want healing in our
lives, we have to be ready for that. We have to allow the healing to
occur in our body when someone works with us.
The reason for the heat comes from two factors. Firstly, I am
using what I call grace, or the essence of love, the life force, to help
break up miasms or blocks that keep the body from healing itself.
Our bodies are tremendous healing machines. It is the rule to be
healthy and the exception to be ill. The illness comes out of our
inability to let ourselves heal. In this case, I noticed the energy
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 144
immediately break loose when I worked with grace, asking this

ladys angels to assist also. This gateway we stood in is a doorway,
an opening to grace. In fact, Gary and I call it the Gate of Grace,
which is nothing more than the essence of Divine Love. When the
connections between me and the person I am working with are
good, heat usually is a sign of the healing starting up. When people
start perspiring, as in this case, you know that a lot of work is getting
done. And its a team effort between the person, myself, and the
angels. When the heat was gone, that told me that the healing of the
physical was complete. But you noticed a lot of emotional energy
also release when we dealt with past-life issues. Sometimes we come
into this life with baggage from past-life situations. We often move
into relationships that have karmic debt or karmic consequences.
And if we dont learn from them, or if we dont overcome the karma,
we can fall into a diseased condition. People really do get hot from
the work, they tingle from the top of their heads to the bottoms of
their feet.
About two months ago, I worked with a woman who watched
the swelling in her feet decrease as we were working together. She
said, My gosh, my feet are getting smaller right before my eyes.
How do you explain a phenomenon like that? Well, this woman was
a student of Christian Science for many years. We had worked
together off and on for two years. She was quite familiar with my
energy and healing ability, and lately the added use of grace. She
accepts that a healing is going to happen. She now knows it is going
to happen. Its in situations where you have complete acceptance by
the person where it really makes a difference. Theres nothing in the
way of the connection between the healer and the healee, the angelic
realm and the persons guides. Thats the ideal situation.
Usually, when healing takes place, it begins first on the etheric
level, and then the etheric is transferred to the physical over a matter
of days. In this case, and in the case of the lady with the swollen feet,
the etheric was transferred to the physical almost immediately. And
thats the phenomenon that occurs when you have everything
working extremely well. How did I know that our volunteer would
be one of these situations? I dowsed asking for someone who was
willing, ready, and able to allow healing to occur. My pendulum
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 145
swung over in the direction of our volunteer when I picked her out
of the many who had raised their hands. I want to thank her greatly
for giving us such an environment for everyone to learn. Thank you.
Thank you very much. He bowed in the direction of the grateful
woman.
Even more hands shot up after this answer. People could feel the
rightness of what they heard and what they had seen. They were
hungry to know more and learn more. These are the days of wonder,
and people want to hope in the authenticity of the wonder, trust in
the hope that wells up within them. We are a world in need of
trusting in our own healing.
An older lady asked, What happens when folks go back to their
doctors after they have had a healing like this?
Michael chuckled a bit and looked over at Gary. There are many
answers to that question. I worked on a case with Gary where the
lady had advanced lupus, which is an incurable disease. Like these
other cases, there was a spontaneous healing overnight. She was
ready. When she went back to her doctor and asked to be taken off
all her lupus medication, he wanted to know what had happened to
her. She wouldnt tell him. She had a hard time telling her husband
what had happened. A lot of people dont want to be ridiculed for
coming to us, letting people know theyve been working with the
angelic realm. Theyre afraid of what people will say. But the doctor
did ultimately take her off all her lupus medication, and told her
whatever she was doing to keep on doing it. We hear that a lot.
Then there are cases when clients simply will not go to their
doctor anymore. The previous case I told you about, the lady with
the swollen feet? Theres more to her story. Marilyn was actually 73
years old and had been to her doctor often. A couple of years ago she
had chronic back pain and went to ask her doctor what he could do.
A CAT scan was ordered and a specialist analyzed it. Marilyn told
me how solemn-faced he was when he told her that her back was in
such terrible shape there was nothing they could do for her. She
would suffer from the back pain for the rest of her life. Marilyn was
in a living hell and told me she was starting to go out of her mind
from the pain. She then went to a chiropractor who gave her the
same sentence pain for the rest of her life. Thats when she gave
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 146
me call, hearing about me from an associate. I treated her over the

phone in a similar fashion you saw here today. I keep a gateway in
my apartment when I do my work. During the session, Marilyn
began to express comfort, telling me that a tingling sensation was
traveling up her back, that the pain was subsiding. I worked on her
for an hour, checking for other conditions which might have
contributed to the pain. Disease can come from any one of our
bodies: the physical body, the emotional body, the mental body, or
the spiritual body. In Marilyns case, the relief was immediate, and
she has had no recurrence of the pain since that day. Marilyn is the
ideal client. Now, the reason Im telling you this story is that Marilyn
wont even go back to her doctor anymore. And Im not saying that
people shouldnt see their doctors. Physicians can often play an
important role in our healing process. What I do is no substitute for
sound medical treatment. But I do have to admit that I see a lot of
people whose doctors have given up on a cure.
I also hear from people who are told by their doctors that
surgery is the only answer. And they want to know what other
options are available. I had such a client in Portland, Oregon. A few
years ago she started having unbearable leg pains, so bad that she
would wake up crying from it. Her legs were so swollen that on some
days she wouldnt remove her shoes for fear she couldnt get them
back on. Because she had a sensitivity to drugs, also, she decided she
needed to find an alternate therapy to her painful condition. When
her right leg started dragging from her condition, she went to an
orthopedic surgeon. After many tests and x-rays, she was told that
her spine looked in such bad condition that it would require surgery.
She told the doctor she wouldnt consider surgery as an option. And
he told her, Then you will have to live with the pain. Thats when
she called me. In her case it took a few days before the swelling went
down and the pain left. And she hasnt had a leg problem since.
Recently she called with a slipped disk in her neck, causing her
great pain. Once again I worked on her remotely. And because she
was now in a more open frame of mind, within thirty minutes the
disk eased back into place and the pain left. She tells me that what
she likes best about me is my irreverent sense of humor. Never
discount the role of humor in helping people to heal.
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 147
The questions came in rapid fire as the time began to run out.
The Expo facilitator had to give the high sign to close the workshop
for the next workshop scheduled in the hall. One last question was
taken. What has changed in your life since youve started doing this
kind of work? What has this done for you?
Not one to talk about himself much, Michael scratched his head,
wondering what he should say. A twinkle in his eye betrayed his
desire to tell another joke. But because time was short, he simply
answered, Well, its given me ... its reinforced my own perspective
that there is more to us than what meets the eye. And certainly it
reinforces the feeling that we are all interrelated, and that we are all
here for reasons. Many times we dont recognize why we are here
precisely. But there are reasons. We know we are here to change the
energy in the world, we are here to serve others, we are here to help
our own Self, own our karma, or to learn our lessons. We are here to
deal with our own contracts for acquiring wisdom through our
lessons, as well as affecting other people in our lives in positive
ways. Abraham Lincoln once said, A man is about as happy as he
makes up his mind to be, and my feeling is that it is very important
to be happy, because searching for happiness invites us to structure
our lives or structure other peoples lives in pursuit of that
happiness. Thats one reason why I tell a lot of jokes. I try to bring
happiness to people because if youre laughing it will make your life
better in so many ways. Everybody has different things they need to
do in their lives and if they can do it with a smile then what they
contribute has more power, it allows them to feel empowered. A
smile is a powerful tool.
Its important that we feel empowered. One of the things I like
to say about my work is that I try to focus on peoples lives working,
moving forward. You know, its not about what I want for them, its
about what is in their highest and best interest. There is a lady that
taught about relationships at Unity Church in Portland, where I
visited. She said, Youre in a marriage or a relationship to help the
other person to become more of what they can be not what you
want them to be but more of who they can be. And thats the
thing I try to do when I work with people just empower them to
be more of who they can be rather than what everyone wants them
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 148
to be. You know every one of us is unique and powerful in that

respect.
From past experience, Gary knew he needed to step in and end
the workshop. Too many times in the past, in working with Michael,
he had found himself leaving a workshop several minutes and even
hours after the workshop was over. Michael genuinely loved people,
loved to listen to them, loved to help them. However, Gary had also
witnessed what happened to Michael afterwards. Some men give so
much of themselves that they drain their own energy. And Michael
was one who could give until it wiped him out. His past skills as a
TM meditation instructor certainly served him in getting his energy
levels back up after long sessions. But it was Garys way to provide
an ounce of prevention rather than putting Michael into a position
where he, himself, needed a pound of cure.
The relationship between Michael and Gary had grown into one of
deep mutual respect. Each had his gifts, his own personal magic that
he brought to people. They were a terrific team in workshop situations
and also in serving clients. Garys one impediment, however, was that
he would not do remote healing, at which Michael was quite adept. So
the time they spent with one another was more rare than either liked.
Their friendship was one of mutual support, often to the point where
it became instructive in ways neither could understand. Such a time
occurred when Gary found himself immersed in a family mess
involving real estate inherited from his mother and father. His younger
brother had gotten himself in some trouble and was about to lose the
property left to the two brothers. Gary had to use legal maneuverings
to wrestle the property into his care before it went into receivership.
But what he didnt know, with all his traveling and sparse contact, was
that the property had fallen into ruin, with his brother illegally logging
the trees off for spare cash. By taking control of the property, Gary
found himself jumping from the frying pan into the fire. The property
would not sell. Even as a fixer-upper it would not sell because of the
many liens against his brother.
At the time, Michael knew something was wrong, and asked
Gary to confide in him. After relaying the entire story, Michael
volunteered to help. How? Gary asked. It hasnt sold for six
months. In fact, there hasnt even been a single inquiry for that
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 149
whole six months. Not one single interested party has come forward.
This is a complete mess.
How about I clear the property of whatever is in the way,
whatever it is that is keeping it from being sold?
You can do that?
Yeah. Fax me a map of the property, signifying true north. Be
sure to give the layout of the house and any other significant point
on the property. Ill dowse to see whats inhibiting a sale from
coming forward.
The map was faxed within the hour. Michael called back with
information. I see whats wrong here. What Im being told is that
your parents gave this to you and your brother as a family legacy.
They wanted you both to have something you could be proud of.
Gary responded, Yes, thats true. I pretty much gave the house
to my brother since I would never be there. Its close to a lake, near
recreational grounds; it was a great place. I helped build the house
myself. I hate seeing what has happened to it.
Well, there is a lot of anger around the house. Your brother is
furious with you and wants you to fail in your efforts. I can ask the
angels to move in and protect the property, to move in and clear out
all the impediments, and I can ask you to set the intent that whoever
buys it will preserve the initial integrity your parents wanted for the
property.
Wow, that sounds great, Michael. Do it.
After about five minutes of silence, while Michael did his thing,
the two continued their conversation. OK, Gary. Ive dowsed that it
is important that the price of the house end in a number 4. That is
your prosperity number. And Ive dowsed that the property will sell
for $41,800. I know thats low but its probably the best youll get in
its present condition. You could get a lot more for it if you cleaned it
up and did some repairs but you said you didnt want to sink
another penny into it. So if you add up $41,800, youll get 4+1+8,
which is 13, which adds up to 4. Thats the price.
Three days later, Gary got a phone call from the realtor. A party
was interested in buying the house as a fixer-upper but they wanted
to do a private contract rather than go through a bank loan. Gary
was dumbfounded. The property sold. And the price? $41,800.
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 150
This was not the only real estate clearing that Michael had done
and it would not be the last. After the Spokane Expo, his reputation
spread even more. Phone calls from all around the nation made their
way to Victor, Montana, where Michael and Jane live. Their days are
dedicated to the helping, healing, and empowering of others. Both
are people of the heart, who see the world for what it can become
instead of what people make it out to be. Their lives serve not only
to better others; their lives serve to remind us all that we have a
choice in this world. We can choose to suffer or we can choose to
help one another become whole, healing not only ourselves but our
world. Remember when we heal one, we heal all.
(
Awakenings
Michael Hoefler
P.O. Box 517
Victor - MT 59875
406-642-3630
awakenings1@qwest.net
R
Harvey Caine
Synergy: Fully Integrated Healthcare
1605 W. Garland, Spokane - WA 99025
509-245-3838.
Days.Ch8 2/12/03 12:03 PM Page 153
Part III
}
CLOSING THE JOURNAL
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 155
9
(
THE SYMPOSIUM
A s the popularity of The Messengers grew, invitations and

inquiries began pouring in. Would Nick speak before our
group? Would Nick join our efforts? Can Nick answer this question
or that question? Something had to be done to address the
groundswell of requests. Brian, Gary, and Nick put their heads
together in deciding it was time to create a setting where Nick could
present his story, answer questions, and remind people of Jeshuas
messages, especially those addressing healing in ones spiritual life.
But where to begin? Seattle had been the jump-off point for the book,
why not a symposium as well? Though Nick would be the only
speaker for this event, a symposium format was designed so that
additional speakers could be brought in at future events. It would be
a format that would allow a public ministry to grow around Nick as
well as those who would embody the ideals found in Jeshuas
messages.
Brian set to work getting the right people organized for such an
event. The venue would be the Washington State Convention Center
in downtown Seattle. Graphics were designed and pictures collected
so that an audience could see more clearly what would be presented.
155
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 156
It would be an effort almost as grueling as trying to publish the

book. Sound engineers, video engineers, lighting specialists, ushers,
ticket collectors, security people, bookstore people, and publicity
people all had to be taken care of. Coordination was monumental
with the short time available to get everything ready. Brian spent
more time on the phone than he did sleeping in bed. The day was
growing close and only two-hundred tickets had been sold for a
convention ballroom that could hold a thousand. It wasnt that
numbers were so important as it was that a good model be created
for future events such as this.
In a meeting filled with scratching heads, the question was asked
whether the symposium should be canceled. Nicks businesslike
determination pointed to trusting that people would show up at the
door. Others countered that events such as these only draw 25
percent of their crowd at the door. The other 75 percent comes in
advance sales. Nick pointed out that nothing about this project had
been done according to the norm. And this would be no exception.
As the Convention Center doors opened, people from as far
away as Vancouver, Washington, to Vancouver, Canada, were
already waiting. Nick would learn later that well-wishers had come
from as far away as Salem, Oregon, to participate in his symposium
debut. As the time approached for his introduction, ushers were
wondering whether additional chairs would have to be retrieved.
Almost a thousand people were present, buzzing with anticipation,
as Paul White introduced his friend and colleague, Nick Bunick.
What pleased Brian the most was the mix of friendly people making
acquaintances with their neighbors two and three chairs down. It seemed
more like a great picnic than a symposium. People from all walks of life had
gathered. Men in business suits sat next to men who looked as though theyd
taken off a day from working in the woods. Teenagers sat with parents.
Seniors using walkers to find aisle seats stared bemusedly at swaying
toddlers pulling chew rings and soppy fingers from their mouths. Women in
flowing dresses smiled with acknowledgment at others in work clothes. It
was a day where the best in people seemed to beam brighter than the
ballroom spotlights.
As Nick stepped to the podium, a discernible gleam in his eye
seemed to say that this was what it was like 2,000 years ago. As then,
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 157
the symposium 157
people wanted to hear about, to be reminded of the messages with

which Jeshua had blessed the world. Opening his binder anxiously,
Nick began to speak with a earnestness that stilled the crowd
immediately.
It was 2,000 years ago when Jeshua taught his followers, Nick
began. He told them that every one of us is a child of God God
our Father and Mother. That means that all of us here are brothers
and sisters. So I say to you, not condescendingly, but from the heart,
good afternoon to you, my brothers and sisters.
Several voices in the crowd returned a soft Good afternoon.
Children waved as if theyd already made a new friend. Others
simply said, Hi. It was the kind of rumble of voices that one heard
when a church full of people prayed together. Nick cleared his
throat, grabbed a glass of water as he rearranged his notes. His eyes
checked the crowd one more time as he tested the remote control
unit in his hand and turned a discerning eye to the twelve foot
screen behind him.
Can everyone see the screen OK? he posed as if asking friends
if they could see the football game on TV well enough. Everyone
relax and feel at home. If you feel the need to get up during my talk
to take care of yourselves, please feel free to do so. The bathrooms
are outside the ballroom doors, down the hallway, and to your
right. The excitement was transforming into affection. This would
be no ordinary talk. Everyone was at home, only now, home would
be in the middle of the Washington State Convention Center.
This is a very special day for me, Nick continued, And I hope,
for you, also. Im breaking down this material into three different
segments. In the first portion, I want to share with you the events
that took place in my life, going back to 1977, so that you can
understand the challenges that I went through, the metamorphosis I
went through, to have the determination and the commitment to be
here today, to accept Gods mission. This purpose now remains with
me for the rest of my life.
The second segment will cover events that happened 2,000
years ago. Events that will be given in greater detail than can be
found in Scripture and even, in some places, that conflict with
Scripture. I want to share with you why they conflict, and I want to
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 158
share the experiences I have been exposed to in the memory of Paul

so that you can have an understanding of why there were distortions
and inconsistencies.
In the third segment, Im going to share with you the messages
of Jeshua of 2,000 years ago, as well as contemporary messages I feel
I have a responsibility in sharing. There are going to be some major
events that are going to happen in the world as we move into the
new millennium. Let me make it clear that I am not talking about the
end of the world, but the beginning of a new world.
I will leave time for questions after our intermission, and then
I will move into a transition where I will expose you to what Jeshua
taught to the crowds about healing of the spirit.
On the projection screen stood a giant angel with its arm
extended as if in invitation. Nick turned, clicked his remote,
delivering a large map of Judea, Samaria, and Galilee. In the back of
the ballroom, autographing of the book ceased, ushers took seats, all
eyes focused in front on the screen and the man who had traveled
across 2,000 years to be with them.
As Nicks words related his own journey of what it took to get
him to this day, in this ballroom, pictures waltzed across the
projector screen, people looked around, and smiles continued as
those attending continued to sense something in the air, as if the
angels themselves were present. With the first section of the
presentation delivered, Nick launched right into the second section.
There is a spiritual consciousness spreading around this
world, his voice insisted, resounding through the sound system.
Not just here in this gathering, not just in Washington, not just in
the Pacific Northwest. Not just in our country and not just on our
continent, but all across the world. More people between now and
the year 2012 will open their hearts and souls to God than ever
before in the history of mankind because of the wonderful things
that are going to happen in the future. Theyll understand the
presence of God and Gods messengers, and theyll realize the
presence of Jeshua and his messages in all our lives.
All of you came here today using various forms of
transportation. Some of you perhaps drove in a car with friends;
some of you by public transportation; or maybe some of you even
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 159
the symposium 159
walked. Regardless of how you got here, it is the same with finding
God. There are many different ways. Whether you are Christian,
Jew, Hindu, Buddhist or Islamic, we are all on the same journey. And
that journey is to find God. We are all children of God. Smiles eased
across faces at hearing a message that they inherently knew to be
true. It was gladsome to have someone who spoke with the
authority of Paul the Apostle to say so.
Im going to take you back 2,000 years, he continued, back to
the Sea of Galilee, where Jeshua spent most of his childhood in
Capernaum, where his family lived. Even though it is mentioned in
Scripture that he was from Nazareth, where Mary and Joseph had
originated, he actually grew up in Capernaum, in the same region as
Nazareth, some 70 miles north of Jerusalem. That is the reason why
most of his early disciples came from the Sea of Galilee. Peter and
Andrew came from Bethsaida, located on the northern shore. John
and James, sons of Zebedee, also came from that area on Galilees
shore. The reason why this particular province is important stems
from the fact that it wasnt under Roman occupation; it was not part
of the Roman Empire as was Jerusalem and the region of Judea.
Galilees topography and vegetation, then, was not unlike the
greenery and rolling hills of this area. Great agricultural and fishing
businesses flourished in this area, servicing the larger population of
Jerusalem. There was much activity in the area around Galilee which
could take place that was not allowed in the area around Jerusalem.
And the people were more independent and less pious in the Galilee.
The reason they were less pious lay in the areas conquest 200 years
prior by the Babylonians and Assyrians. Many of the conquerors had
settled down and intermarried with the indigenous population. The
intermarriages fostered more religious diversity and less dedication to
the Judaic religion adhered to in Jerusalem. So Jeshua found himself
in a land that didnt make much of fuss about his own teachings.
Thats the primary reason for Jeshuas many trips to Jerusalem during
his teaching ministry. He had the best of both worlds. The Romans
didnt pay much attention to him as a resident of Galilee, yet he could
visit Jerusalem to teach and fulfill his ministry.
It was fascinating how much information Nick retained from his
memories of Paul. Not only was his understanding of language
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 160
nuances and cultural subtleties remarkable, but so were detailed

descriptions of the terrain, what people ate and wore. It was like
being able to take a TV camera back into the ancient past and watch
what was happening during the time of Jeshua. Nick continued to
paint vivid pictures of the provinces and cultures of what was
known as Palestine. Intimate detail of Pauls arrival to the area at the
age of eighteen, and his travels through the Holy Land proved
fascinating. Nick began to describe the various sects of the region to
show people how Pauls own presence as Nick Bunick was possible
some 2,000 years later. He touched upon how belief in reincarnation
was a part of the Jewish culture, especially with those who belonged
to the sect called the Pharisees, of which Paul was a member.
The second section continued with examples from history as to
how certain beliefs and biases stemmed from that time. Nick wanted
people to understand why there were differences in his memories as
Paul and some accounts described in Scripture. Some in the crowd
were starting to get a little restless. The history lesson was important
to those who wanted verification that Nick was indeed the return of
spirit and soul of Paul. Why had he returned? Why was he daring to
tell the world that he had a message? Nick noticed the oncoming
restlessness. But he felt groundwork had to be laid before he opened
the floor to questions. He turned the presentation around, at this
point, to reflect why he and this ballroom full of people had come
together this day.
Nick continued to describe his present-day journey and how it
had paralleled Pauls. This time, instead of Jeshua intervening,
angels had intervened in his life. And like then, he once again was
telling people about the loving messages he had learned from his
beloved friend. Seattle was his present-day Damascus, where he had
begun his ministry two millennia ago.
Like the previous gathering in Salem, Oregon, Nick guided his
audience through the history and the cultural dialog that had
produced concepts like hell and the devil, which really did not exist
during Jeshuas time. There had been no Satan with a capital S. The
only way Jeshua used such a term was in its cultural roots, where the
word connoted not a being, but a state of being. Like the Salem
gathering he watched smiles etch across the faces of those gathered
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 161
the symposium 161
as he revealed that the concept of hell had been created from a past
that used the notion metaphorically, specifically citing the word
Gehenna, which had been the actual garbage dump for the city of
Jerusalem. Sure, it had horrible smells, and, yes, fires burned there as
they do today in landfills, but the term was used then to describe the
punishment we put ourselves through when we are not in harmony
with the God-Within. Jeshua had been adamant about there NOT
being a punishing God, but a loving God.
Nick finished with a brief account of how The Messengers had
managed to go against the odds and become a bestseller in the
region. He described how major publishing house was going to be
the new publisher and take the book forth nationally as well as
internationally. And he reminded the crowd that the title of the book
was not simply about angels. It was about all who help to remind the
world how we can live in an atmosphere of love, peace, and well-
being. All who were in the ballroom were, themselves, messengers.
He thanked them for their support, their hope, their love. As the
lights hummed to full brightness, a resounding applause filled the
great space. It was intermission time, and everyone wanted to hear
what the angels had to say about what was to come.
Nick had stated before leaving the stage that questions would be
allowed before the beginning of the second half of the afternoons
program. Microphones were set in place as everyone took a break.
Rather than return to the green room to rest for the next part of his
talk, Nick circled back from behind the stage and shook hands with
those who wanted to meet him. The energy in the air was electric,
and he felt the need to immerse himself in it.
As the lights dimmed and the chatter of the crowd subsided,
Nick returned to the podium ready to field questions. It was time to
continue. We are going to have a question and answer period, now,
because once I start my next section, Im going to want everyone
focused and quiet without interruption as I take you through what
Jeshua taught me, and that is the healing of ones spirit.
Eyebrows were raised and glances exchanged as pockets of
murmuring spread throughout the crowd. It was as if everyone
knew they were being awakened to events that had been ancient,
even forgotten. This was to be a day of remembering.
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 162
As the first questioner grabbed a microphone, everyone settled

in for the next phase of the symposium. You have stated that parts
of Scripture have been subject to mistranslation. But what about the
letters attributed to you, as Paul? Are they accurate, and did you
write them?
Nick took a drink of water as he gathered his thoughts. Some
twenty-one documents have been attributed to Paul. Those documents
are the basis for the twelve letters, or epistles, of Paul found in todays
Scriptures. Through my memory as Paul, I am aware that over 100
letters were written during his lifetime. The crowd shuffled in their
chairs, all eyes forward. This was just the kind of stuff theyd come to
hear. In reviewing all the documents attributed to Paul, I have come
to realize that fourteen of the twenty-one documents, to which biblical
scholars refer, had actually been written by Paul.
I am aware that the Letter to the Hebrews was not written by
Paul, that one of the Letters to the Corinthians was actually a
combination of several different short letters that Paul had written at
that time to the community at Corinth. Also, Paul did not write the
Letter to the Ephesians, even though it has been attributed to him. In
his later years, Pauls eyesight was failing him, and he could no
longer see well enough to write. Keep in mind that writing letters in
those days was not like today. There was no e-mail, no ballpoint
pens, and no typewriters. In fact, there wasnt even paper as we
know it. Oftentimes, writing had to be done by dim light. So it fell to
others who were close to Paul to write for him. He would dictate the
message and they would write it down for him, or later compose the
letter at some future date when there was more time. This process,
in and of itself, led to some artistic license on the part of the
transcriber. That is the reason why biblical scholars of today realize
that some of the writings are not consistent with Pauls style,
grammar and word choices. Pauls name was affixed to these letters
even though he, himself, did not write them.
Fourteen of the documents that Paul did write are relatively
accurate, although certain errors have been made in translation of
words from those times. Some of those errors were certainly honest,
a matter of the differences between languages, while others leave
one to wonder whether word changes were deliberately made.
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 163
the symposium 163
Others were beginning to line up behind microphones, for the

audience now realized this was a chance to ask questions about a
time they had long wanted answers to. A well-dressed, thin lady
began asking a question at the same time a gentleman at one of the
other microphones began. The crowd laughed gently at the
enthusiasm. Nick motioned to the lady.
It has been said that Paul did not care for women. Yet women
seemed to play an important role with Jesus in what has been
written in The Messengers. In there, it is said that Mary had been
taught by the Essenes. How could this be if there were restrictions
regarding women participating in activities?
A good question, Nick rejoined. The Dead Sea Scrolls are the
foundation of written accounts of the Essenes, as we know them
today. However, these Scrolls have not been made public until just
recently. The Dead Sea Scrolls were found in the area of Qumran, not
far from Jerusalem. At Qumran, women played an important role in
the Essene community. Its not true, that you hear stories about
women not being allowed to participate in Essene activities, that
women didnt have an equal right. For they did. Women played a
very, very important part in the Essene way of life. Mary, as a young
girl, was taught by the Essenes at Mount Carmel. She underwent
training because they thought she was one of a number of young
women who they felt could be the vessel of delivery for the coming
Master, Jeshua. So, yes, Mount Carmel did exist, though not as well
known as Qumran. One of the reasons the Dead Sea Scrolls had been
held from the public, rests in the leader of the group in charge of
those Scrolls and their translations, a Father DeVault, who recently
passed away. The entire team of scholars in charge of the Dead Sea
Scrolls, except for one person, came from the clergy. And there are
teachings in the Scrolls that cause some concern to certain organized
religions. So the Scrolls have been kept from the public until the
Huntington Library, in Los Angeles, unilaterally decided to release
the microfiche version to the general public. It caused quite a stir.
But the Essenes did not have disrespect for women. Quite to the
contrary, women played a very important role in the community. At
Mount Carmel, there was a woman by the name of Judi, who was in
charge of the educational system of the community. In other words,
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 164
she was one of the ruling leaders. She not only was in charge of
Marys education, but years later, was also in charge of teaching her
young son, Jeshua.
Did Paul discriminate against women? The truth is the absolute
opposite: Paul had a great respect and love for women. If you read
the letters of Paul, the last paragraph of every letter in Scriptures, he
is thanking all those who are ministers and helpers of his churches
in every place he had written to. In every letter, he mentions almost
as many women, if not more, than he does men.
You must understand, that at that time, women and men had
different positions in their society. But at no time did Paul ever
discriminate against women. Women played a very important part
as apostulae, or teachers. They were also ministers in the early
Church. But unfortunately, the old boy network of the medieval
Church didnt want women involved, so they tried to eliminate any
knowledge of women having such a prominent role, and thats why
they didnt allow women to become priests.
A ruffle of applause moved through the audience as women
noted the struggle they had faced throughout history, objects of the
patriarchal era of religious history that plagued them to this day. The
gentleman who had waited patiently for his turn, waited again as
the applause quieted. How about the issue of Paul establishing a
requirement of celibacy among Church leaders? Has that not carried
over today into the Catholic and Orthodox religions?
Nick looked over the gathering of people. His heart went out to
them as he realized the centuries of bewilderment and difficulty they
had endured because of hierarchical attitudes during the Middle
Ages. It troubled him how convenient a vehicle Paul had become in
justifying the actions they took, after whole sections of Scripture had
been edited, even eliminated. Truly, it was time to set the record
straight. Whether present-day religions would acknowledge the
truth of what he was about to say was neither here nor there. It had
to be said. The truth is that Pauls position was that one could be a
minister of the Church and be married. But only if you had total
fidelity to that marriage. He felt it would discredit the ministers as
well as the churches and their teachings if these couples were not
completely faithful to one another.
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 165
the symposium 165
On the other hand, if one was single and wanted to be a

minister, Paul wanted that person to be celibate, so that the leaders
of the Church would not have affairs with the members of the
congregation. As you may recollect in The Messengers, this was a
problem in the early days of the Church. However, Paul also stated
that if you have such a love for a woman, or a man, wanting to have
a carnal relationship, then you should proceed in getting married,
rather than having the relationship while you were single. Again, he
was trying to protect their relationship as well as trying to prevent
his ministers from having affairs. He felt such behavior would
destroy credibility in the ministry and the teachings in that ministry.
It was only years later that the medieval Church changed this
doctrine, yet justifying those changes by saying that they were trying
to follow Pauls instructions. It was they who came up with the idea
of men being celibate, and they had reason for this. In those days, the
Church had tremendous wealth. It was concerned that if these clerics
married and had families, they would leave their wealth to their
wives and their children. Therefore, in order to prevent that from
happening, they were told they could not marry, so the wealth would
remain with the Church when they died. However, it is commonly
known that many of the Church leaders had mistresses and were
anything but celibate. Keep in mind, also, that many of the clerics of
those days were itinerant. They often did not have buildings and
communities. It was also easy for anybody to throw on Church garb
and proclaim to be a priest so that they would receive food and
whatever else they needed in the village they might be visiting. It was
a problem for the Church in those days. These itinerant clerics were
basically uncontrollable. The Church needed to control these clerics.
So the concept of tying clerics to regions was also initiated along with
celibacy. Paul was concerned with integrity and Church reputation.
The medieval Church was concerned with wealth and power.
Thank you, said the questioner as the next person stepped up
to a microphone. You say you are the reincarnation of Paul. Yet the
Scriptures do not mention reincarnation, and the Churches teach
against it. How do you account for this?
It was a common question Nick had become used to answering
during the many radio interviews that had already taken place.
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 166
Rather than give a quick answer, Nick decided to go into detail, for
he knew that people in the audience had to answer to others who
would ask them the same question, whether they were giving the
book out as a gift, or whether they would have discussions within
their families.
There were three sects of the Judaic religion. There were the
Sadducees, who did not know what happened to the soul or body
after death. The Essenes and the Pharisees were the other two sects.
Both believed in the souls ability to return through another body
what we call reincarnation. This belief was the dominant belief
among the people of that time. In modern Israel, the opposite is true.
The dominant sect then was called the Sadducees. I share this with
you because someone might ask, How can you stand before me and
say that you lived 2,000 years ago if this is in conflict with the
teachings of Jeshua, and the teachings of Paul?
Paul was educated as a Pharisee, and Jeshua was educated
among the Essenes. Both came from religious traditions that
believed in reincarnation. Personally, I want to say upfront that it
doesnt make a difference whether you believe in a single life or
reincarnation. It doesnt make any difference in terms of your
relationship to God. All thats important is how you live your life
and how you embrace the messages of God, the laws of God. But I
do want to share with you what the belief was at that time in history.
We find in the writings of the great historian, Flavius Josephus,
who was born in the year 37 A.D., just a few years after Jeshua was
crucified, Do you not remember that all pure spirits, when they
depart this life, obtain the most holy place in heaven, and they are
again sent into pure bodies...? Also, in his Antiquity of the Jews, we
find, Pharisees believe that their souls, after moral vigor in them
and virtue, shall have the power to revive them again.
Josephus was a Jew who was captured by the Romans while
they were tearing down the city of Jerusalem during the revolt of 70
A.D. Because of his brilliance, they eventually brought him to Rome
to serve as a historian. He died in 100 A.D.
The teachings of the Qabala represented a hidden wisdom
behind the Jewish Scriptures of those days. At the same time that the
Gospels were being written, Rabbi Simeon ben Joachim wrote,
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 167
the symposium 167
regarding the holy writings of the Zohar, All souls are subject to
trials of transmigration (or reincarnation) ... for the soul to reenter its
absolute substance to accomplish this end. They must develop all
the perfections, and if they have not fulfilled this during one life,
they must commence another, a third, and so forth, until they have
acquired the condition that fits them with their reunion with God.
In the writings of another historian, Philo of Alexandria, who
was born 20 years before Jeshua and died in 54 A.D., we find, and I
quote, The air is full of souls. Those that are nearest to earth,
descending to be tied to mortal bodies, return to other bodies,
designed to live in them. Prominent Christian leaders such as Justin
Martyr, Origen, and St. Gregory talked about reincarnation as part of
their teachings. Origen said, Every soul comes into this world
strengthened by the victories or weakened by the defeats of his
previous life. So these were the teachings of those times.
In 325 A.D., Constantine was emperor of Rome, and anointed
the first pope: Pope Damasus. The first Council of Nicea was called,
and they proceeded in hiring a group of scholars to translate the
Scriptures, which were then in ancient Latin, into contemporary
Latin. So the Scriptures had gone from the spoken word, Aramaic, to
ancient Greek, and then translated in ancient Latin, later to be
translated again into contemporary Latin. It took these appointed
scholars 28 years to translate these Scriptures into contemporary
Latin. And in the process, they made a decision to purge everything
dealing with reincarnation. The theology of that day was then to
endorse the belief that there was only one lifetime on earth. Along
with that belief was added the belief of a hell, a punishing God, and
a devil who they called Satan. And so it was official church doctrine
that the only way to receive salvation was through the Church. It
was the only way one could find redemption.
They made a decision, in their minds, that the way they could
control the lives of people was through fear, rather than through the
love of God. In doing so, they dramatically changed the teachings,
the messages, of Jeshua and Paul. In fact, you can look in Scriptures
today and find places they missed purging. Both in Mark and
Matthew, the disciples are saying to Jeshua, Here is a man who was
born blind at birth. Is he born blind at birth for punishment, because
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 168
of his previous sins? How could these sins be previous, if not from
another life?
In Matthew, we find Jeshua coming to Caesarea where he says
to his disciples, Who do you say that I am? And the disciples say,
Some say you are the prophet, Jeremiah. And others say you are the
prophet, Elijah. And Jeshuas reply is, No. I am not he who was the
prophet Elijah. He who was the prophet Elijah has already come,
and they have taken his life, just as surely as they will take mine.
And Matthew goes on to say that the disciples knew that he was
speaking of John the Baptist.
There are several other places where the purging was not
complete. To some in the audience, this was old news. They had
already resolved the issues around recognition of reincarnation. But
for others, this was a surprise, perhaps even a disturbing surprise.
Nick went on to give more examples in establishing credibility for
his account of being able to state that he was, indeed, the return of
Paul the Apostle. He cited the Fifth Ecumenical Council and its
decrees, in the year 553 A.D., called The Anathemas, which
ordained reincarnation to be heresy. What was also cited was the fact
that, then, Pope Vigilius and 42 percent of his bishops had boycotted
the Council because it was wrong, stating that the Council could not
change the teachings of Jeshua and Paul and all the great teachers
that had come after them. Intermittently, Nick would emphasize
again that it was not important to believe in reincarnation. It was
only important to live good lives, and to hear Jeshuas messages.
Now, I want to say that I applaud almost all teachings of any
Church of any Church that shares with its congregations the
messages of God that make us a better people and lead us to a better
life, closer to Gods wishes. The one area I truly feel bad about is
where a small percentage of the messages have been distorted. What
bothers me is that the Churches choose not to go back and look at
history and say that some mistakes were made in the medieval
Church 1600 years ago. Some mistakes were made. So let us correct
them now.
But they dont say that, and choose not to change their ways. I
am very concerned about that. For I believe in bringing all people
together, rather than separating people. But I have been told, Nick,
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 169
the symposium 169
your responsibility is to speak the truth as you saw it through the

memory of Paul. So thats what Im doing.
The audience responded with applause. It was a message that
resonated with their souls. Why all this separation? Why cant we
come together on the common topic of living lives that strive to
connect with God? Nicks eyes twinkled as he looked up. This was
his first talk in front of a large crowd. He had endured insults, even
attempts at exorcism over the radio airwaves while doing talk show
interviews. He had heard all kinds of strange questions and strange
logic. But here, he was accepted, he was understood. It was a good
feeling.
The next question, like the previous, was another that Nick
heard often in his tour across the country. Why is it in the Gospels
that they never mention that Paul and Jeshua knew each other?
Some in the crowd smiled, already knowing the premise to the
answer had already been addressed in The Messengers.
Paul was never a disciple of Jeshuas, Nick stated readily. The
word disciple comes from the ancient Latin word discipulus, which
means a pupil. Pauls relationship with Jeshua was a one-on-one
relationship. He was not a pupil, a discipulus. And, unlike the
disciples, Paul had a higher education, understood the depth of
what Jeshua was saying. Oftentimes, the disciples not only had a
hard time understanding what Jeshua was saying, but Paul would
see them bickering and arguing over their relationship to Jeshua.
Those disciples from Judea, the Jerusalem area, such as Matthew and
Barnabas were more educated, and less quarrelsome. But Paul really
and truly did not care for the disciples at that time. He didnt have
much respect for them, and they, in turn, had resentment toward
Paul because his relationship with Jeshua was not like theirs. They
traveled with Jeshua as a group, while Paul met personally with
Jeshua whenever the two of them were in Jerusalem. This
resentment became moot when Paul accepted his responsibility after
becoming an apostle.
Could you comment on Scriptures telling us that Paul had
persecuted the Christians, the questioner continued.
This simply is not true for two reasons. Firstly, the word
criticized should be substituted for the word persecuted. Whether
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 170
that translation we have come to read in the Gospels today was a

mistranslation or a deliberate slur at Paul is anybodys guess.
Secondly, the word Christian did not even exist at this time. There
were no Christians at this time. The word wasnt invented until
twelve years after Jeshua was crucified. Initially, his followers were
called The Brotherhood, or The Witnesses. Paul had no use for this
early Church organization, for they were telling people that they had
to give up their worldly goods to the Church, or God would punish
them if they didnt. This infuriated Paul. Jeshua never had said such
a thing. Paul had spoken against this practice, telling The
Brotherhood that it was wrong to be telling people this. He reminded
them that God does not punish, as Jeshua had taught them. He
berated them for frightening people, rather than coming from a place
of love, letting well-wishers voluntarily donate their abundance to
the cause, instead of threatening with Godly punishment. Paul was
also upset because this newfound wealth was attracting freeloaders
who were joining the movement simply to share in the communal
abundance. This, too, caused Paul to speak with disapproval. These
are not the teachings of Jeshua, he would say.
And that is why Paul did not become an apostle in the beginning.
It was actually five years later, while traveling to Damascus, that he
experienced a blinding vision. Jeshua appeared to Paul asking him to
become an apostle, to help spread Jeshuas messages.
We are asked to believe that Scripture tells us that Paul was
going to Damascus to persecute the Christian Jews there. Now I ask
you: Does it makes sense that a Jew from Jerusalem, a citizen of
Judea, could go 140 miles through the desert to a foreign country,
Syria, and be allowed to persecute people living there who were
Syrian citizens? He wouldnt have lasted five minutes before being
thrown in prison by Syrian officials. Paul was on his way to
Damascus for business reasons. He had a thriving business there
which required him to travel back and forth to his businesses in
Jerusalem. And finally, it is said that Paul was converted, which
simply is not true. He was already a follower of Jeshuas teachings.
What he did do was accept Jeshuas request that he himself become
a teacher of Jeshuas messages. It was a commitment, not a
conversion.
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 171
the symposium 171
The lines were growing longer around the microphones. It was

obvious that many wanted to hear more about what actually
happened with Paul and with Jeshua. Nick motioned once again for
a question because of competing microphones.
How did you feel at the time you went public with this
controversial information? a young woman asked. I understand
from your talk that the angels encouraged you. But what was going
on within your own mind at that time?
I realized that many people might have thought my coming out
of the closet with this information was an act of ego. But it wasnt. It
was the most humbling experience I ever had in my life. Each
morning and night I prayed to God to give me the courage and the
confidence to match the commitment I had made. I was concerned
about my family having their privacy, about what business
colleagues might say, about the consequences I might suffer with the
media. Here I was, a high-profile businessman in the Portland area,
sitting on the board of directors of a number of corporations, leaving
myself open for possible ridicule. It wasnt an easy time. When it
came to the media, I simply asked them, even if they chose not to
believe what I was sharing with them, to please treat the story with
dignity. And they did. I was very grateful. And here I am today.
The next question followed immediately. Nick, you are using
the words spirit and soul to describe your connection with Paul.
How do you differentiate the two? Are not they both the same
thing?
No, I have been shown by Spirit that spirit and soul are not the
same. When I speak of the spirit, I am talking about the part of us
which God has given as a gift. It is the part of God that is everlasting
and immortal. It can never change. On the other hand, our soul is the
collection of our personality, intellect, past-life memories, and the
values of our spirit. These can change with each human experience
we have. As a result of our human behavior, the soul can either
create rewards that are due us, or create scars or wounds as a result
of action on our part that are in violation of Gods messages. That is
the primary difference between soul and spirit. Next please.
Pointing at herself to make sure she was next, a older woman
asked, What was it like having your first angelic experience?
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 172
I was truly in awe, Nick confessed. I know that it has been

explained in detail in our book, The Messengers, but there was a part
that was left out. At one point, I actually said to the angels, I feel so
blessed that I am talking to God. They corrected me and said, Not
God, Nick, Gods guides. I have come to understand, totally, that
angels are truly Gods messengers. Every single person has angels in
their lives. It is one of the gifts that God gave us. From the day we
are born, we have an angel who is assigned to us, who is with us,
even until the time when our spirit and soul leaves our body. At
different times in our lives, as our own needs change, other angels
will come into our lives to help us through different experiences.
Angels give us hope when we need hope. They give us inspiration
when we need inspiration. Most people are not aware that angels are
in their lives, but they are there, if only people would open up to
them, acknowledge them, and ultimately recognize them.
Yes, he said pointing to the same lady who was indicating she
had a follow-up question.
But do you believe that everyone can have angelic
experiences? The 444 stories that were now coming forth from
different parts of the country was causing this topic to be one of the
most discussed. Questions paraded across the Internet and into the
offices. Consciousness about the angels was growing steadily.
I know without any question, with all my heart and soul, that
everyone of us can get in touch with our angels. It is as if you had a
radio in front of you, but the button is at the Off position. You must
turn the button to the On position, and then search to find the right
station. It may not happen the first time, it may not happen the first 50
times you try, but you have only to open your hearts in order for them
to communicate with you. But what is most important, you must invite
them in, you must believe they can and will help you, beyond any
doubt in your mind. They love you, they are with you to serve you.
Some people have closed their minds and hearts to the fact that
the angels are in our lives, and that is very, very unfortunate. On a
number of occasions, as I have done radio talk shows around the
country, I have had individuals call me who are angry and upset.
They tell me there is some passage in the Bible telling us that we are
not supposed to pray to angels, and they accuse me of blasphemy for
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 173
the symposium 173
implying that I am praying to angels. Well, my heart goes out to

those people. First of all, I know of no such passage in the Bible, and
I truly dont care. I dont know when it was written or if it was
written. For them to take any passage out of context, even if perhaps
it might have been written by Paul 2,000 years ago, is totally wrong
and irrelevant.
There are many passages in the Bible referring to the
importance of angels in our lives. But even that is not as relevant to
me as to what is happening today. We are truly in an age of miracles.
God is intervening in our lives more than ever before. I feel a great
sorrow for those people whose hearts and minds are closed because
they find one sentence among the many thousands of words in the
Bible that they choose to see in a fearful way. Why not focus on the
passage, Where there is fear, there is not love. Or perhaps the
passage that states that God is love, he who abides in love, abides in
God, and God in him.
Many more questions were asked and answered. Truly there was
a hunger in the land for what Nick had to share. It was as if people
were being given permission to live their spiritual lives the way they
felt they needed to be lived. The evening was wearing on, and the
lines to the microphones growing no shorter. Eventually, Paul White
had to give Nick the high sign to move on to the next part of the
program. OK, we have time for one last question, Nick said.
Can you tell us what Jeshua looked like? was the last question.
Of all the questions that Nick heard throughout his travels, this was
the most asked question. It inevitably brought a smile to his lips.
People wanted to have that connection to Jeshua through him. It was
a connection he was glad to provide them.
I have been sent renderings from others who felt they knew
what the face of Jesus was like, Nick offered. In one set of material,
the artist describing her work mentioned that she had taken the
liberty of making Jeshua a little huskier because he had been a
carpenter. There is a word that was used in an ancient language to
describe Jeshua, and that word was naggar. This word can be
interpreted in English either as a holy man, a wise man, or a
craftsman. Was Jeshua a holy man? Yes. Was he a wise man? Yes.
Somewhere along the line, someone chose to take the word naggar
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 174
and interpret it as a craftsman, which then made him into a

carpenter. Now it doesnt really make a difference. Jeshua was who
he was whether he was a carpenter or a fisherman or a holy man. But
he was not a carpenter. He was thinner than people tend to think of
him, because he traveled great lengths on foot. So he was wiry,
muscular but wiry. He had the most peaceful expression on his face
that made you feel like you never wanted to leave him. His eyes
were penetrating, a beautiful blue. Some people say he had dark
skin, others say he had in-between skin. The truth of the matter is
that Jeshua was from the house of David, as were his parents. In
Israel, today, you find all kinds of different colored people. The same
was true then. Those from the house of David were mostly fair
skinned, as was Jeshua. His hair fell down to his shoulders. His hair
was light colored as well, a light brownish with highlights of gold
from the sun. He was a handsome man.
Because so many have asked what he looked like, I have
commissioned an artist to do a portrait of Jeshua based upon my
memories as Paul. You will be able to see that picture shortly, and we
will make unlimited reproductions. I have been told by those who
have seen the sketches and the artwork that it is absolutely stunning.
You will have to make up your own mind. It is my legacy to the
world, from the memory of Paul. I hope you will cherish it as much
as Paul cherished Jeshuas love and friendship.
At this point in the symposium, Nick asked for no more
questions. With his notes in front of him and projection screen
darkened, he took a moment to gather himself in prayer. He then
asked those in the audience not to move around during this part of
his presentation, for he was going to share with them what Jeshua
had shared with him, as Paul, 2,000 years ago: how to call forth a
healing of ones spirit. All movement ceased. Everyone in the
ballroom sensed the emotion of the moment. They seemed to
understand that they were privy to a forgotten time when people
had walked with Jeshua. Before them was a man who remembered
that moment, remembered those days. And he was about to share all
that like no one else in our time has ever shared.
The symposium would change the hearts and even the lives of
many. Nicks presentation was more than professional, it exuded
Days.Ch9 2/12/03 4:39 PM Page 175
the symposium 175
authenticity. Later on, television interviews with some of those who

had attended the symposium struck those watching their TV screens
at home. To hear a woman candidly describe how she had
experienced a healing she never thought possible, and then to
respond lovingly and convincingly to skeptical questions from the
reporter, started a stir in the Northwest that would not be stopped.
Sales of The Messenger catapulted, setting off a sequence of events
that even Nick could not have expected. But where the light burns
brightly in the night, the flutter of moths can be heard. And in spite
of the outpouring of goodwill and compassion, the moths of night
began their flight toward the fledgling Great Tomorrow.
(
Days.Ch10 2/12/03 4:40 PM Page 177
10
(
VISITORS IN BLACK
W ith a jolt Gary bolted upright in bed, gasping for air as if

reliving his drowning experience from childhood. His eyes
searched the river of knotted sheets at his feet as if hoping to find
some answer to the question swirling in his head. With its red LEDs,
the clock radio on the nightstand signaled 4:44 am. How could he
find a way to warn Nick? How could Nick possibly understand
what had just transpired in his dream?
Gary worked with the dream world in ways few realize. He had
studied with some of the best who know about the Aboriginal
Dreamtime and the Way of Wyrd. Himself part Native American, he
knew well the legends of the dreamspeakers, those who could move
in and out of dreams bringing their messages to those who found
their dreams mysterious. Many considered Gary a gifted
dreamspeaker with his ability to become the dream, rather than
interpret the dream. What had just awakened him was no ordinary
dream. He knew that from the vividness of the colors, the powerful
feelings that haunted him even now, that Nick must be told.
That morning, in the offices of the Great Tomorrow, Gary sat
slumped in Beths guest chair. Beth would understand, perhaps even
177
Days.Ch10 2/12/03 4:40 PM Page 178
offer advice. Her wisdom had served Nick well was as executive
assistant. Beth and Nick were like bread and butter, though at times
one might wonder which was the bread and which was the butter.
After much hemming and hawing, Gary unloaded on Beth what had
hit him at 4:44 that morning. After listening with the attention of a
safecracker, she ordered him into Nicks office where the two men
now sat facing one another.
Mad Dog, you look like man with something on his mind.
Kinda. He paused, wondering what words would make him
sound less like an idiot. Nick, Ive had a power dream. I dont have
these very often, but when I do I pay close attention. Last night I had
a power dream about you.
Really? And what was this dream about?
The words in Garys mouth felt like marbles. Finally, his spit
them out, The dream was a warning. In the dream I saw you in
London.
Nick interrupted in his typical hard-pressing way. What time
period?
Well, uh, it felt like the near future. I can usually tell the time of
such premonitions by the distance the images are from me or
whether theyre clear or fuzzy. And the images were in the near-
distance rather than the far-distance. So this isnt that far away. While
you were in London you were eating at a restaurant with associates.
So this tells me that you were engaging in support of these men. Food
in a dream usually means some kind of fostering or nourishing of the
soul or the person involved in the event. The restaurant table then
turned into your office desk and you were writing checks. Behind I
could see this shadow figure looking over your shoulder. But the
shadow wasnt in your office, it was still in London. The feelings
coming off the shadow figure were ominous. Nick, there is a shadow
figure in London, and I think he means to do you ill; I think he is
trying to sabotage your efforts. There. Hed said it.
Nick rocked silently in his executive chair, the black leather
squeaking in cadence to his thoughts. A full minute passed as Nick
pondered what had just been presented. Sometimes Gary could be a
bit histrionic a real worry wart. But sometimes he made uncanny
predictions about the success of an ad or an event or a person
Days.Ch10 2/12/03 4:40 PM Page 179
visitors in black 179
wanting Nicks attention. Nicks fingers gripped the side of his head
as he finally rotated the chair around. Its been taken care of.
Are you sure? I wouldnt have had this dream if it had.
Dont worry about it, I know who youre talking about, and the
shadow figure has been removed.
Gary sat there dumbfounded. Just as he was about to leave, he
heard a commotion outside of the windows of the second-story
office. Two crows cawed like crazy, swirling around each other,
flying in wild-patterned circles and dives. Then, like a scene out of
Hitchcocks The Birds, the two crows dove at Nicks office window
and began pecking at the window in castanet style. Wings flapped
frantically as the two black visitors continued their cawing and
pecking on the window. Gary had seen birds fly up to a window for
brief seconds, but these two seemed unceasing in their efforts. It was
as if they were waiting for some kind of signal to end their ruckus.
Gary turned his attention to Nick, wanting to see if his friend would
catch a hint from the sight before them. Nicks only response was,
What do you make of that?
Gary returned his gaze to the two black crows still scrambling
against the window. Well, he started out, in shamanism the crow
is the one of the sacred messengers. Maybe they are here to bring a
message. Maybe they are here to enforce the message I brought you
about the shadow figure in London. At that point the birds abruptly
abandoned their demonstration and flew off.
Nick turned to Gary. Everything in London has been taken care
of, Nick stated in a way that meant the topic was closed. Gary arose
with a heavy sigh and left the office, shaking his head on the way out.
In the months that followed, Nick would turn the tables and
warn Gary that he was being used by a man with a message,
courting his favor. But Gary would not listen to Nicks admonitions.
How could this man with such a heavenly message be capable of
using others? What irony that both of these men would try to rescue
the other while neither would listen to the other, only to suffer the
same fate. Even Atira would try on more than one occasion to warn
both Gary and Nick of shady situations, only to be dismissed in her
efforts. The two crows attacking Nicks office window, as it would
turn out, symbolized the fate of both men. For Nick would suffer
Days.Ch10 2/12/03 4:40 PM Page 180
betrayal at the hands of a shadow figure in London, putting him and

his dreams at threat while Gary would suffer disillusionment over
being used by a man he thought was his friend. What is it about
betrayal that allows it to perform such an important role in life?
Poets and philosophers have called betrayal the great teacher,
while others have called it the kiss of Judas. But without Judas
would there have been the Resurrection? Before telling Judas, Be
quick about your business, did not Jeshua say, I know the kind of
men I chose. My purpose here is the fulfillment of the Scripture.
When it comes to the purposes of the angels, who knows what is
meant to be fulfilled?
In the years that followed, both Nick and Gary would attempt to
sift through the ashes of their betrayals. And like the proverbial
phoenix rising from the ashes, each would find his new destiny in
the children of this world. Nick would involve himself in a program
called Child Help USA, started by two amazing women, Yvonne
Fedderson and Sara OMeara. Both women had been childhood
celebrities from the Father Knows Best TV series of the 50s. And
both would join forces in creating an organization after the Vietnam
War that would airlift orphans of American servicemen with Asian
girlfriends to the United States. Eventually, many orphanages were
set up in Asia to address the woes of other children. Their work
caught the eye of the U.S. government, which asked them if they
could do something for American children. And thus, Childhelp
USA was founded. With the help of Merv Griffin, a dude ranch was
converted into a village in the Phoenix area where orphaned
children could heal emotionally and physically. Presently there are
orphanages all around the United States. Recovery programs for
abused and battered children have allowed the foundation to take
responsibility for these kids, permanently removing them from their
parents while they heal. Once recovery is completed, Childhelp USA
then proceeds either to find adoptive families or to place the kids in
competent foster care programs.
Nick became involved with Childhelp USA after Yvonee and
Sara learned about the efforts of The Great Tomorrow also to assist
children. In December of 2001, Sara, Yvonne, and Nick, along with
members of the staff, attended a formal function in Washington,
Days.Ch10 2/12/03 4:40 PM Page 181
visitors in black 181
D.C., in which Sara and Yvonne received a Lifetime Achievement

Award from the President and First Lady. Childhelp USA was
honored as one of the outstanding humanitarian foundations in the
United States.
Gary, like Nick, later found himself also working with children
in ways he never suspected. Unlike Nicks humanitarian programs
in The Great Tomorrow, Gary one day found himself incidentally
talking before children who were very gifted, what some call
Indigo Children. They, in turn, had questions of him, which
caused him to begin thinking differently about his world and about
his past lessons stemming from betrayal. In his own quiet way, he
began to give some of these kids a voice in how to change our world,
bringing them before small groups of people, one city at a time.
Modest as his efforts were, such small beginnings are like the
planting of a mustard seed: Who knows how big the tree will grow?
No matter which way you look at it, the vision of a great
tomorrow looms before us. The lessons that Nick and Gary faced,
wrestled with, and eventually overcame, are now being passed on to
the youth who come into their lives. As long as there is hope, no
darkness can quench the light that comes with a single child entering
our world. It is these healed and gifted children who will carry the
light of a great tomorrow before us. As Tennyson put it, The child
is the father of the man.
(
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 183
11
(
THE GREAT RETURN
F rom the very beginning, Nick had been told by the angels that
he was just one of many sources of light shining throughout
the world. Julia had already been aware of this notion. The past-life
regressions that Nick and Julia conveyed in The Messengers
portrayed a world, 2,000 years ago, in the midst of change, especially
spiritual change. After Jeshuas crucifixion, Saul, who would later be
called Paul, became a guiding force in the formation of what
eventually would be called Christianity. One of the questions asked
most often of Nick is, Why have you returned? And Are there
others, besides you, who are here from that time? As in those days,
when Paul walked with the Master, Nick finds himself in a world
captured in the midst of change.
Traveling throughout the country speaking before people, Nick
witnessed repeated incidents accentuating the angelic message that
others also would be bringing forth the Light. Letters began arriving
from readers who felt they, also, had memories reflecting back to the
time of Jeshua. Other letters confessed to a strong feeling that many
from that time were here. One letter addressing Nicks not being alone
in his journey came from a sports photographer living in San Diego.
183
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 184
May 31, 1997
Dear Nick,
A little less than two months ago, my wifes best friend told her she
was sending a book I might enjoy reading. I am a 46-year-old
freelance photographer, and just returned from assignment
photographing professional spring-training baseball in Arizona.
While in Arizona, I had some camera gear stolen the first night,
and two days later I was in an auto accident.
My spirits werent exactly soaring at the time. One day, I noticed a

book sitting by our bed. It was The Messengers. I asked my wife if
that was the book her friend had told her about. She said Yes. I
picked it up and didnt put it down for 24 hours, except to sleep.
Mind you, I have never read a book in 24 hours. I am not religious
by any means but was consumed by this book. And it has been in
my thoughts daily since I read it!
I was raised a Catholic by my parents, but at age eight or nine I

decided that going to church was not for me. In later years, I
questioned a few things I had learned in catechism ... mainly the
statement God is Love. I couldnt understand how, or why,
babies would be born deformed or with deadly diseases, or why
good people would die when murderers would live, if God loved
everyone. I believed in the basic teachings of Jesus be good to
your fellow man, etc. and was raised in that manner. Now,
thanks to Messengers, I understand! In fact, I seem to understand so
well it stuns me. I was especially struck by the passage in chapter
seven where you write in your journal, and dont remember
writing it, realizing the next day it was a message from the angels
to you. I still read this passage about courage and integrity
frequently, and it is like Im reading it for the first time.
Im usually the guy that needs to see to believe, but now I feel
I KNOW Gods Love, and why things are the way they are. Which
brings me to my next point: the auto accident I was recently in.
I was outside Tucson, Arizona a passenger in a car which was

hit by another car going about 45 mph. That car hit about one foot
behind where I was sitting in the front passenger seat. It was like
an explosion next to me. Yet, after crawling out of the totaled car, I
walked away from the accident. Other than cuts on my face and a
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 185
the great return 185
bloody nose (I think I punched myself when the air bag went off),
I was fine. What I remember most is feeling protected ... like
something was surrounding me. I cant say if the air bag made me
feel that way, but I feel more like something was protecting me,
shielding me from harm.
Even though I have questioned God up until now I have

believed in angels (go figure?). I have never seen one, and I cant
say why I believe, but I do. Later that evening, my friend who
was driving, and also was not hurt and I were waiting for a ride
in the Park watching a full moon rise over thousands of cactus. I
told him I felt we were protected that day by angels. Ive never said
that to anyone; and thats before I read The Messengers!
Since reading Messengers, I have had a reading by a woman in

Richmond, California, who can also see past lives (Im still working
on understanding this). She saw me in a temple, wearing a robe with
a turban-type thing on my head. She said I was a teacher-healer, like
an apostle, and I have done this in many lives. Which (I think Im
getting near the end here) brings me to my most current experience.
I have just finished Messengers for the second time, once again
reading it in 24 hours. I was driving to Los Angeles for an
assignment to photograph the Braves-Dodgers game. While
driving, I was thinking of something you said in the book; that
there was a code within. As I was thinking of that, suddenly the
words, Theyre all here boomed in my head. I said, What? to
myself, and the words boomed again, Theyre all here! I
mentioned that I have been thinking a lot about Messengers, and
occasionally I hear things in my head, and Im not sure if it is just
me talking to myself or what. But this was totally different.
My wife, yourself, and others have said something big is going to
happen. This may not be anything new to you (of course you have
inside help), but it tells me, through what I heard, that all the
players are definitely on this planet. I seem to know this as sure
as Im typing it.
I totally agree with you, Nick, that this planet is in need of healing.
I feel women are going to play a great part in this. The healing,
through the power of Love that God has blessed us with, has
started. I anxiously await your next book, and Im very interested
in The Great Tomorrow and any seminars you may have. If I can
help in any way, I am more than willing!
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 186
Thank you, Nick ... no, bless your heart ... for The Messengers. All my
questions are now answered. One-stop shopping ... gotta love it!!
I hope to hear from you soon. The very best to you and yours.
Kirk
Kirks comment, I anxiously await your next book, and Im

very interested in The Great Tomorrow ... echoed the sentiment of
many readers. In collecting material for the next book, Nick asked
Julia Ingram, the hypnotherapist who had helped him access his
memories as Paul, as well as co-author The Messengers, again to
regress him using hypnosis. The intention, this time, was not only to
interview him through the mind of Paul, but to go into even higher
realms to spirit-mind, what some call the oversoul. Julia explained
the concept to Nick thusly:
I think of my body, or yours, or anyones, as an energetic
container. The body does not even begin to contain all of who we are.
We are, at the most basic level, a spirit inhabiting a body. In this body
we are a personality. Even more, we are a soul, a composite of all the
personalities we have been or shall be; but, even more than that, we
are spirit-mind, which extends even beyond what we know as
ourselves, which connects with all of life, all of consciousness. And
within all of that is what we recognize as our present personality.
As before, Nick regressed easily back to the time of the Apostles.
We find Paul in his later years, in his sixties, resting in his favorite
spot his garden.
Julia (J): Are you indoors or outdoors today?
Paul (P): I am outdoors, sitting in my yard
J: Are you alone today or do you have company?
P: By myself, right now. [Nicks face has taken on the look of a
man several years his senior. Pauls voice was slower in
cadence than Nicks normally is. One is left with the
impression of visiting a retired, gentle grandfather who has
lived much of life. His conversation is that of an old man
remembering his past days with fondness.]
J: Its very nice to meet you again, Paul.
P: Thank you.
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 187
J: Are you in the mood to have a conversation today?

P: Surely. [He seems surprised by the question. Julia is aware
that Paul enjoyed many visitors at his villa where he is
essentially under what our culture would term house
arrest.]
Kirk had reflected in his letter what many in our culture are
waking up to, when he said, I totally agree with you, Nick, that this
planet is in need of healing. I feel women are going to play a great
part in this. The healing, through the power of love that God has
blessed us with has already started. Julia wondered if the women
who were a part of Jeshuas life had played a role in the conception
of the early Church. She was particularly interested in learning if
Mary, the mother of Jeshua, had been involved.
J: One of the questions I have for you has to do with Jeshuas
mother, Mary. [Jeshua is what Paul called Jesus. The word
Jesus is the Greek translation of Jeshua.] We know that you
visited her home and that she came to Bethany from time to
time. Could you tell us more about her? What was she like?
P: Mary settled in Bethany after Jeshua left us. For quite a while,
her son and daughter were living there with her. Her son,
James, moved there. She was a very, very sweet, loving
woman. Gentle and quiet and very understanding. And wise
in her own little way.
J: Jeshuas death must have been hard on everybody. How did
she handle her grief? Did you notice?
P: She was in total pain, and she was hurt. It took her quite a
while to make the adjustments. I didnt come in contact with
her that often. But when I did, I could see her pain.
J: After you joined the movement, did you have more
interaction with her? Did the women participate?
P: Participate in what?
J: Let me ask the question differently. Was Mary consulted
about things? Did people ask Would Jeshua have wanted
this? Or, Do you think thats what Jeshua meant?
Anything like that?
P: No. She was consulted regarding his death where to take
his body. But I dont recall her being consulted on any
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 188
decisions that were made with the apostuli, the apostles,

when they formed the brotherhood. Nor was she consulted
about their activities afterwards.
J: How soon was it that James was made the figurehead, if you
will? Do you know? [Julia knows about James from
regression information described in The Messengers. She is
aware of the role of James, based upon what she had learned
from the history of the early Church, through Paul.]
P: Yes, I know. Cephas [Peters original name] was actually in
charge at first, along with Stephen and Lucius. Lucius
became the records keeper, and Stephen was the treasurer.
They brought James in originally just to give additional
credibility to what they were doing, since he was Jeshuas
younger brother. He was a quiet man, unassuming, but very
bright. And he took on more and more responsibilities after
the first year (after the Crucifixion), and became the
figurehead leader. But in a sense, he never had full
agreement with the other apostles regarding some of the
direction that the brotherhood was going.
J: In fact, he was sort of an antagonist about it in the beginning.
I remember your saying that he was even critical of Jeshua.
P: Oh, youre going back.
J: Well, yes, way back.
P: Yes. Yes. He was not supportive when the family was living
in Capernaum. He was not supportive of Jeshua. But he
accepted Jeshuas teachings and ministries towards the last
two years or so of Jeshuas life on earth. He was
uncompromising on a number of things. He never, never did
agree with the others that we could bring Jeshua to the
pagans and heathens. He always insisted, even to the day he
died, that you must be Judaic and convert, accepting
Judaism, in order to have Jeshua as your guide to God.
J: More aligned with your position?
P: Well, I compromised my position. He never did. He went off
on a tangent with a group called the Ebionites.
J: Could you say more about the Ebionites?
P: Well, they were basically committed to having the Judaic law
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 189
as your basis for becoming what we called the

brotherhood, which eventually became the Christians.
This happened almost twelve years after Jeshua passed
away, left us. In Antioch, the name Christians was adopted
to identify those who accepted Jeshua as the Messiah. There
were several splinter groups, and one of the groups was lead
by James. That group splintered away from the rest of us
when they chose to go in a different direction, in terms of
teachings.
History tells us that the Ebionites (a Hebrew word meaning
poor men) were ultraconservative Jewish members of the early
church. Irenaeus tells us that the Ebionites believed that Christ was
a divinely endowed man, and that Paul was an apostate from the
Mosaic law. Hippolytus and Origen divided the Ebionites into two
classes: those that accepted the notion of a virgin birth and those that
didnt. But both factions rejected the epistles of Paul. Epiphanius
reveals to us that the Ebionites and the faction known as The
Nazarenes, were one and the same.
J: What were the other splinter groups?
P: Well, they had different names, but the primary one of course
was the one lead by Cephas [Peter] and myself. The other
James [known in history as James the Greater, son of
Zebedee], as well as others accepted the compromises. They
started out with 70 apostles after they organized themselves
after Jeshua died. They took the number 70 from a similar
number of members in the Sanhedrin. And as some of them
traveled in their missions, converting people to accept
Jeshua, they would take slightly different directions and
tacks in their teachings. Cephas taught as he wanted to teach,
which was different than how I taught. And Apollos, Titus,
and others taught others in their own way. That was always
a constant challenge. Since there would be more than one
missionary that would go through a region, people got
exposed to teachings from different missionaries using
different tacks.
J: Yes. Was there anything else different about the way James
was teaching to his faction?
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 190
P: He relied very heavily on Judaic law. He taught more as an

intellectual than one who would teach from the heart. I
didnt have a lot of contact with him. I primarily got to know
him after one of my journeys when I came back to Jerusalem,
and stayed for almost three years. [James, Jeshuas brother,
was also known as James of Jerusalem.] I tried to make
decisions as to how we were going to proceed in reference to
the pagans accepting Jeshua.
J: Im curious about Bartholomew and Thomas and that group.
Was that yet another splinter group, or were they more
aligned with already established groups?
P: No. They were fine. They supported us with the majority of
people, with what the apostles wanted to do. I relied very
heavily on Silas and Timothy those last several years of my
journeys.
J: Good allies?
P: Well, wed go into an area and, more or less, I would try to
break through to develop acceptance and create interest.
Then I would have Silas and Timothy join me as we did in
Athens, then as we did in Corinth. And I would leave them
there. I would leave them there and go on to the next place in
my journeys. Then I would call for them in the next place I
went, have them join me. It was very important that, once we
had a fairly good number of people accept our teachings, I
would move on and Timothy and Silas would appoint the
ministers and leaders of the new church. They might stay for
six months or a year until I called them again to the next
place. And we would then do the same thing. I would use
Timothy, also, to take my letters to other places. There was an
imperial postal system that was created by Augustus, but I
didnt want to rely on that. So, many times I would have
Timothy take important messages for me letters I had
written to other places. Eventually, I had him stay in
Ephesus and settle there to administrate the church.
J: And thats where he remained?
P: Well, he used to come to Rome to visit me. I wanted to see
him my last time before I passed away in Rome. For I knew
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 191
I didnt have a long time left in my body. [Notice how Paul is

talking in the past tense of his death. Julia notices this. It is
what she was referring to earlier about having access to the
greater consciousness of the soul-mind. Her word for this is
the oversoul. Paul has drifted into his oversoul
consciousness.]
J: Could you please return to the time when Timothy came to
see you in Rome?
P: Yes. He brought Mark with him. And he brought a number
of different writings I had left behind. He also brought my
favorite cloak I had left behind.
J: You had left that in Ephesus?
P: No. Troas. I had asked them to deliver that for me.
J: How long has it been since youve seen each other?
P: Its been several months, but we communicate.
J: What are his responsibilities, now?
P: Hes the chief administrator in Ephesus, and he has help
from others. [Historians have given Timothy the title Bishop
of Ephesus but it appears that no such religious title existed
in Pauls time.] Im trying to encourage him to handle the
different factions: the wealthy, the poor, and the merchants,
for there are many factions in Ephesus. Every area has its
own problems rather unique to their area. Im trying to help
Timothy learn to handle the different personalities. He
doesnt like to alienate people or have confrontations, so I
have to encourage him to be stronger in terms of making his
opinions and his positions felt.
J: He has a softer personality than yours?
P: Well, I dont know if its softer than mine. I dont want to
evaluate my personality. But Timothy is a very gentle soul,
very loving, and I encourage him, at times, to be stronger and
to be more demanding. Sometimes he doesnt express
himself when he feels he might be imposing on somebody.
J: Was there anyone else who would come and visit like
Timothy did?
P: At different times, different people. But Timothy was very
special to me. Luke spent a lot of time with me, also, when I
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 192
was in Rome. So, Luke was there a lot, but he wasnt

traveling. He was a Greek, and he didnt have the Judaic law
background. Silas also spent time with me. Id say Timothy
was my most important visitor, most important companion,
and the one I developed a special fondness for. He is much
younger than I am.
J: It sounds like you two were very close.
P: Yes. And there were times when I feel like I might get close
to Mark. Mark disappointed me when he was younger.
Although we became close again, later on, when years went
by and he had matured more.
J: You mentioned that Timothy brought you some papers along
with your cloak. Were there any personal messages from
anyone else, say, for instance, Mary?
P: You mean Mary, Jeshuas mother?
J: Yes, did she write you? Or did Timothy bring you a message
from her?
P: No. At this point, Mary had passed on. She passed away in
Ephesus. She had moved there after we had established a
church community there. She was very close to Timothy. He
watched over her the last couple of years.
J: So, she moved from Bethany to Ephesus?
P: Yes, along with Jeshuas sister and another young lady who
was a caretaker.
J: Who was that? Do you remember her name?
P: I dont remember, but she wasnt from Jerusalem. She was
actually introduced to Mary by Timothys mother, Eunice. I
dont remember her name. Timothy was Greek. His mother
Eunice and his grandmother, Lois, were very devoted. They
had accepted Jeshua. And Timothy was close to his mother,
Eunice.
J: Was John in Ephesus as well?
P: John? Which John? Are you talking about Zebedees son?
One of the followers of Jeshua?
J: Yes.
P: John traveled to different places. He was very, very active, as
I was.
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 193
J: So he would be in Ephesus from time to time?

P: Well, probably at one time or another they all were. Many of
the different teachers (apostles) passed through Ephesus.
John was more active in other parts, other regions. He was
one of the leading teachers. He spent some time in Ephesus,
though, yes.
J: Did Mary every try to contact you while you were in Rome?
P: I didnt have a very close relationship to Mary. When she
came to Jerusalem, before I was an apostle, I wasnt involved
very much with those other people who were with Jeshua.
And I got to know Mary after my experience on my way to
Damascus, when I became one of them. I stayed in
Jerusalem for several years before I started traveling, and it
was during that period that I saw Mary several times. I was
never very close to Mary. I had no occasion to get close to
her.
J: What youre saying is that she didnt attempt to contact you
personally?
P: She would send me greetings through other people, and
words of encouragement. Things of that nature. But she
didnt try to give me advice to my knowledge. She was a
very sweet lady. There was something very special about her.
I wish I had spent more time with her.
J: Did you get to know her daughter, Ruth? [Julia knows this
name from The Messengers information.]
P: Well, not as well as I knew Mary. I probably knew Ruth a
little less. She was a sweet young lady. Ruth was heavier in
her body than Mary was. She always had a smile on her face,
very upbeat personality. Where Mary was more serious.
J: Could you tell us anything you may have heard about the
early Essene community before Jeshua was born, and if Mary
was a part of that?
P: Yes. There were two Essene communities that I am aware of.
One was called Qumran, and it was a little more than a half
days walk from Jerusalem going towards the Jordan
River. The other one was along the Great Sea [Mediterranean
Sea] at Mount Carmel in the province of Samaria. When
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 194
Mary was a child growing up in Nazareth, she spent, Im

told, a lot of time with the Essenes at Mount Carmel from the
time she was a little child.
J: Was she treated any differently from the other children, or
was she considered special among any of the others?
P: I wouldnt know that. Although I know she was a very
special person. But Im told that her training was very
important. It had a major influence on Jeshua because of her
teaching him when he was younger, before he went to
Alexandria, in Egypt.
J: You mentioned that Luke visited you often. What were some
of the reasons for his visits?
P: I think Luke was fascinated by what had happened, and
became very devoted to the teachings of Jeshua through me.
He didnt understand. He had a dislike for the Judaic
Christians, which bothered me. And I tried to temper that.
J: How would he express his dislike?
P: His background and demeanor was partial towards the
gentile Christians, and he felt that the teachings of Jeshua
should be accepted and practiced as the gentile Christians
were doing it, because the Judaic Christians were involving
the Judaic laws and background. Since he didnt have that
background, he couldnt identify with it, and thought of
them as adversaries of the gentile Christians, which, of
course, they were not in most cases. In some places they
were, but not in most cases.
J: It is said that Luke was a physician. Is that true?
P: He had medical training, yes. He had practiced as a
physician for several years. When he was with me, he was
always diagnosing my body. (Paul is laughing.)
J: What kinds of diagnoses?
P: Oh, I was having difficulty with my eyes. He was always
criticizing me for not eating, or the way I ate. I was very
physically active until those last several years in Caesarea,
and then in Rome. My body started to fail me when I no
longer journeyed.
J: Were you aware whether Luke did any writing in Rome?
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 195
P: He wrote to his family. What kind of writing are you talking

about? He didnt write books, to my knowledge.
J: And you dont know if he wrote to any of the other apostles?
P: He wasnt close to the other apostles. Again, they were
Judaic, most of them, and he was not. I know he would
constantly ask many, many questions when he was around
me. He would write notes down of many of those
conversations, if thats what you mean by writing.
J: What kinds of questions did he like to ask, in particular?
P: He seemed fascinated with the history of my activities after
the Damascus incident. He would ask many questions about
that point and on. But then, when he would repeat the
answers to me later on, I would have to go over them again
because he had a tendency to slant them. He had his own
perspective of what he wanted them to mean, sometimes. So
I would have to correct this.
J: Did this happen often?
P: It happened often. I felt he had some animosity towards the
Judaic people, which I felt was inappropriate. But again, he
wasnt there. He came from a different culture, so, I guess
that was his slant on things. He had difficulty being objective
about it.
Of the four Gospel writers, three embraced the Jewish faith
Matthew, Mark, and John. Only John and Matthew had been
disciples of Jeshua during his time of his ministry, for Mark was only
nine years old at the time of Jeshuas crucifixion, according to Pauls
memories. The first of the Gospels was written by Mark around the
time of Pauls death, in the year 65 A.D. Jeshua died somewhere
around the year 33 A.D. So it becomes apparent that some 30 years
or more had passed between the written word of biblical accounts
and the actual events in Jeshuas life. For over 30 years, the story of
Jeshua had been repeated over and over again, from one person to
another, before being written down. That was the way information
was preserved in those days through an oral tradition. It was
extremely expensive, as well as difficult, for people to write down
information. Papyrus, or goat parchment, was required to write
down a single copy of any document or letter. To make additional
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 196
copies, a person would have to create them by hand, one at a time,

using the same laborious method.
For over 30 years, the story of Jeshua had been repeated, before
Mark put the story to parchment. It is his document that some
biblical historians call the Q Manuscript, the primary source of
information for the other Gospels. Other biblical scholars assert
Thomas was the author of the Q Manuscript and that Mark, as well
as the other gospel writers, drew from the Q Manuscript2.
Obviously, because of his young age, Mark received his information
through hearing stories from the other disciples, who were grown
men at the time Jeshua walked the earth. Mark, himself, was
somewhere around the age of 39 when he decided to write down his
version of Jeshuas life, most likely for a new generation.
As for the Gospel of Luke. As Paul tells us, unlike the other
gospel writers, Luke was Greek, and did not know the Judaic faith
nor the dominant language of that area of the Middle East: Aramaic.
Luke had been a pagan later to become a gentile Christian who
accepted Jeshua. Since Luke had never met Jeshua, never lived in
Jerusalem, and most likely received all his information from the other
apostles, or from repeated verbal stories, one has to ask to what
degree of accuracy can we attribute toward the writings of Luke?
J: Thank you. In looking back over all that has happened since
Jeshuas crucifixion, is there anything you wish you could
have done differently, or that you wish you could change?
P: I wish that I could have had a greater influence and
understanding. First of all, I wish I could have had greater
understanding. I thought Jeshua was a threat to the Jewish
leaders, to the Levites who managed the temples of the
Sanhedrin. The Levites ran the temples. And I thought thats
where the threat was, and would eventually cost Jeshua his
life. I had anticipated that, and not the fact that he would
become a threat to the Romans. So, I wish I had understood
that better, and could have influenced him. Not that he
would have accepted my thoughts, necessarily. He made his
own decisions. But obviously, if he had been able to
2 The Lost Gospel: The Book of Q & Christian Origins by Burton L. Mack; Harper San
Francisco, 1994
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 197
anticipate it, he could have backed off in some of the areas

that caused concern, which cost Jeshua his life.
J: So youre really saying that the Romans were the real threat,
not the Levites?
P: The Romans were the only ones who could take his life.
There were no others. The Judaic laws were strictly civil
laws. They didnt have the ability to take someones life.
J: Why did the Romans feel Jeshua was a threat?
P: After Jeshua started doing his healings, he became very
visible and well known in Jerusalem because of the miracles
he was performing. And after Lazarus was revived some
say Lazarus had died, others say he was in a state of
unconsciousness, but regardless, he was revived Jeshua
started drawing crowds in the thousands when he would
come to speak and do healings. The Romans got frightened
over the influence he was having and they had no
influence over him, as they did with the Sanhedrin.
J: They thought their authority could be undermined?
P: Yes. Here was an individual with whom they had no
relationship, who now was becoming tremendously
influential among the people of Jerusalem. And they were
constantly concerned about potential uprisings. But as long
as the people were under the control of the Sanhedrin, the
priests, and the civil authorities, there was little concern. But
they became greatly concerned when an individual would
become popular outside of these areas where they had
control.
Nicks memories as Paul, around the time of his death, tell us of
a time when the Judaic people were rebelling against Rome. Later,
General Titus, with 16,000 troops, would lay siege to Jerusalem.
During the following years, the Romans would create havoc and
slaughter in Jerusalem, killing thousands of rebellious citizens
fighting for their independence. The magnificent temple of Solomon
would be destroyed. Shortly thereafter, Emperor Nero would
declare the Christian community responsible for the great fire that
burned down a large portion of Romes inner city. Nero would
respond by tying Christians to stakes in his castle gardens, soaking
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 198
them in oil, and turning them into human torches. The brutality of
the Roman empire would be especially felt by the Jewish people
who also practiced the newly found religion known as Christianity.
This was the atmosphere that existed at the time the four
Gospels were written. Is there any wonder that the writers took care
not to alienate the Romans, and, instead, implied that Jewish
religious leaders were responsible for the death of Jeshua? In spite of
the fact that it was only the Romans who had the ability to try a
person for a capital crime, and declare the death penalty, the writers
of the Gospels were careful to have it appear that the decision for
taking Jeshuas life rested upon the Jewish leaders, as opposed to the
Romans, who had total control in such decision-making. This was
one of the most unfortunate acts in the history of religion. This
caution not to alienate the Romans, for fear of further reprisal,
would become the false foundation for 2,000 years of anti-Semitism
throughout the world.
Julia was beginning to realize that there may be more to the
overall picture of what happened after Pauls death besides the
politics of that time. But how to get access to such information? At
the end of Pauls life, Christianity did not yet exist as a religion.
Consequences of decisions made by Paul would not be realized for
another two or three centuries, in some cases. Certainly, the world
wanted to know why Pauls spirit and soul had returned to our era.
Perhaps there were reasons that had not been brought forth in
previous regression sessions. On one previous occasion, Julia had
explored an aspect of Pauls memory not previously attempted via
the oversoul. If one can gain access to higher realms of
consciousness, what some psychologists might refer to as the
superconscious, then one has the ability to explore a greater pool of
knowledge within the soul. But this isnt always possible, isnt
always allowed. It must be to the souls higher good that such
explorations are attempted, while making sure outside influences
are not allowed in. Once before, such access had been allowed, and,
at that time, cautions were announced by Pauls oversoul. So,
diligently, Julia decided to move Pauls memories into the realm of
the oversoul. This would allow questions of both Paul and Nick to
be asked simultaneously. It would allow access to unknown
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 199
knowledge if Julia were allowed entrance to such consciousness.

Thus began a quest that surprised not only Julia, but any who would
later hear the transcriptions.
J: Thank you very much. Okay. Let us leave this period of time.
Take a breath. Lets please now direct your attention to your
oversoul, your spirit-mind. Just imagine yourself moving up.
Moving higher and higher. Good. Thank you. Can you tell us
what you see and feel at this moment?
P: I feel Gods love, Gods guidance. I feel the power of God. I
feel strength, spiritual strength.
What follows is the unfolding of Paul/Nicks spirit-mind. Keep
in mind that both the personalities of Nick and Paul can be accessed
(as can other lifetimes), and are present, as knowledge from the past,
present, and future combined. In such a state of consciousness, there
is no line drawn between what we call the past and the future. Time
does not exist as we know it. It is with a certain delicateness that
Julia must tread this realm, for her own cultural predisposition for
linearity simply will not apply. She is a visitor into the region of
Spirit.
J: We would like to ask if you could speak on our behalf as to
what Jeshua might wish to say to us at this time and this
place.
P: Jeshua commends you for your courage, and for your taking
on the responsibilities of the mission we are all doing that
you are doing with Nick. You are being guided by Spirit and
protected by Spirit. And Spirit is grateful for your accepting
these responsibilities.
J: Can you relate to us whether those who were called apostles
are in body at this time?
P: There were so many more apostles than what you think of as
apostles.
J: Just speak of the original twelve then.
P: There were not originally twelve.
J: How many were there?
P: There were 70. It was modeled after the Sanhedrin, except
these did not have to be a father with a son in order to
qualify. Some have been here and already passed over. Not
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 200
because of Gods intent, but because of how society

functions. If some had not passed over, they would all be
alive on earth now, yes.
J: All 70?
P: And many more that came after the 70, who also became
teachers (apostuli). All, who were there 2,000 years, who
played a part, a positive part in the messages of Jeshua
helping to provide that message to others their spirit and
souls have been born within this lifetime. All, except those
who, for one reason or another, have already left their bodies
because of accidents or wars or things of that nature, are now
on this earth plane.
J: Is there a beginning date for what youre calling this
lifetime?
P: They would, at least, be teenagers by now.
J: Teenagers or older?
P: At least teenagers. Some are as many as 80 years old, who
have done things to pave the way, making it easier for what
you are now doing.
To some, such information might come as a surprise, while
others would point to references from spiritual adepts and noted
seers of the past, such as Edgar Cayce, who had foretold the return
of certain Apostles. Many letters, besides Kirks, were arriving at the
offices of the Great Tommorow referencing this great gathering.
Hundreds of other letters came from people who adamantly
believed they had been with Paul or the other Apostles when they
had walked with the Master. But what to do about it now?
At first, efforts to ask individuals to verify their own past-life
experiences, as Nick had done, proved what was even more
important: that these individuals were having individual
experiences. None has heard the calling for public exposure as had
Nick. For their call was not the same as Nicks. Repeatedly, theirs
was one of accomplishing that which they came here to help in: to
prepare, support, and exemplify before the peoples of the world a
new way of thinking, a new way of putting into action social
concerns, social solutions, and spiritual ideals that would establish a
greater world a world based on peace, universal love and
Days.Ch11 2/12/03 4:41 PM Page 201
compassion, and a world not afraid to live in truth. Their letters,

their e-mails and their phone calls left the impression that it is for
them to tell their own stories their way. And so they shall.
(
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 203
12
(
ATIRA
L ittle Atira, you are so precious to me, Bessie continued. She

watched as nurses passed by her hospital room. You are my
miracle child, just like your baby brother. Ricky had been born the
year before, and his birth had blessed Bessie like a divine angel
lifting the curse of barrenness placed upon her by modern medicine.
I will take care of you as if you are not mine, but Gods. I have
promised it so. You are a living miracle. Do you know that? Yes. She
tickled little Atiras dimple, hoping her affection would not waken
the peaceful child. She cooed, Yes, you are my living miracle.
Bessie was not a young mother but a woman close to leaving
childbearing years. Though her face, surrounded by flaxen curls, did
not betray her forty-three years, her innate wisdom did. Bessie
understood how lucky she was to be able to have two infants, let
alone one, who were medically unable to be here. Life had not been
easy, but it also had not been rough. Richard, her husband, had
provided well for the family with his work as an independent
contractor and wall plasterer. But what he could not provide was
hope for what now lay in her arms.
203
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 204
Five years later.

}
Ricky, little Atira begged, dont go down to the pond. And
dont take that thing youre building ... that raft thing. Her older
brother pretended not to listen. She wasnt supposed to be here but
felt she had to follow Ricky and his neighbor friend who had
sneaked away for their grand adventure. No one was supposed to
go near the pond, for it belonged to a neighbor who bristled at
anyone trespassing on his property.
Ricky looked up from his lashings. What are you doing here?
Go back home! Did Mom tell you to follow me? For a six-year-old
Ricky never did catch on well to the idea of limits or rules. His was
a world of exploration. Tukwila was not like bustling Seattle just to
the north. This area was still farmland and mini-ranches for the most
part. Lots didnt hug up ten to a block. Neighbors did not hug either.
No, Mom didnt tell me. She hesitated. Dom did.
Dom? That ghost friend of yours? Oh come on. Youre just
making that up. I spose he told you about the raft, too.
Yes, he did, Atira began to pout. Ricky never believed in Dom,
which hurt her feelings beyond description. For Dom was as real to
Atira as Ricky. She never could quite understand why no one else
could see him. He had first come to her in a dream not long ago,
telling her he was her friend and would be with her throughout her
life. To Atira, Dom looked about the same age as Ricky, except that
Dom was very wise, seeming to know the answers to almost any
question she had. Dom said that you shouldnt take the raft into the
water. He said theres going to be an accident and somebodys going
to get hurt. Ricky, please dont go down to the pond!
A small creek running down the familys property fed the pond.
The cut of the ravine covered itself with a quilt of trees and bushes,
perfect for young adventurers to sneak away and create
unimaginable worlds. But this day, Ricky and his buddy, Tommy, had
decided to be pirates. And pirates needed a ship as well as a sea
even if that sea belonged to someone else. He had been forbidden to
cross onto Mr. Bradens property where the great seas shore called
to him and Tommy who, after all, was a whole year older than
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 205
atira 205
Ricky. Howd you know about the raft, anyways? You been spying
on us?
No. No, Dom told me. Please dont go to the pond. Dom says
therell be trouble.
Oh, baloney, Ricky snorted while wrapping the last bit of twine
around the gangly branches of his warship. Go home. Leave us
alone. And dont tell Mom or youre in for it. And take your Dom
friend with you. Ricky could be so hurtful at times. Yet other times
he was Atiras bestest brother in the whole wide world. Well OK
he was her only brother in the whole wide world. Atira worshiped
her older brother. However, she already had learned to trust the
ways of her invisible friend. Doms real name was Domsolis (Dom-
saw-lis). Her three-year-old tongue had twisted awkwardly with the
sound, Dom Salts? Dom-all-us? She eventually settled on Dom.
And the master soul, appearing in a childs form, seemed happy
with that.
Atira pretended to head back home but instead hid behind a
bend in the path. Cmon, Tommy, ordered Ricky, Lets go sail to an
island and hunt for buried treasure. Do you have a sword? Tommy
stuck a broken branch, long ago bare of bark, into his belt as the two
pirates began dragging their tethered assortment of branches and
punk sapling trunks toward the pond. Some of the twine tangled in
the brush, collecting twigs and sprigs, camouflaging the raft as if it
were a walking bird nest instead of a potential sailing ship. Atira
followed, spying how the boys struggled, dragging their craft to sea.
And, deciding to be helpful, she skipped up to the raft as if she were
meant to lend a helping hand. Ricky decided not to protest. As the
children neared the pond, they noticed two other kids on the other
side also seeking great adventure.
You stay here, Ricky insisted to Atira as he clumsily pushed
the two-boy raft into the water. Atira was not going to ignore Doms
warning. Statuesque, she stood silently with tiny hands twisted up
against her mouth. What else could she do but watch? Tommy and
Ricky shoved out to sea with poles in hand to guide their pirate ship.
Triumphal whoops filled the air as the two pirates headed for deeper
water. The pond changed to a great ocean as they poled until their
poles no longer touched bottom. The deepest part of the pond
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 206
stretched a little over eight feet deep, which meant the boys
magically had to turn their poles into paddles as they drifted toward
the middle.
Excited by their quest, Tommy stood up lifting his mighty sword
from his belt, thrusting it skyward in true pirate fashion. Crack!
snapped the the rotten sapling trunk under his feet. Startled, Tommy
stumbled backwards, falling hard onto the flimsier part of the raft.
More branches snapped as the raft began disassembling right before
their eyes. Water surrounded Tommys waist as Ricky tried to keep
the twine from coming undone. With the main support of the raft
breaking in two, the entire structure spread like flotsam. Tommy
gasped for air as the great sea reached to his neck. Limbs and rotten
log remnants refused to buoy him. Panic set in. Ricky, whod already
decided to swim to shore, realized his buddy could not swim. In fact,
it dawned on him that Tommy was drowning. Alarm swelled in
Rickys chest as he pushed raft remnants out of the way, trying to
reach Tommy. Finally, grabbing onto Tommys shirt, Ricky hoisted
Tommy upward as best he could, hoping his friend would find air.
Tommys flailing arms caught hold of his rescuer, latching on like
talons, now dragging Ricky down. Both boys submerged, splashing
like two birds in a birdbath and then quiet.
Oh, no, whimpered Atira, Dom, what can I do? Her little
five-year-old arms grabbed the longest branch they could possibly
carry. In near-comic awkwardness she struggled to reach her
drowning brother and his friend with her little branch. Stretching as
far as she could, the limb nowhere approached the twenty feet
needed. Like a breaching whale, the combined bodies of Ricky and
Tommy exploded on the surface, Ricky fighting to free himself from
Tommys lockhold. Dark confusion surrounded him as Rickys mind
thrashed at thoughts of escape or rescue. Wheezing for air, he tried
one more time to force Tommys head above water. Once again both
disappeared below the spray.
Dom, Dom, do something! Atira screamed. She sensed the
grave danger clutching at her brother. Do something! Across the
pond, the two other boys bolted off at a run to find help. It would
mean certain punishment, but all now realized peril stood near.
Pirates and soldiers would certainly be punished when grown-ups
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 207
atira 207
found out what had happened. But something had to be done.

Dom, Atira shrieked, youre bigger than me. Cant you do
something? Please? Tears trickled down her cherub face as her eyes
ogled at her companion now walking across the water. Her mouth
dropped open in awe, not realizing Dom could even do such a thing.
She continued gaping as Dom approached the drowning boys, bent
down and placed one hand on Tommys head. The boy went limp.
Immediately, Ricky turned the body around, forcing his buddys
head above the foam. Furiously he stroked the water, edging their
bodies closer to shore.
Booming splashes erupted from behind Ricky. Strong arms
grabbed him as two men pulled the friends apart, Ricky grabbing
unconsciously, still trying to save Tommy. Its OK, its OK, a
mans voice calmed. Ive gotcha. Youre OK. Youre OK. The two
men carried the boys to shore, Tommy coughing up water, Ricky
crying with relief. Atira gawked as Dom returned across the water
back to shore.
I didnt know you could walk on water! she gasped as he
eased next to her. Dom said nothing, Atiras awe interrupted by the
realization she should check to see if Ricky was OK. Her little feet
pattered around the shore until she reached the small crowd
gathering around the boys. Mothers had made phone calls, and
everyone but everyone in the neighborhood now knew of the
incident. A kind of dread set in as Atira realized that Mom and Dad
would shortly arrive.
As Bessie lectured her son on why mommies and daddies are to
be obeyed, Richard held his daughter tightly in his arms. Pangs
climbed from his gut to his heart as he realized how close he had
come to losing his son. He set Atira on the dock as he listened to her
chatter about how Dom had tried to help out. His hands brushed the
roughness of the old pier as he wondered what words he could say
to his son for his disobedience and to his daughter for her insistence
on living in a make-believe world. Daddy, Dom walked on water
when he saved Tommy. I saw him walk on the water! And before
Richard could blink an eye, Atira took a step off the pier, her feet
believing they could take footsteps as she plunged beneath the
surface, with one hand reaching upward like a tiny Statue of Liberty.
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 208
Richard sprung to the end of the pier nearly falling in, himself, as his
large hands instantly grabbed beneath the water searching for the
first thing attached to his daughter. Panic ebbed as his hands
clinched her dress, hoisting her out of the water like some giant
crane. Suspending his drenched daughter midair, he barked, What
in the hell do you think you are doing? Are you crazy?
Half choking from the bone-chilling water, half sputtering,
unable to speak, little Atira began to sob. Through her sobs she
squeaked, Well, Dom walked on the water. Like a washwoman
with a fresh load of wet laundry, Richard crushed his youngest
against his chest.
What am I going to do with you, you crazy child? he
murmured. Dont you know that just because Dom does something
it doesnt mean you can do it also? It seemed like the right
approach. Why scare her, why try and take her invisible friend away
from her? She was a strange child with the dearest, sweetest heart in
the whole world. He would do nothing to break her little heart.
}
How did you know the accident would happen? Ricky
whispered insistently. Mom and Dad were couched in the living
room discussing punishment for their insubordinate son.
I already told you, Atira whined back. Dom told me.
You expect me to believe that?
Its true. Dom said there would be an accident if you went
down to the pond.
You mean it? He really does exist?
Of course he does. How many times do I have to tell you?
The hushed tones in the living room rose to an audible level.
Both children could hear the exasperation in their moms voice.
What am I going to do? Do you know what she did last week? You
were sound asleep at the time. She comes running into the bedroom
like the house is on fire. Mom, Mom, come quick. Theres angels in
my bedroom. The angels are here. Theyre singing in my bedroom.
I mean, what am I supposed to do? So I go into her bedroom and
there she is pointing them out. I ask how many are there, and she
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 209
atira 209
says, Oh, theres six. And I ask, What are they wearing, child?
And she says, Oh Mom, theyre wearing all this white glitter, like
snow you spray on windows at Christmastime. Snow spray? Where
has she ever seen pictures of angels in snow spray? So I decide to ask
for more detail. What are they doing? And she gives me the
funniest look like Ive lost my mind. Mom, theyre standing in
the corner over there, singing. I tried to find out what was going on
in her head. What are the angels singing? She stands there as if
shes listening to a conversation and says, Theyre singing to God
about something, Mom. And its really, really important. I didnt
know what to think. Ricky was sleeping soundly at the other end of
the room, so I didnt want to carry on with her. But what am I
supposed to do? Ive talked to her about angels, told her to scoot
over in bed to leave room for her angel to wrap its wings around
her. So what can I say to her? That shes seeing things? They dont
exist? Of course, I didnt tell her I didnt believe her. Instead I told
her theres a reason why angels come. Its OK if the angels come to
you. Its an important thing, and maybe something special just for
you. I asked her if they were still there. She nodded her head but
then got real quiet. Like she wasnt sure what the word special
honestly meant.
A sadness fell on little Atiras face as she remembered the night
in question. A teasing smile snuck across her brothers face. You
saw angels? Without saying a peep, she nodded her head slowly,
remembering how disappointed she had been when Mom could not
see the angels. Why had Mom talked about them if she couldnt see
them? This had been such an exciting moment in her young life. The
light had filled the entire room, and the song the angels sang had
been so joyous. The discovery that Mom hadnt seen the angels was
devastating to her; and worse yet, that Mom believed they hadnt
really been there. Yes, she had been kind about not saying she didnt
believe, but Atira was still devastated.
The voices dropped below eavesdropping range. Bessie, I
wouldnt worry about it too much. Dont you think this is something
she is going to outgrow? Lots of kids have invisible friends.
Not ones who seem to know whats going to happen before it
happens. Shes starting to have regular conversations with this
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 210
thing, right out loud and everything, as if the whole bunch of us

were having a tea party. When I asked her what she was doing down
at the pond, she said that this Dom, or whatever his name is, told her
there was going to be an accident. And when I checked with Ricky,
he confessed that Atira had warned him to stay away from the pond.
And then this walking off the end of the dock? Whats she going to
come up with next? Bessies Southern Baptist upbringing was
scraping against the unexplainable events under her own roof.
Yeah, her trying to walk on water was a bit bizarre. But I think
she just has an active imagination. Nothing to fret about. Shes such
a gentle thing. Wouldnt hurt a fly. There arent any kids in the
neighborhood who play with her. If it werent for Ricky, shed be all
alone.
Richard. This is serious. Bessie pulled at the fabric of her dress,
nervously wondering whether she should say any more. Shes
starting to see little people. Thats what she calls them: little people.
Just a couple of weeks ago she said to me, Mom, the little people say
that if you dont put egg shells in this dirt here, the plant is going to
get white blotches. Egg shells? How does she make that up? I just
smiled at her and told her the plant would be just fine. And the day
before yesterday, I looked in my garden and noticed the plant had
white blotches all over it. Egg shells? I mean, I dont want to
encourage her, but I decided to crush up a few egg shells and mulch
it around the plant ... just to see. You know. Her eyes checked to see
if Richards face disapproved of such tomfoolery.
And?
And, well, the plant is looking better already. Richards hand
reached for his nose as if rubbing an itch, not wanting to let the
turned-up corners of his mouth show.
Little people, indeed. Whats next? she mumbled.
Honey, this is like dolls, or the latest toy. Shell grow out of it.
Shes just like any other child who doesnt have neighbor friends to
play with. When she goes to school she will change, she will
outgrow it. Shell be interacting with other kids. Personally, Im
more concerned about that blanket she never lets go of. I think
youre going to have a worse time getting her to school without that
blanket than you are with her invisible friend.
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 211
atira 211
Ricky poked his baby sister with his big toe. How come you
never told me about the angels? Atira turned away. Her world was
crashing down like melting snow off tree branches. Why doesnt
anyone believe me? she cried to herself. With the determination of the
family dog pulling on her favorite blanket, little Atira promised
herself she would never talk about Dom again. Never. Ever, ever,
ever. And for a five-year-old that meant about three months.
}
What is it about our society that we distrust anything out of the
ordinary? Why do we try to label, torment, or demonize that which
we do not understand? As Atira grew into her teens, her world grew
more difficult. Either she would become a pariah because of her
abilities or she would deny her giftedness for the attempted comfort
of finding normalcy. She went for finding normalcy, to the point of
telling Dom she would no longer talk to him. But normalcy would
not be found. Before being diagnosed with dyslexia not
uncommon among the psychically gifted she found herself
labeled as stupid, slow, and difficult when in fact her mind
perceived that which few others could, her wisdom enhanced by
access to information that few find. Not until a psychic confronted
her, almost insisting that she had abandoned her psychic gifts, did
Atira move ever so slowly to a return to her gifts and her close
relationship with Domsolis. In adulthood her reputation grew
despite her hesitancy to take chances once again in a society that
shuns what it cannot explain.
In Western Washington, with the pushing of her best friend
Mary Ellen, known as Angel Scribe to her many readers on the
Internet, Atiras renown reached the ears of Gary and eventually
Nick Bunick. It was as though she were destined to play a significant
role in the lives of both these men. After the release of The
Messengers, Atira informed Gary that other apostles would seek him
out. He had heard similar pronouncements from Sara who had said
that the reincarnation of John the Apostle would find him. But Atira
took that one step further. She became the instrument for finding
these souls who had walked with the Master.
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 212
Sweet Spirit, her voice bubbled with excitement over the

phone one day. Ive met one of the other apostles. Hes incredible.
Youve got to meet him. Its Bartholomew. His present-day name is
Steve Koda. Honestly, I think you should give him a call. And that
is how it all began. She would also discover the Apostle Philip at one
of Nicks symposiums at Unity of Seattle. The man had traveled all
the way from Missouri hoping that Nick would recognize him after
the crowd dispersed. In spite of shaking hands with Nick and
exchanging pleasantries, Nick had treated Michael Baumann no
differently than any of the many who had attended. A bit
disappointed, Baumann was about to leave when Atira corralled
him, pulling him away from the crush around Nick.
All right, who are you? she asked point blank.
Excuse me? What do you mean?
Atira explained who she was and her connection to Nick. I saw
you from across the room. You had one of those giant rainbow
angels following you. That usually means you were with Jeshua. So
who are you?
Michael stared at Atira for a few moments and decided to test
her. He reached down into a pew nearby containing song books with
biblical quotes, turned the pages, and handed the opened book to
Atira. Im on this page, he offered, testing her abilities to make
sure she was for real.
Atira looked at the page and instantly replied, I knew it. Youre
Philip. You were with Jeshua. You came here to meet Nick, didnt
you? He confessed he had. You have got to meet Gary. Hes the
one you should be talking to. Do you have an e-mail address or a
phone number I can give him? Baumann gave her his e-mail
address, and then offered to take her out to lunch. Atira accepted,
thus beginning a long and close friendship that would change the
lives of Michael, Gary, and her. Because of what would unfold when
the three would ultimately meet, a great adventure would be set in
place. In fact, the adventure began when Atira later agreed that Steve
Koda, Michael Baumann, Gary, and she should meet with Julia
Ingram on Bainbridge Island, near Seattle, at Kodas home. All
assented to participate in a combined past-life regression session
with Julia Ingram. By this time Julias fame as a therapist and author
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 213
atira 213
had spread because of the success of The Messengers. Atira wanted to

find the reason why these past associates of Jeshua had returned at
this time along with Nick, who had paved the way.
In the summer of 1998 all parties assembled among the thick
cover of trees embracing Steve Kodas property. The smell of nearby
Puget Sound provided an atmosphere of serenity and peace as the
group sat to discuss how the combined past-life regression would
work. Before arriving, Gary had changed his mind about doing a
group regression and opted for all of them doing individual sessions
if Julia felt she had the time and the energy for it. As was typically
her way, Julia told the group she was there for them. Everyone
agreed to go into private sessions without discussing with anyone
else what they had experienced until all had been regressed. Since
the last time Nick had suggested hypnosis with Julia, Gary was still
apprehensive about allowing himself to be regressed, having had
previous encounters under hypnosis that had left his life completely
altered and difficult to explain. This session, as it turned out, would
be no exception.
Steve, a patent attorney, escorted Julia to his home office, located
in a section of the unattached garage where he worked on legal
matters when he wasnt working at his office in town. After asking
her if the room was quiet enough and comfortable enough for her to
conduct the sessions, she smiled brightly with an Of course. This
will do fine. Gary and Atira chatted about why the various apostles
were coming forward at this time. The only one who had not come
forward as predicted was John. Like Sara, Atira insisted that John
would find Gary. Be patient. Had not Steve and Michael B as Gary
liked to refer to him found their way to this beautiful site?
After the sessions with Michael and Steve, Julia abandoned the
confines of the dimmed office to stretch and to clear out the cobwebs
with a short walk. On her return, she found Gary sitting in a deck
chair on the patio, and with a smile said, I think its your turn.
Gary was not looking forward to this moment. In fact, he had denied
requests for any further regressions because of the increasing
weirdness these sessions unloaded on his consciousness. After the
initial encounter with the angel at Larry de Herreras office, Gary
had tried find out more information about the angel by going to
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 214
different therapists. Each effort produced more visits by beings that

could only be described as otherworldly. The messages from these
beings produced more anxiety than their appearances. Repeatedly,
Gary was being asked to come out of hiding, to show the world the
information being put at his feet. Like Atira, Gary had only wanted
to be normal his entire life. And with events unfolding the way they
were, normalcy was escaping him with increasing speed.
Go ahead and make yourself comfortable, Julia cooed. What
is it youd like to see happen in this session?
Well, I guess we should find out more information about my
connection to the time of Jeshua. Everyone keeps asking me about
that, and I keep not telling what I know because Im not sure it can
be verified, let alone understood. Previously, Gary and Julia had
gotten into long discussions about the research she had explored and
what she was finding out. The soul is a living mystery, and the
information coming forward in her research and the research done
by a fellow colleague, Michael Newton, PhD, was only beginning to
lift the mask on the face of the New Psychology. While Julia had
focused on exploring aspects of the soul in past-life regression,
Newton had focused on information related to the soul before it
entered the human body and after it left. Both were discovering that
the soul is far more complex than previously thought. And events
surrounding Gary seemed to confirm that.
As the session moved to the stage where Gary had moved into
the subconscious, Julia decided to have him go to where he was
guided. In the past, she had discovered that letting the client decide
where to go while under hypnosis proved more beneficial to her
clients than giving specific instructions. So rather than suggest he go
back to the time of Jeshua, she simply asked him to explain where it
was he had found himself. And much to her surprise, Gary was not
in the past at all. He was in the future.
OK, please tell me what it is you are seeing.
I am seeing the Great Sphinx. There is a blinding light coming
from the area that would seem to be where the heart of the Sphinx
would be. The light is turning into an eye. Its talking to me. The Eye
of Light is giving me instructions.
And what is it telling you? Julia asked.
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 215
atira 215
It is saying that what I am looking for will be found in the Heart

of the Sphinx. Go to the Heart of the Sphinx, it is saying. Now it is
showing me what I will find when I go to the Heart of the Sphinx.
There is a man dressed in a white galabaya, an Egyptian caftan, with
a white cloth wrapped around the top of his head. He is one of the
guardians of the ancient secrets. This man will tell me where we can
find a tunnel that will lead to the Heart of the Sphinx.
We? Julia wanted to know if she had missed something.
Yes, I can see three others who are with me. There is Atira to my
left, Michael B to my right, and off in the distance is another man. I
believe he is John, the one who has returned with Johns soul. The
Egyptian man in white is pointing to a tunnel. I can see where the
tunnel leads. There is a room between the Sphinx and the Great
Pyramid. There are objects in the room. I now see Baumann in the
room. He is the one who will find this place.
Can you describe the objects?
Some of them dont make any sense to me. There is one
machine that holds these disks. On the disks is writing, which I dont
understand. Its not hieroglyphics but like that. Its a symbolic
language. When the disks spin they show information. There is
another machine that holds an even larger disk. It is green in color.
When it spins, things levitate. It is an antigravity device. There are
other machines but I cant tell what they do. I am getting the sense,
a message, that Baumann is to photograph this information and give
it to a bearded man who will tell the meaning of the writings.
Julia tried to get as much detail as possible, and suggested that
Gary would remember it all. When she tried to find how far in the
future this event was to take place, Gary found himself standing in
front of the Eye of Light again. The Eye spoke to him saying, The
path to the future is dependent upon the heart of man. Three hearts
must come together as one for the path to be opened. And with
that, Julia ended the session. After Gary had rested a bit and the two
had discussed why he had been taken into the future, Julia
suggested that Gary talk to Baumann. When he asked why, she
simply replied, Talk to Michael Baumann.
Atira was the last to go into the office for a regression session.
While she took her turn, Gary sought out Michael Baumann and sat
Days.Ch12 2/12/03 4:42 PM Page 216
next to him. Michael wanted to know what had happened to Gary in

his session. After Gary told Michael that hed gone into the future,
Michael wanted every detail. Upon giving all the detail, Michael
stared at Gary for a while and finally stated, I think you should
know that I also went into the future. And to make this even weirder,
I think you should know that I saw the same thing you did.
Upon hearing this, Garys mind jumped back to the time when
he and Nick had discussed going to Egypt to try and assist in
uncovering the legendary Hall of Records. But the idea had born no
fruit, and the topic never came up again until now. Was what he and
Michael B had seen the Hall of Records? It didnt seem so, since the
room was between the Sphinx and the Great Pyramid rather than
under the paw of the Sphinx as prophesied by Edgar Cayce. So what
had they seen? There really was only one way way to find out: Go to
Egypt. But that is another story.
Atira, Angelic Mystic

Readings
(206) 767-5611
www.angelscribe.com/atira.html
Days.Ch13 2/12/03 4:43 PM Page 217
13
(
THE ANGELIC PROPHECIES
W hen I ask Nick to recall his life two thousand years ago,
Julia had said, I am asking him to reach into a higher
dimension to open his soul memory. He has an incredible ability
to do this with all of his senses, and with great detail.
He is remembering a past incarnation of the soul that is
currently incarnated in another body, now known as Nick Bunick.
This we call soul memory. When I ask Nick to reach into his spirit-
mind, I am asking him to move into that dimension to which his soul
has ascended. At that dimension, he is part of a collective spirit-
mind which is composed of more love, wisdom and intelligence
than one can imagine.
This is where we go when we wish to access information
greater even than what previous lifetimes can reveal. This is where
prophecy happens, because spirit-mind the oversoul is aware
of the future.
Nick and Julia spent a great deal of care and consideration in
deciding whether to access his oversoul. Was it the right time?
Would it be permitted? Would it be the best way to inform the world
of what is to come? Nick had confessed that the angels had already
217
Days.Ch13 2/12/03 4:43 PM Page 218
conveyed to him that it would now be all right to reveal what was
coming to our planet if it were done carefully and considerately.
The only way to truly find out, was to venture into the realm of the
oversoul. After asking about the apostles, Julia decided to edge
closer to information relating to angelic prophecies that had been
approached in The Messengers.
J: How do you understand what Jeshua meant by our oneness
with God?
P: If you are not aware of Gods presence in you, through his
Spirit, then how can you be at one with something that you
do not understand or are not aware of? What Jeshua tried to
make people understand was their relationship with God, so
they were aware that they are a part of God. To have total
and fluent understanding is to become at one with God. That
was part of Jeshuas spiritual goal.
If a person is born a great artist or a wonderful singer of songs,
or a wonderful player of musical instruments, and yet has
never picked up an instrument, or sung a song, or painted a
picture, then they have no knowledge of these talents and
gifts. So it is that Jeshua was trying to have people shed
ignorance and have understanding of their relationship with
God. He would try to use examples from their own lives to
show how much they were missing if they did not
understand or accept that they were a part of God.
J: What would Jeshua say to us now about oneness?
P: People have become polarized, and this is very unfortunate.
They have been polarized through material means, based on
the amount of wealth they have accumulated, or not
accumulated. They have become polarized by their
perceptions of geographic boundaries, by their political
beliefs, and even in their religious beliefs. And this is wrong.
They do not recognize that a much greater priority, a much
greater value rests in the bonding that all people should
have. We have one common Father and Mother, the Lord. We
are all brothers and sisters. These barriers must be broken
down.
J: Could you explain again what the 444 stands for?
Days.Ch13 2/12/03 4:43 PM Page 219
the angelic prophecies 219
P: It is as you have been told: the power of Gods love. It has

been used throughout history, although, many times, people
have not recognized it.
J: Are there any instructions we can give to those who ask us
for advice on how they can open to seeing their angels or
hearing their angels?
P: For seeing the angels, visually, one must have spiritual sight
into the other dimension. And that is something you cannot
teach somebody. Nor can someone be taught to hear spiritual
music or sound into that dimension. [Oftentimes, when the
angels speak, it can sound like music being spoken, or
chimes being made into words.] It is more important that
they open themselves to their angels and spiritual guides
through belief, meditation, and prayer.
J: Thank you. Some peoples spiritual practices are based on
the tenet that Jesus died for our sins, and through Jesus, we
can be saved. Could you address this?
P: Why is it necessary to try to make people feel responsible for
the death of Jeshua? These people are not responsible. Jeshua
lived for us. He came onto earth as a gift from God. He had
already reached perfection. But Jeshua did not have to come
to earth again. He had completed his wheel, he had
completed the cycle. So he came onto earth as a gift to us to
show us the way, to be an example, and to offer himself as a
conduit to God, to serve as our spiritual guide if we would
choose to accept that offer. It has nothing to do with his
death, or sins.
J: We would like to hear the reason why the soul and spirit of
Paul has returned as Nick Bunick. Can you share with us
why you have come back onto earth?
P: Yes. The first has to do with timing. In Nicks previous life on
earth, he also had many of the skills and abilities he brings
forth in this lifetime, now. But, it was decided to take his life
when he was in his early twenties as a young soldier in
France. The world was not ready, and it would not have been
appropriate. The spiritual consciousness of the world was
not ready to receive what he would have shared with them.
Days.Ch13 2/12/03 4:43 PM Page 220
J: Was this during the war?

P: During the First World War is when his life was taken. Now
he has been brought back at this time, as we approach the
new millennium. There are many things he had to experience
on earth to prepare him for what he is doing now. It would
be through his experience in the business world that he
would achieve the tools necessary before God sent him on
his mission. Through the business experiences, he would
acquire credibility to face the many challenges that are before
him now. So it was a question of timing as to when his spirit
and soul would be born again on Earth in a body, where he
would be prepared to play a major role in the spiritual
leadership in the world. As we approach the new millennium,
this role will be made more apparent.
J: You said that God sent him on his mission. Can you tell us
what that mission is?
P: One of the major responsibilities of Nick is to bring people
together, to break down barriers. He is to bring together
mainstream people of the world, regardless of their religious
background or faith. He will bring these people together
because he will be able to speak their language, and be able
to provide understanding to these people that otherwise
might not be heard. For there have been those who speak
about Gods laws who do not give credibility to those laws.
They talk a different language. Do you want me to be more
explicit? Do you understand what I am saying?
J: I understand. You speak of a new millennium. We have been
told that there will be an ascension process occurring across
the earth.
P: Why do you want to use words like ascension?
J: Please, if there is a better word, I would like to hear it.
P: Ideas are better expressed in sentences rather than catch-
phrases. To select one word or phrase, such as you do in your
political systems, causes adverse feelings, a lack of
understanding or fear or, in some people, hostility. For
instance, if one were to say to others, I know a man who
cares about feeding the hungry children of our world,
Days.Ch13 2/12/03 4:43 PM Page 221
hopefully people would applaud that man. But if someone

said about the same man, I know a man whos an extreme
liberal, many that would have applauded him, instead, are
turned off. It is nonproductive to create labels. It is better to
speak of what is going to take place in sentences so people
understand.
J: I agree. Can you give us a description of what will take place.
P: We speak of Earth, what is Earth? We are part of the Earth.
Earth represents not only the physical planet, but everything
thats on it including the vibrations of the Earth. Every
physical piece of matter has an energy or vibration it gives
off, even though we are not aware of it in most cases. People
are the greatest example of giving off energy, which can be
positive or negative, and in different intensities. We are going
through a period of time when the frequency of the earth is
changing, it is changing to a higher vibration which in
terms of energy means it will become less dense. And those
who are in tune with the messages of universal love and
compassion are also changing their frequency at the same
time as the Earth is. Those who are not living their lives in
truth, who do not have universal love in their hearts, who do
not have compassion for those around them, are not
changing in frequency. So they are being left behind. Again,
it is as if we are going on a destination, and one is traveling
in a wonderful automobile at a rapid rate of speed, and
another is barely walking. If those walking have not reached
a certain point on their journey by a certain date, they can no
longer continue their journey in that environment. If they
have not crossed that line by a certain time when the journey
is over, if they have not reached that point on the mountain
which is not an unrealistic point where they can see the top,
then there will be a division with those on one side of the line
continuing to live in this changing frequency, this new energy.
Those on the other side of the line will live on a parallel earth,
which will be at the lower frequency. These things are very
confusing to most people who try to understand, so you must
be careful how you share your words.
Days.Ch13 2/12/03 4:43 PM Page 222
Indeed, in The Messengers, the angels had told Nick to keep this
information quiet because they did not want people made to feel
afraid. The angels spoke of a coming event, a rainbow of white light
that would surround the Earth, which would be the signal event that
these parallel Earths would be created through the arrival of a force
of energy from the heavens. Those whose lives were based on
universal love and compassion, those who chose to live their lives
based on truth rather than fear would inherit a world of peace.
J: I hope that we can help as many people as possible to cross
that line. Is there anything in particular we can say to help
people?
P: You are doing it. It is not your responsibility to force them, to
threaten them. The only thing you can do is educate them
spiritually and make them aware of their spirituality. If they
choose to reject what you have to offer, that is their choice,
because God gave them free will to make that choice. You are
helping in all you do.
J: It is my impression that one of our efforts is bringing back the
original messages from 2,000 years ago. Is there additional
material to be disseminated to people?
P: The soul is always evolving. What Nick has shared recently
about the relationship between the soul and the spirit is
valid. As the soul evolves, it continues on Gods journey in a
proper manner. It moves to a higher understanding of the
spirit than it would have in previous incarnations. Although,
at times, it can go the opposite direction, depending on
experiences on earth. The messages you have today are not
only those of 2,000 years ago but those that have been made
contemporary based on what is going to happen in the
future. They are, as well, based on understanding and
relationships of the Spirit with God that has materialized and
progressed over 2,000 years.
J: What is going to happen in the future?
P: After the new millennium has entered, there will be an
alignment with the messages of universal love and
compassion. Those that do live their lives in this alignment
will bring unto Earth as it is in Heaven. The leadership of the
Days.Ch13 2/12/03 4:43 PM Page 223
world will become spiritually based, and, although there will

be governments, people will look toward spiritual leadership
for their guidance. I do not speak of religious leadership,
although there may be some, who are religious leaders, who
are able to make the transition into spiritual leadership. But
it will be recognized that we will be living under the under-
standing of Gods laws and of Jeshuas messages of love,
compassion and truth.
J: Are there events that will be leading up to this new transition
into the new millennium that we can speak of?
P: These events, as they happen, will become so obvious to
everybody that they will speak for themselves. But if you tell
them of the events before they happen, the focal point will
come into controversy as to whether the events will happen
or not. It is not in the best interest of your mission for people
to focus on the events before they happen. Rather,
understand these events as gifts that God is giving as signs.
J: Signs and wonders. I understand the logic of that. There have
been a flurry of seminars and conferences where psychics
were seeing earth changes, earthquakes, tidal waves and
crazy weather. Thats what people were talking about. They
would ask, Should I move from Idaho? or What about my
mother in Florida? The whole spiritual theme of the
conferences was lost in discussions about real estate.
P: Yes. Thats exactly what the concern is over, talking about
events. It is better to understand that Gods love is like
sunshine. It is not in the shadows of fear that people should
live, but rather in hope and anticipation of wonderful
opportunities. There will be changes of the Earth, but not for
punishment, and not for reasons of suffering, but because the
Earth is changing its own vibrations and its own dimension.
If a child believes there is a monster in the closet, to that
child, the monster does exist. If a person believes that they
are going to get into a driving accident, and drives with fear,
it is only a matter of time until they will have an accident.
People create their own darkness. People create their own
fears. Those who live in fear create their own monsters. There
Days.Ch13 2/12/03 4:43 PM Page 224
is no supernatural evil force competing with God. It is that

which each individual or group creates on their own that
becomes their reality. If you live in sunlight, you do not fear
darkness, for darkness is not a part of your life. If you choose
to hide in darkness, then it is your reality and yours alone.
There can be a collective darkness, just as there is a collective
spiritual consciousness that is of the light.
J: Can you give us an idea of what the social fabric of the world
will be like after this event occurs?
P: The responsibilities and changes will be many. We must
concern ourselves about the children of the world. We have a
great responsibility of taking care of the children. Likewise,
we have a responsibility to the natural resources and the
wealth of the world. For they must no longer fall into misuse,
which has been happening for so long.
J: Do you see individuals or organizations addressing these
needs?
P: Individuals will create organizations. Priorities will be so
different because everybody will understand and be in tune
to what the priorities are.
J: Will these organizations be based on an economic model or a
community model or a business model?
P: All of the above. There will be tremendous challenges, which
will take many forms. People who will have government
positions will recognize that they will receive instructions
from spiritual leaders. There will be tremendous cooperation
among people throughout the world. Those who will remain
on the new Earth will find uniform cooperation in determining
goals and priorities with one another.
J: How will these spiritual leaders announce themselves?
P: They will not have to. They will be recognized. There will not
be competition by ego or materialism. Their contributions
will come from the heart. There will be no vainglory or
seeking of position or influence.
J: Will there be nation-states still existing?
P: There will be nations because of the needs in different
countries culturally, geographically, as well as economically.
Days.Ch13 2/12/03 4:43 PM Page 225
But there will be a spirit of cooperation throughout the world.

Many of the barriers that exist today will no longer exist.
J: Can you give us an idea how this spiritual leadership will
work?
P: There will be many different levels of leadership. But we will
all be part of a team. Egos will not play a part in trying to
hold a higher position of leadership. For some who have the
skills, they will look after the children. To others who have
the skills, they will look after natural resources. And to others
who have the skills, they will formulate the education and
training of people, as well as the training for spiritual
leadership.
J: Thank you.
P: I must share with you again; if you make this a major issue,
people will lose focus of what is happening, and, instead,
will focus on events instead of what is important. You do not
want that to happen.
J: You are trying to get across to us that everything is working
just the way it is supposed to, and things are unfolding just
as they ought, and we need to relax, not ask for details.
P: Peoples minds have been tainted for 2,000 years with false
prophecies and distorted teachings. And as a result, they are
programmed to think in terms of events being important
rather than their own efforts in bringing Heaven and Earth
together, as was the original intent. If people lose their focus
on angelic events or miracles, then it will slow these events,
even stopping them from becoming a reality. Do you
understand what I am saying, or should I explain more?
J: If I were able to see the bigger picture ...
P: Let me say this. A person enters a university to receive an
education, and all they can think about is receiving a degree
four years from now. They become obsessed with reaching
that day of graduation, which will result in receiving that
four-year degree. So, instead, it ends up taking them eight
years to receive the degree rather than the four years because
their energies were focused on the obsession instead of the
studying and learning.
Days.Ch13 2/12/03 4:43 PM Page 226
One of the things that is unusual on this earth is the way people,
in totally different degrees of spiritual understanding, are
mixed together. It is as if you take children who are first-
graders and second-graders, and mix them in the same
classroom with college students who are juniors and seniors.
They are all being educated simultaneously in the same
classroom, in spite of their tremendous differences in
awareness and capabilities. This creates chaos and confusion.
And yet, that is the world you live in. You live in a world
where political leaders, attorneys, managers of the justice
system have a potpourri of people from different levels of
spiritual understanding. You have people in positions of
great power who are still in the second grade, spiritually. Yet
others, who have great spiritual understanding, are given
little or no positions of responsibility, because of the makeup
of your society. This creates chaos and confusion. Do you
understand what Im sharing?
J: Yes I do. And in the Great Tomorrow, what would the class-
room look like?
P: The focus will be on universal love and compassion, and
living in truth as opposed to the material world
determining priorities and motivations for people. So it will
be a totally different environment that will prevail around
the world.
(
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 227
14
(
INTERVIEWS IN THE
ANGELIC REALM
T hroughout history, prophets have existed in every culture

known to man. It is only in modern times that the
understanding of the purpose of a prophet is so misunderstood. For
in modern times, the notion of prophet is synonymous with that of
weather forecaster. Statistics on accuracy and clarity are issued forth
with vivid computer graphics during the evening news. In the
biblical sense, the purpose of a prophet has never been that of being
a forecaster of events. Quite to the contrary, a prophet has truly
fulfilled his or her purpose if and only if the prophet has changed
the hearts and minds of people. In a way, the fulfillment of a
prophets prediction can be a testimonial of that prophets failure. If
the vision they foretell is one of calamity, such calamity can be
avoided by human free will, changes of the heart. In other words,
forewarned is forearmed. And if the calamity arrives, then the
prophet has failed.
When Jonah proclaimed before the city of Nineveh, In forty
days shall Nineveh be destroyed, the people put on sackcloth and
sat in ashes as a sign of their change of heart. For three days Jonah
proclaimed that Nineveh would be destroyed. The king of that great
227
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 228
city did not abandon its walls, seeking safety in a high-class condo
complex in the mountains of Montana. Nor did he have Jonah
beheaded in a attempt to stop the message by killing the messenger.
Instead, this wise king pleaded with his people to change their ways,
as he was about to. And on the appointed day of destruction,
Nineveh still stood. Now, was Jonah proclaimed a false prophet and
stoned to death? No. The people rejoiced over their ability to alter
the forthcoming event with their own change of heart. What was
true then is true now.
The admonitions from the oversoul of Nick and Paul are in
complete harmony with the story of Nineveh. We have been instructed
to look within for creating change, just as we are encouraged to find
God-Within. Let no one minimize the power of Oneness with the
Creator. Let us not look to the consequences of the future when plain
truth dictates that what we do now is ultimately the determinate of
what happens in our future. So like the people of Nineveh, let us study
our hearts, and, if need be, change our ways now.
But why do prophets also tell of us of forthcoming good events?
Certainly, we do not wish to alter a coming blessing. There are two
possibilities: One is to convey to people the reward for their
goodness, and the other is to encourage people to embrace a single
reality when two equally probable realities are coming a kind of
cosmic stacking of the deck. However, there is a risk in this. A man
is told that he is going to inherit great wealth. So, he quits his job and
waits for this wealth to come to him. But in quitting his job he finds
out that the company is being bought out by a mega-corporation,
and every employee stands to receive a bundle of money, for which
he no longer is eligible.
If the vision given to society is one of great days and eras of
peace, then humankind must celebrate the very source of such
greatness so as to assure its arrival, as well as its blessing, thanking
the very forces that will bring it forward. The purpose is to
empower, reward, and assure a time of blessing warranted to a
people deserving of it.
As Atira and others who have access to the higher realms of
conscious will tell us, the angels say that human consciousness
has changed so greatly in recent times, that even they cannot say
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 229
interviews in the angelic realm 229
with certainty what truly will befall the earth. All that can be pointed
to are coming possibilities.
People have begged to hear what our world will look like after
the coming together of Heaven and Earth. At presentations, Nick
had been accused of elitism by not letting everyone know what a
few were asked to keep quiet about. Now that Nick is able to
describe for us what the angels have shown him, there comes an
admonition with it: For those that have ears to hear, let them hear.
Do not look outward for change. Do not become consumed with
anxiety about events beyond you. For the only true way to change a
family, a nation, or a world, is one person at a time. And that person
is the one who is walking in your shoes.
In interviews with Atira Hatton and noted psychic, Laurie
McQuary, who originally prompted Nick to come forth with his
story, we find agreement: We are now in a time of great transition.
We may not have such a dramatic transition as it now appears,
Atira hears from the angels, because the level of awakening is so
phenomenal at this time. The more people who awaken, the less
painful, the less frightening, the less fearful the transition.
Lauries prophetic attitude on this? If I had thought the year
2000 was going to bring an end to the Earth as we know it, I would
have gotten so depressed I would NOT have washed my kitchen
floor. I would have cared less! You cant allow yourself to get out of
balance with prophetic information. Especially when the purpose
for revealing it is to bring us all back into balance. Nick is right,
she says with a kind of authority, Get people away from this whole
notion about physical changes. The real change that needs to occur
is in the heart. I listened to him at a book signing. Even though Ive
talked with him many times, I wanted to hear what he had to say in
public. And it really touched my heart to hear him talking about
You know, Im just the conduit. And this is what I tell people about
The Messengers, when they come in here all worked up about this
coming of a new world. What does it really mean?!! I keep getting
asked. What it means is that it gives you permission to seek your
own spirituality. Thats exactly what it means. And what Nick was
saying is that we are all accountable. Being accountable for our own
spiritual state of being is what these coming events are all about.
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 230
Personally, I think many of these coming disaster kinds of things,

whether its El Nio or new viruses or whatever, can be changed
with consciousness.
Both Atira and Laurie convey the same message: We can change
our world by changing ourselves. And if we do not get the message in
our hearts, then we get to see the message in our lives. People end up
learning to help and heal each other because of a disaster, says Laurie.
And Atira echoes this message. You know, disasters are only
disasters if you perceive them as that. People learn out of disasters.
Unfortunately, we choose to learn through the physical
manifestation when sometimes we could learn the same lesson by
dealing with our own inner turmoil, our own inner disasters.
Others say we must heal one another if we are to heal our Earth.
Those of us who choose greed, war, terrorism, hate, or deceit will
inherit those very choices as our lesson-bringers. Some will not want
to face their lessons now and will, instead, choose death. If enough
of us heal our own hearts, if enough of us find our own inner balance
with love, compassion, and truth, then we can act as healers for
those in need of healing the negativities of their own lives. We can
heal ourselves, we can heal people, we can heal society, we can heal
our planet.
The transition period we are presently witnessing is providing
us with just such options. Who of us does not feel we are dealing
with our own personal turmoil like never before? Who of us is not
seeing the need for our world to be healed? And who among us is
not hoping that something can be done about it? Certainly there
exist those who are blind to all this. But, by our own example, even
they can be made to see.
People think theyre so separate from one another, says Atira,
so separate from their angels, so separate from God. It just isnt so.
We forget we have a direct communication line at all three levels. I
find that the more I ask for help from my angels, the more they
become a part of my life, and the easier my life becomes, and the
more aware I am of Gods love, Gods Spirit. We must recognize this
inherent Oneness we have access to, because we think were so
separate. And if we remain in that separateness, we create fear and
we create turmoil.
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 231
Both women agree that there will be changes in the structures of

society, government, economics, and religion. For some people,
thats disastrous, says Atira, while others will say Its about time.
What most of us seem to forget is that peace is not the absence of
tension. Nature proves that to us in the most beautiful of ways: the
balance in a towering sequoia as its immense branches spread
embracing the sky; the peaceful grandeur of the human body
framed by muscles pulling in balance as muscle tone provides
breathless grace in the glide of a ballet dancer or the dunk-shot of an
athlete; natural bridges of rock suspending tensions across a divide
filling the eye with wonder. From the wing of a bumblebee to the
ambling of the great Colorado through the Grand Canyon, we see
forces that could wrench into chaos in a moments notice if not for
the balance, the peace, the harmony of unfathomable forces.
While Laurie McQuary is explicit about events involving the
period of transition, Atira presents us with a fascinating picture of a
new Earth. In The Messengers, Laurie played a key role in the story,
pushing Nick to meet with Julia Ingram, co-author of the book,
which emerged from the past-life regression sessions with Nick
Bunick. Since the first day Nick walked into her office, Laurie
continued to function in a guiding role helping to unfold this
incredible story. Laurie is a no-nonsense kind of person who tells it
like it is. If you dont like it, well, thats really your problem. She
speaks just as honestly in portraying the transition period with
which we presently find ourselves struggling.
Ive been saying for the last ten years and Ill throw it out to
you what Ive been telling other people in readings: I think the
government as we know it is going to go. I think it needs to go. I
dont think its going to stop tomorrow, but I think we are going to
continue to have real problems with the government cutting out, not
supporting people. So people are going to start recognizing that
what they needed to do all along was be responsible for themselves.
I think we are looking at a time period of between the next three
to six years, she declares with an even voice, where health care is
going to be different. Major changes will be starting. Its not going to
be something everybodys going to be up in arms over, crying, Oh
my God! We have to rebel! I spent fourteen years in intensive-care
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 232
nursing. One of the reasons I got out was because of the bureaucracy
not because of the patients, I loved the patients. So the health field
is falling to its knees right now. And what youre going to see is more
people in areas like physician-assistant programs, people who are
going to be available because the hospitals, as we know them, arent
going to be able to sustain the present system.
My gawd, twelve years ago, when I quit nursing and started
this work permanently, I could not afford health insurance. And I
only had one child then. I simply could not afford the insurance. It
took me two years before I could afford the premiums. That
situation is going to become a reality for everybody.
Others see the day when medicine will no longer be in the hands
of doctors, but in the hands of healers. In discussions with other
seers we hear, In the future, we will lose faith in our healthcare
system for the simple reason that it has been irresponsible, actually
causing illness because of overprescribing of drugs, creating
addictions for the same reason. Many hold the system accountable
for what they call the silent epidemic caused by irresponsible use
of antibiotics: pandemic candida (yeast) infections that weaken the
body, superbacteria increasingly showing up in hospitals,
imbalances in immune systems from a bureaucracy that rarely looks
at the root cause.
Atira echoes the words of fellow clairvoyants: Medicine and
doctors are having to come off of God-status. The healthcare
system will have to face what it should have faced long ago to be
true healers.
Laurie and Atira see the day when healing centers will
ultimately replace hospitals. There will be many ways such healing
teams will be made available to people, says Atira. Many will
discover the power in the God-That-Is, the Spirit-That-Moves-
Through-All-Things. Whether its homeopathy, massage therapy,
Reiki, hypnotherapy, Chiropractic, medicine, or laying on of hands
whatever everyones personal injury experience or illness, dis-
ease can be addressed by the needs of the person with the help of
a team. People will also be helped by their connection with their
angels, knowing that theyre real. That is the area I think we need to
look to the children for.
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 233
Many of these seers talk of the day when doctors will work not
only with the body, but also the mind and the spirit as well. A
wholistic approach to healing will not only be embraced, but so will
a new mechanism of preventive intervention. Classes, workshops,
instructions on how to keep oneself in balance so that disease will
not even have a place to start, are already in the works in several
areas of the country. It will take time for people to recognize this
wholistic movement; however, the demise of our present healthcare
system will only accelerate it.
There will have to be healing centers, says Laurie in her
matter-of-fact way. These have been quietly talked about for a long
time. You cant imagine how many people Ive talked to, in the 26
years Ive lived here, who have said, Oh, my dream is to have a
center. Well, its going to be a dream come true, because we will have
to have these centers. Thats why naturopathic medicine is coming
in so strongly. And obviously, we need to wed the different
philosophies of medicine. If I have my appendix bursting, I dont
think I want to go to a naturopath; I want to go to the hospital and
have it taken out. But, prior to that, it could have been treated by a
naturopath, never getting to the point of being poisonous. Were
going to have health centers take over because I think the massive
need is going to be so great.
Laurie and Atira go on to say how we are being blessed with a
growing number of gifted people who have the capacity to heal in
many different ways. Many people have incarnated at this time to
help others through this transition, to help stabilize our changing
way of life. Laurie sees healers, seers, and spiritual adepts
eventually moving into their own communities where they can
preserve the land, the attitudes, the natural forces required in
bringing balance not only to the body, but also to the mind and
spirit, and even the Earth.
Nicks oversoul revealed that five spiritual leaders will come
forth to usher in a new kind of world. Three of these spiritual leaders
will be men and two will be women. It is a topic that the angels
increasingly share with him. These will not be religious leaders, for
the notion of religion, as we know it, will continue to falter and
wane. In describing their rise to prominence, Laurie says, Its
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 234
always been my experience, for all these years that Ive worked with
the other side, that time is very hard for them to give us. Time does
not really exist on the other side. And in any readings, I always tell
people, It feels like it could be a year or two, but .... They have no
time over there. I would see the emergence of these leaders as being
down the line. I think thats something thats going to crop up here
in the next three to five years. I think thats going to be after the
really heavy-duty stuff has started to kick in. After all, thats usually
what it takes for people to pay attention.
A bright smile beams across Atiras face as she describes the
days when the five spiritual leaders are listened to by the planet. By
being totally awakened, they can be in many places at many times.
They can use energy in different ways to the point of stopping
conflicts, being able to address problems before they even manifest
into reality. They will be like a high council, but not over any
country. There will continue to be levels of government in each
country, but not as we know it today. These government bodies will
have far less influence than they do today. As an example: If they
saw a rebel cause arising in Mexico, there would be a way of going
there and resolving it before it becomes an issue manifesting as civil
war, before arms are used and bullets fly. The need for arms, around
the world, will diminish dramatically. The money spent on military
armaments will be used for the betterment of humankind in
peaceful ways.
Atira goes on to describe the kind of society that arises after the
days of transition. In every country there will be a middle class, an
upper class, based not on how much income they bring in, but based
upon their spiritual development. There will be people whose job it
will be to keep peace and harmony, to monitor forces that are
disruptive. To take care of these disruptive forces, there will be
people who do healing work, on many different levels healing
individuals, animals, families, regional conflicts, and even the Earth
herself.
The five spiritual leaders will activate the various levels of what
needs to be done in a given country. Each country will have
corresponding centers or strata of spiritual purpose. All levels of
conflict, whether personal or group-based will be addressed. After
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 235
all, it is the collection of individuals with personal problems that

tend to cause problems for the rest. So these gifted people will be
able to be sent in and work with areas where problems are
developing. Not wait until a war breaks out or conflict erupts. Those
involved in disruptions will have to face the source of their own
personal turmoil. We tend to hate anything outside ourselves that
reflects our own personal flaws. So, its at a personal level that
people will be brought together, brought into healing.
What these clairvoyants are seeing is a world of peace. Not a
Pollyanna world of hearts and flowers or rose-colored glasses, but a
world where growth, resolve and turmoil are surrendered in a
consciousness of healing, cooperation, and communal support. The
five spiritual leaders will be the hub of this worldwide wheel of
spiritual emphasis that turns on the path of universal love and
compassion.
And how will these spiritual leaders command respect? We are
told that it will be like walking into a room occupied by Mother
Teresa or Gandhi theres a reverence. Respect is automatic, for it
will come from the heart. Only the most hardened of hearts would
be able to ignore such loving entities, such compassionate souls.
Laurie takes us a step further into the detail around this
upcoming world of spiritual consciousness. There will be other
Apostles here besides Nick. I dont believe they are all here in the
United States. I think there are six more who are going to surface.
One could be in South America. And I think ... hmmm ... one could
come out of the British Isles. There are two here in the United States,
and two more someplace in Central Europe. The problem is, I dont
know if all these people are in tune with who they are. When these
books go international, you will see some stuff surface. And, of
course, what you dont want are the wannabes. They will have to be
separated out. But I wouldnt worry too much about where these
people are. Even if they dont consciously know it, they are here to
do whatever work needs to be done, whether that affects whole
communities or only ten people in their lives. They are here for the
purpose of doing their work again.
But what about world religions? How will they react to these
spiritual leaders as their influence grows?
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 236
Lauries reaction to the question is immediate. I think the role

of religion has been addressed for the last several years. Were
starting to see some real truth-telling going on. Eventually, people
will fall away from religion, as we know it, and move toward a
world-based belief system. The word religion wont apply. It will
be based on spirituality, not religion. People will finally come to
recognize that we create our own world through what we think. You
know, prejudices, bigotry everything negative weve ever talked
about for hundreds of years is going to become a reality if we
dont change that. We have to change our attitudes, our
compartmentalized thinking. Theres no leeway anymore. We have
to start caring for each other physically, emotionally, and spiritually.
Im personally immersed in Native American spirituality. Which is
merely love of the Earth its love of Nature. If people just did
something like that even if they still wanted to stay Presbyterian,
it would be fine. But if we just honor where we live, that could
become a world religion, a world belief system. Of course, isnt that
what environmentalists are really talking to us about?
The angels tell us that business and environment will no longer
compete in this new world. Economies will no longer operate on
supply and demand, survival of the fittest. Instead, economics will
be based on supportive, cooperative models. It wont be who can
outdo whom, Atira says, quoting the angelic guides. Her eyes are
constantly darting back and forth between invisible beings while the
conversation goes on. In the new business world, the real power
will lie in the power of understanding one another, working with
one another. There will be people who will be wealthy, but it wont
be a selfish kind of wealth. Businesses will no longer focus on
taking from the Earth, but how to nourish it. Atira tries to relay a
message from the angels that cant be translated. They are talking
about a different form of recycling that we cant even fathom now.
Its a regeneration of the Earth. The sparks of this are only now
developing. Her eyes go wide as she sees a picture that defies her
understanding.
Laurie reminds us of the world in which we dwell today. What
I frankly think is lets live in the here-and-now. What we do today is
what were going to create for tomorrow. I think we have some years
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 237
to do something about this world we are going to inherit. I honestly

believe we all have this incredible ability to connect with everything
in the universe at any time. Weve managed to cast everything into
black and white. Our world does not operate in black in white, it
operates in many colors. Yet everything has been narrowed down to
probabilities. Everyone wants prove-ability, quantification on the
physical plane when in actuality, what I think we still need to be
looking at is the faith inside ourselves, trusting in ourselves a
spirituality that knows no bounds. No religion, no physical body, no
limited thought. We are the makers of the days of wonder. Are we
willing to believe that?
THE END
Laurie McQuary Readings

503-636-1832
www.lauriemcquary.com
Interviewed in the book

Psychic Criminology
by Whitney S. Hibbard
Raymond W. Worring
Richard Brennan
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 238
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 239
Resources List
The Days of Wonder are about Oneness. It is in working together
that we discover the power of our different gifts contributing to the
whole. The following are people who foster Oneness and help
others to do so:
Nick Bunick Doreen Virtue
The Great Tomorrow Inspirational author and lecturer
P.O. Box 2222 www.angeltherapy.com
Lake Oswego - OR 97035
www.TheGreatTomorrow.org Marianne Williamson
Inspirational author and lecturer
GW Hardin www.Marianne.com
DreamSpeaker Creations, Inc.
P.O. Box 16134 Julia Ingram
Missoula - MT 59808 Regression Therapist
www.gwhardin.com Inspirational author and lecturer
2550 E. Ft. Lowell Rd.
Atira Angelic Mystic Tucson - AZ 85716
P.O. Box 68207 Internet and Telephone Counseling:
Seattle - WA 98168 520-319-6444
206-767-5611 RegressionTX@aol.com
www.AngelScribe.com www.juliaingram.com
Mary Ellen Angel Scribe Joey Klein

P.O. Box 1004 Health and Wellness Center
Cottage Grove - OR. 97424 P.O. Box 44
www.AngelScribe.com Andover - KS 67002
www.joeyklein.com
Prayer Team
AngelScribe.com/prayteam.html Association for Research and
Enlightenment, Inc.
Laurie McQuary A.R.E.
Readings 215 67th Street
503-636-1832 Virigina Beach - VA 23451
www.lauriemcquary.com 800-333-4499
www.edgarcayce.org
Michael Hoefler
Awakenings Childhelp USA
P.O. Box 517 480-922-8212
Victor - MT 59875 www.childhelpusa.org
406-642-3630
awakenings1@qwest.net Hay House Inc.
P.O. Box 5100
Harvey Caine Carlsbad - CA 92018-5100
Synergy: Fully Integrated Healthcare 800-654-5126
1605 W. Garland, Spokane - WA 99025 www.hayhouse.com
509-245-3838.
Days.Ch14 2/12/03 4:44 PM Page 240

GW Hardin - Days of Wonder

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GW Hardin - Days of Wonder

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GW Hardin - Days of Wonder

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The

DreamSpeaker Creations, Inc.

Copyright 2002 G.W. Hardin

First printing: February 2003

Cover design: Ken Elliott, G.W. Hardin, and Gary LaCroix

Set in 11 point Palatino typeface

Dedicated to all the ordinary people

FOREWORD by Mary Ellen Angel Scribe xi

CHAPTER 1: The Soft People 17

CHAPTER 5: The Secret 71

CHAPTER 9: The Symposium 155

RESOURCES LIST 239

The Days of wonder

The Days of Wonder rekindles the small ember of trust in the

said I would be receiving a very important phone call on December

Mary Ellen Angel Scribe

THE SOFT PEOPLE

I t is here. Fanfares of trumpets did not announce its arrival, nor

18 the days of wonder

Dear Mr. Bunick:

Since the publishing of The Messengers, I imagine that you have

My wife, Carolyn, bought the book, and we read it together over

This came from a series of quiet discussions with Daniel. It

This child touched all he met in a special way. People felt

As he began to speak, he often spoke to unseen friends he

the soft people 19

One night, he spoke to his mother of the soft people. He

One of the secrets of this special small person that keeps

Carolyn and I find it impossible to imagine how anyone could read

20 the days of wonder

the soft people 21

It is not the end of the world that is coming. It is the beginning of

The present offers little difference from the past. Throughout

The young adults of today may not articulate the frustration of

22 the days of wonder

messages where love is turned to fear. Not messages of

People are searching for a true understanding of their

the soft people 23

24 the days of wonder

the soft people 25

There is a spiritual consciousness spreading throughout the world

We live in a new Age of Wonders which will embrace spiritual

As Nick continued to turn the pages of his Angel Journal, he

26 the days of wonder

take the combined presence of the God-Within us all, the total

AN ANGEL IN NEW YORK

M ad Dog! Brian yelled across the suite offices. Nick had

28 the days of wonder

an angel in new york 29

30 the days of wonder

Absolutely, she crowed. She knew something was up for Nick

an angel in new york 31

Looking forward, there seemed to be so much at stake. What

32 the days of wonder

for the priesthood at a Benedictine monastery, he viewed everything

an angel in new york 33

Brian stole the carafe of goldfish crackers, pouring a handful of the

34 the days of wonder

an angel in new york 35

Stefanos delivered his three newfound friends in the middle of the